Nikon D4S

User Manual: Nikon-D4S

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 500

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part
(except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be
made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.

DIGITAL CAMERA

User's Manual

Printed in Japan

SB4A01(11)

6MB20611-01

Nikon Manual Viewer 2
Use the Nikon Manual Viewer 2 app to view
manuals anytime, anywhere on your smartphone or
tablet.

To get the most from your camera, please be sure to read all instructions
thoroughly and keep them where they will be read by all those who use
the product.
Symbols and Conventions
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols
and conventions are used:

This icon marks cautions; information that should be read before
use to prevent damage to the camera.

This icon marks notes; information that should be read before
using the camera.

This icon marks references to other pages in this manual.

Menu items, options, and messages displayed in the camera monitor are
shown in bold.
Camera Settings
The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used.
Nikon Manual Viewer 2
Install the Nikon Manual Viewer 2 app on your smartphone or tablet
to view Nikon digital camera manuals, anytime, anywhere. Nikon
Manual Viewer 2 can be downloaded free of charge from the App
Store and Google Play. Download of the app and any product
manuals requires an Internet connection, for which fees may be
levied by your phone or Internet service provider.

A For Your Safety
Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety
instructions in “For Your Safety” (0 xii–xv).

Package Contents
Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera.
• D4S digital
camera (0 1)

• BF-1B body cap (0 27,
411)
• BS-2 accessory shoe
cover (0 16, 195)

• MH-26a battery charger with
• EN-EL18a rechargeable Li-ion
power cable and two contact
battery with terminal cover (0 21,
protectors (shape of power cable
24)
depends on country of sale; 0 21,
459)

• USB cable clip
(0 273)

• HDMI cable clip
(0 287)

• UC-E15 USB cable (0 272, 280)
• ViewNX 2 installer CD (0 269)
• User’s Manual (this guide)

• UF-2 connector cover for
stereo mini plug cable
(0 413)

• AN-DC11 strap (0 21)
• Warranty
• Network Guide

Memory cards are sold separately. Cameras purchased in Japan
display menus and messages in English and Japanese only; other
languages are not supported. We apologize for any inconvenience
this may cause.

Table of Contents
For Your Safety ......................................................................................xii
Notices.................................................................................................... xvi

Introduction

Getting to Know the Camera..............................................................1
Camera Body ....................................................................................... 1
The Top Control Panel ..................................................................... 6
The Rear Control Panel .................................................................... 8
The Viewfinder Display..................................................................10
The Information Display................................................................12
The BS-2 Accessory Shoe Cover .................................................16

Tutorial

Camera Menus...................................................................................... 17
Using Camera Menus .....................................................................18
Help ......................................................................................................20

First Steps ............................................................................................... 21
Attach the Camera Strap...............................................................21
Charge the Battery ..........................................................................21
Insert the Battery .............................................................................24
Attach a Lens.....................................................................................27
Basic Setup.........................................................................................29
Insert a Memory Card.....................................................................32
Format the Memory Card .............................................................35
Adjust Viewfinder Focus ...............................................................38

Basic Photography and Playback................................................... 40
Turn the Camera On .......................................................................40
Ready the Camera ...........................................................................42
Focus and Shoot ..............................................................................43
Viewing Photographs ....................................................................46
Deleting Unwanted Photographs .............................................47

Live View Photography

Focusing in Live View Photography and
Movie Live View .......................................................................... 52
The Live View Display: Live View Photography ................... 55
The Information Display: Live View Photography............... 58
Manual Focus ................................................................................... 59
Live View Shutter Release Options........................................... 60

Movie Live View

Indices ................................................................................................. 66
The Live View Display: Movie Live View ................................. 67
The Information Display: Movie Live View............................. 69
Image Area ........................................................................................ 70
Taking Photos During Movie Live View .................................. 71
Movie Settings ................................................................................. 74

Viewing Movies .................................................................................... 77
Editing Movies ...................................................................................... 79
Trimming Movies ............................................................................ 79
Saving Selected Frames................................................................ 82

Image Recording Options

Image Area............................................................................................. 85
Image Quality........................................................................................ 90
Image Size .............................................................................................. 94
Using Two Memory Cards ................................................................ 96

iii

Focus

Autofocus ............................................................................................... 97
Autofocus Mode ..............................................................................97
AF-Area Mode................................................................................ 100
Focus Point Selection.................................................................. 103
Focus Lock....................................................................................... 105

Manual Focus ......................................................................................108

Release Mode

111

Choosing a Release Mode ..............................................................111
Continuous Release Modes ...................................................... 112

Self-Timer Mode.................................................................................114
Mirror up Mode ..................................................................................116

ISO Sensitivity

117

Manual Adjustment ..........................................................................117
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control ..........................................................119

Exposure

123

Metering ...............................................................................................123
Exposure Mode...................................................................................125
e: Programmed Auto .................................................................. 127
f: Shutter-Priority Auto .............................................................. 128
g: Aperture-Priority Auto ........................................................... 129
h: Manual......................................................................................... 130

Long Time-Exposures (h Mode Only).........................................132
Shutter-Speed and Aperture Lock...............................................134
Autoexposure (AE) Lock..................................................................136
Exposure Compensation.................................................................138
Bracketing ............................................................................................140

White Balance

155

White Balance Options ....................................................................155
Fine-Tuning White Balance............................................................158
Choosing a Color Temperature ....................................................161
Preset Manual .....................................................................................164
Viewfinder Photography ............................................................165
Live View (Spot White Balance) ...............................................169
Managing Presets .........................................................................172

Image Enhancement

177

Picture Controls..................................................................................177
Selecting a Picture Control........................................................177
Modifying Picture Controls .......................................................179
Creating Custom Picture Controls ..........................................183
Sharing Custom Picture Controls............................................186

Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows.........................188
Active D-Lighting ..........................................................................188
High Dynamic Range (HDR) ......................................................190

Flash Photography

195

Using a Flash .......................................................................................195
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) ..........................196
i-TTL Flash Control........................................................................202

Flash Modes.........................................................................................203
Flash Compensation.........................................................................206
FV Lock ..................................................................................................208

Other Shooting Options

211

Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings .......................211
Multiple Exposure .............................................................................214
Interval Timer Photography...........................................................221
Time-Lapse Photography ...............................................................229
Non-CPU Lenses.................................................................................235
Location Data......................................................................................238

More About Playback

241

Viewing Images..................................................................................241
Full-Frame Playback .................................................................... 241
Thumbnail Playback .................................................................... 241
Playback Controls ........................................................................ 242

Photo Information.............................................................................244
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom........................................253
Protecting Photographs from Deletion.....................................255
Deleting Photographs .....................................................................257
Full-Frame and Thumbnail Playback..................................... 257
The Playback Menu...................................................................... 259

Voice Memos

261

Recording Voice Memos .................................................................261
Playing Voice Memos .......................................................................266

Connections

269

Installing ViewNX 2 ...........................................................................269
Using ViewNX 2 ..................................................................................272
Copy Pictures to the Computer............................................... 272
View Pictures.................................................................................. 275
Ethernet and Wireless Networks............................................. 276

Printing Photographs.......................................................................279
Connecting the Printer ...............................................................280
Printing Pictures One at a Time ...............................................280
Printing Multiple Pictures ..........................................................282
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set..................................283

Viewing Photographs on TV..........................................................285
HDMI Options.................................................................................286

Menu Guide

289

D The Playback Menu: Managing Images ..............................289
Playback Folder.........................................................................290
Hide Image..................................................................................290
Playback Display Options......................................................291
Copy Image(s)............................................................................292
Image Review.............................................................................295
After Delete ................................................................................296
Rotate Tall ...................................................................................296
Slide Show...................................................................................297

C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options ..............................299
Shooting Menu Bank...............................................................300
Extended Menu Banks............................................................301
Storage Folder ...........................................................................302
File Naming.................................................................................304
JPEG/TIFF Recording ...............................................................304
NEF (RAW) Recording..............................................................304
Color Space.................................................................................305
Vignette Control .......................................................................306
Auto Distortion Control .........................................................307
Long Exposure NR
(Long Exposure Noise Reduction) .................................308
High ISO NR ................................................................................308

vii

A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings...............309
Custom Settings Bank ............................................................ 311
a: Autofocus.................................................................................... 313
a1: AF-C Priority Selection..................................................... 313
a2: AF-S Priority Selection ..................................................... 314
a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On ....................................... 314
a4: AF Activation ...................................................................... 315
a5: Focus Point Illumination................................................. 315
a6: Focus Point Wrap-Around ............................................. 316
a7: Number of Focus Points ................................................. 316
a8: Assign AF-ON Button....................................................... 317
a9: Assign AF-ON Button (Vert.).......................................... 318
a10: Store by Orientation ...................................................... 319
a11: Limit AF-Area Mode Selection ................................... 320
a12: Autofocus Mode Restrictions ..................................... 320
b: Metering/Exposure ................................................................. 321
b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value .............................................. 321
b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl........................................... 321
b3: Exp./Flash Comp. Step Value........................................ 321
b4: Easy Exposure Compensation...................................... 322
b5: Matrix Metering................................................................. 323
b6: Center-Weighted Area.................................................... 323
b7: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure........................................ 323
c: Timers/AE Lock.......................................................................... 324
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L......................................... 324
c2: Standby Timer .................................................................... 324
c3: Self-Timer ............................................................................. 325
c4: Monitor off Delay .............................................................. 325
d: Shooting/Display ..................................................................... 326
d1: Beep....................................................................................... 326
d2: Continuous Shooting Speed ........................................ 326
d3: Max. Continuous Release............................................... 327
d4: Exposure Delay Mode ..................................................... 327
d5: File Number Sequence ................................................... 328
d6: Viewfinder Grid Display.................................................. 329
d7: Control Panel/Viewfinder .............................................. 329
d8: Screen Tips .......................................................................... 329
d9: Information Display ......................................................... 330
d10: LCD Illumination............................................................. 330

viii

e: Bracketing/Flash .......................................................................331
e1: Flash Sync Speed ...............................................................331
e2: Flash Shutter Speed..........................................................332
e3: Optional Flash.....................................................................332
e4: Exposure Comp. for Flash...............................................333
e5: Modeling Flash...................................................................333
e6: Auto Bracketing Set..........................................................333
e7: Auto Bracketing (Mode M) .............................................334
e8: Bracketing Order................................................................334
f: Controls.........................................................................................335
f1: Multi Selector Center Button..........................................335
f2: Multi Selector.......................................................................336
f3: Assign Fn Button.................................................................337
f4: Assign Preview Button......................................................342
f5: Assign Sub-selector ...........................................................342
f6: Assign Sub-selector Center.............................................342
f7: Assign Fn Button (Vert.) ...................................................343
f8: Shutter Spd & Aperture Lock..........................................343
f9: Assign BKT Button..............................................................344
f10: Customize Command Dials..........................................345
f11: Release Button to Use Dial............................................347
f12: Slot Empty Release Lock................................................347
f13: Reverse Indicators............................................................347
f14: Assign Multi Selector (Vert.) .........................................348
f15: Playback Zoom .................................................................348
f16: Assign Movie Record Button........................................349
f17: Live View Button Options .............................................349
f18: Assign Remote (WR) Fn Button...................................350
f19: Lens Focus Function Buttons ......................................351
g: Movie ............................................................................................353
g1: Assign Fn Button ...............................................................353
g2: Assign Preview Button ....................................................355
g3: Assign Sub-selector Center ...........................................356
g4: Assign Shutter Button .....................................................357

B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup...............................................358
Format Memory Card ............................................................. 359
Monitor Brightness.................................................................. 359
Monitor Color Balance ........................................................... 360
Image Dust Off Ref Photo ..................................................... 361
Flicker Reduction...................................................................... 363
Time Zone and Date ............................................................... 363
Language .................................................................................... 364
Auto Image Rotation .............................................................. 364
Battery Info................................................................................. 365
Image Comment ...................................................................... 366
Copyright Information ........................................................... 367
IPTC ............................................................................................... 368
Save/Load Settings.................................................................. 370
Virtual Horizon .......................................................................... 372
AF Fine-Tune.............................................................................. 373
Firmware Version ..................................................................... 374

N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies .............375
D-Lighting................................................................................... 379
Red-Eye Correction.................................................................. 380
Trim ............................................................................................... 381
Monochrome............................................................................. 382
Filter Effects................................................................................ 382
Color Balance............................................................................. 383
Image Overlay ........................................................................... 384
NEF (RAW) Processing ............................................................ 387
Resize............................................................................................ 389
Straighten ................................................................................... 391
Distortion Control.................................................................... 392
Perspective Control................................................................. 393
Side-by-Side Comparison ..................................................... 394

O My Menu/m Recent Settings....................................................396

Technical Notes

401

Compatible Lenses ...........................................................................401
Other Accessories..............................................................................408
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter .................414

Caring for the Camera......................................................................416
Storage..............................................................................................416
Cleaning ...........................................................................................416
The Low-Pass Filter.......................................................................417
“Clean Now” ...............................................................................417
“Clean at Startup/Shutdown” ..............................................418
Manual Cleaning.......................................................................420
Replacing the Clock Battery ......................................................424

Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions..........................426
Defaults .................................................................................................430
Exposure Program.............................................................................438
Troubleshooting ................................................................................439
Battery/Display ..............................................................................439
Shooting...........................................................................................439
Playback ...........................................................................................442
Miscellaneous.................................................................................443

Error Messages ...................................................................................444
Specifications......................................................................................450
Calibrating Batteries ....................................................................459

Approved Memory Cards ...............................................................462
Memory Card Capacity ....................................................................464
Battery Life ...........................................................................................467
Index.......................................................................................................469

For Your Safety
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to
others, read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using
this equipment. Keep these safety instructions where all those who use
the product will read them.
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the
precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol:
icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all
A This
warnings before using this Nikon product.

❚❚ WARNINGS
A Keep the sun out of the frame
Keep the sun well out of the frame
when shooting backlit subjects.
Sunlight focused into the camera
when the sun is in or close to the
frame could cause a fire.

A Do not look at the sun through the
viewfinder
Viewing the sun or other strong
light source through the
viewfinder could cause
permanent visual impairment.

A Using the viewfinder diopter adjustment
control
When operating the viewfinder
diopter adjustment control with
your eye to the viewfinder, care
should be taken not to put your
finger in your eye accidentally.

xii

A Turn off immediately in the event of
malfunction
Should you notice smoke or an
unusual smell coming from the
equipment or AC adapter
(available separately), unplug the
AC adapter and remove the
battery immediately, taking care
to avoid burns. Continued
operation could result in injury.
After removing the battery, take
the equipment to a Nikonauthorized service center for
inspection.

A Do not disassemble
Touching the product’s internal
parts could result in injury. In the
event of malfunction, the product
should be repaired only by a
qualified technician. Should the
product break open as the result
of a fall or other accident, remove
the battery and/or AC adapter
and then take the product to a
Nikon-authorized service center
for inspection.

A Do not use in the presence of flammable A Observe proper precautions when
gas
Do not use electronic equipment
in the presence of flammable gas,
as this could result in explosion or
fire.

A Keep out of reach of children
Failure to observe this precaution
could result in injury. In addition,
note that small parts constitute a
chocking hazard. Should a child
swallow any part of this
equipment, consult a physician
immediately.

A Do not place the strap around the neck of
an infant or child
Placing the camera strap around
the neck of an infant or child
could result in strangulation.

A Do not remain in contact with the
camera, battery, or charger for extended
periods while the devices are on or in use
Parts of the device become hot.
Leaving the device in direct
contact with the skin for extended
periods may result in lowtemperature burns.

•
•

•

•
•
•

A Do not leave the product where it will be
exposed to extremely high
temperatures, such as in an enclosed
automobile or in direct sunlight
Failure to observe this precaution
could cause damage or fire.

•

handling batteries
Batteries may leak or explode if
improperly handled. Observe the
following precautions when
handling batteries for use in this
product:
Use only batteries approved for
use in this equipment.
Use only CR1616 lithium batteries
to replace the clock battery. Using
another type of battery could
cause an explosion. Dispose of
used batteries as directed.
Do not short or disassemble the
battery.
Be sure the product is off before
replacing the battery. If you are
using an AC adapter, be sure it is
unplugged.
Do not attempt to insert the
battery upside down or
backwards.
Do not expose the battery to
flame or to excessive heat.
Do not immerse in or expose to
water.
Replace the terminal cover when
transporting the battery. Do not
transport or store the battery with
metal objects such as necklaces or
hairpins.
Batteries are prone to leakage
when fully discharged. To avoid
damage to the product, be sure to
remove the battery when no
charge remains.
When the battery is not in use,
attach the terminal cover and
store in a cool, dry place.

xiii

• The battery may be hot
immediately after use or when the
product has been used on battery
power for an extended period.
Before removing the battery turn
the camera off and allow the
battery to cool.
• Discontinue use immediately
should you notice any changes in
the battery, such as discoloration
or deformation.

A Observe proper precautions when

• Do not handle the plug or charger
with wet hands. Failure to
observe this precaution could
result in injury or product
malfunction due to fire or electric
shock.
• Do not use with travel converters
or adapters designed to convert
from one voltage to another or
with DC-to-AC inverters. Failure
to observe this precaution could
damage the product or cause
overheating or fire.

handling the charger
• Keep dry. Failure to observe this A Use appropriate cables
When connecting cables to the
precaution could result in injury
input and output jacks, use only
or product malfunction due to fire
the cables provided or sold by
or electric shock.
Nikon for the purpose to maintain
• Dust on or near the metal parts of
compliance with product
the plug should be removed with
regulations.
a dry cloth. Continued use could
result in fire.
A CD-ROMs
• Do not handle the power cable or
CD-ROMs containing software or
go near the charger during
manuals should not be played
thunderstorms. Failure to observe
back on audio CD equipment.
this precaution could result in
Playing CD-ROMs on an audio CD
electric shock.
player could cause hearing loss or
• Do not damage, modify, or
damage the equipment.
forcibly tug or bend the power
A Do not aim a flash at the operator of a
cable. Do not place it under
motor vehicle
heavy objects or expose it to heat
Failure to observe this precaution
or flame. Should the insulation be
could result in accidents.
damaged and the wires become
exposed, take the power cable to
a Nikon-authorized service
representative for inspection.
Failure to observe this precaution
could result in fire or electric
shock.

xiv

A Observe caution when using the flash

A Do not carry tripods with a lens or
• Using optional flash units in close
camera attached
contact with the skin or other
You could trip or accidentally
objects could cause burns.
strike others, resulting in injury.
• Using optional flash units close to A Follow the instructions of airline and
the subject’s eyes could cause
hospital personnel
temporary visual impairment. The
This camera transmits radio
flash should be no less than one
frequencies that could interfere
meter (3 ft 4 in.) from the subject.
with medical equipment or
Particular care should be
aircraft navigation. Disable the
observed when photographing
wireless network feature and
infants.
remove all wireless accessories
A Avoid contact with liquid crystal
from the camera before boarding
Should the monitor break, care
an aircraft, and turn the camera
should be taken to avoid injury
off during take off and landing. In
due to broken glass and to
medical facilities, follow staff
prevent the liquid crystal from the
instructions regarding the use of
monitor touching the skin or
wireless devices.
entering the eyes or mouth.

Notices
• No part of the manuals included with • Nikon will not be held liable for any
damages resulting from the use of this
this product may be reproduced,
product.
transmitted, transcribed, stored in a
retrieval system, or translated into any • While every effort has been made to
ensure that the information in these
language in any form, by any means,
manuals is accurate and complete, we
without Nikon’s prior written
would appreciate it were you to bring
permission.
any errors or omissions to the attention
• Nikon reserves the right to change the
of the Nikon representative in your
specifications of the hardware and
area (address provided separately).
software described in these manuals at
any time and without prior notice.
Notices for Customers in Canada
CAN ICES-3 B / NMB-3 B
Notices for Customers in Europe
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF
USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
This symbol indicates that
electrical and electronic
equipment is to be collected
separately.

This symbol on the battery
indicates that the battery is
to be collected separately.

The following apply only to
The following apply only to
users in European countries:
users in European countries:
• All batteries, whether marked with this
• This product is designated for separate
symbol or not, are designated for
collection at an appropriate collection
separate collection at an appropriate
point. Do not dispose of as household
collection point. Do not dispose of as
waste.
household waste.
• Separate collection and recycling
• For more information, contact the
helps conserve natural resources and
retailer or the local authorities in
prevent negative consequences for
charge of waste management.
human health and the environment
that might result from incorrect
disposal.
• For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.

xvi

Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.

The Battery Charger

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS
DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug
adapter of the proper configuration for the power outlet if needed. This
power unit is intended to be correctly oriented in a vertical or floor
mount position.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This CAUTIONS
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate Modifications
radio frequency energy and, if not installed The FCC requires the user be notified that
any changes or modifications made to this
and used in accordance with the
device that are not expressly approved by
instructions, may cause harmful
Nikon Corporation may void the user’s
interference to radio communications.
authority to operate the equipment.
However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular
The accessory power cord must be used
installation. If this equipment does cause For USA only: Over AC 125 V
harmful interference to radio or television Use a power cord over AWG 18 in size
reception, which can be determined by
suited to the voltage in use with plugs
turning the equipment off and on, the user rated for AC 250 V 15 A (NEMA 6P-15)
is encouraged to try to correct the
and a minimum of SVT type cord for
interference by one or more of the
insulation.
following measures:
Power Supply Cord
• Reorient or relocate the receiving
Use a UL Listed, 1.8 to 3 m (6 to 10 ft),
antenna.
SPT-2, AWG no. 18 power supply cord
• Increase the separation between the
rated for 125 V 7 A, with a non-polarized
equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet NEMA 1-15P plug rated for 125 V 15 A.
on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/television technician for help.

xvii

Notice for Customers in the State of California
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,
may expose you to lead, a chemical known Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
to the State of California to cause birth
Tel.: 631-547-4200
defects or other reproductive harm. Wash
hands after handling.
Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage
devices does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can
sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially
available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image
data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another
person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and
then completely refill it with images containing no private information (for
example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for
preset manual (0 172). Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically
destroying data storage devices.
Before discarding the camera or transferring ownership to another person, you
should also use the Network > Network settings option in the camera setup
menu to delete any personal network information. For more information on
deleting network profiles, see the supplied network guide.
AVC Patent Portfolio License
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND
NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC
STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER
ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO
PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR
ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
http://www.mpegla.com

xviii

Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or
reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be
punishable by law.
• Items prohibited by law from being copied or
reproduced
Do not copy or reproduce paper
money, coins, securities, government
bonds, or local government bonds,
even if such copies or reproductions
are stamped “Sample.”
The copying or reproduction of paper
money, coins, or securities which are
circulated in a foreign country is
prohibited.

• Cautions on certain copies and reproductions
The government has issued cautions
on copies or reproductions of
securities issued by private companies
(shares, bills, checks, gift certificates,
etc.), commuter passes, or coupon
tickets, except when a minimum of
necessary copies are to be provided for
business use by a company. Also, do
not copy or reproduce passports
issued by the government, licenses
issued by public agencies and private
groups, ID cards, and tickets, such as
passes and meal coupons.

Unless the prior permission of the
government has been obtained, the
copying or reproduction of unused
• Comply with copyright notices
postage stamps or post cards issued by
The copying or reproduction of
the government is prohibited.
copyrighted creative works such as
The copying or reproduction of stamps books, music, paintings, woodcuts,
prints, maps, drawings, movies, and
issued by the government and of
photographs is governed by national
certified documents stipulated by law
and international copyright laws. Do
is prohibited.
not use this product for the purpose of
making illegal copies or to infringe
copyright laws.
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex
electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including chargers,
batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon specifically for use
with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the
operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the
camera and may void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party
rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal
shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera
or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized
Nikon dealer.

xix

Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with
your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within
its operational and safety requirements. THE USE OF NON-NIKON
ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON
WARRANTY.

Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a
Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years,
and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees
apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are
particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any
accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional
flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or
serviced.

Before Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or
before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the
camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for
damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.

Life-Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing
product support and education, continually-updated information is
available on-line at the following sites:
• For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/
• For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information,
tips, answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice
on digital imaging and photography. Additional information may be
available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the following
URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/

XIntroduction
Getting to Know the Camera
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls
and displays. You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and
refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual.

Camera Body

1 D button
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Bracketing...........142, 146, 150, 344
Release mode dial lock release.....111
Eyelet for camera strap..................... 21
M button
Flash mode ....................................204
Flash compensation ....................206
Y button
Metering.........................................124
Release mode dial............................111
Power switch...................................9, 40
Shutter-release button ...............43, 44
Movie-record button................ 65, 349

10 E button
Exposure compensation ............ 138

11 I/Q button
12
13
14
15
16
17

Exposure mode ............................ 125
Formatting memory cards ...........35
Eyelet for camera strap......................21
Top control panel..................................6
Focal plane mark (E) .................... 109
Diopter adjustment control .............38
Accessory shoe (for optional flash
unit)...............................................16, 195
Accessory shoe cover.......16, 195, 428

Camera Body (Continued)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Mirror......................................116, 420
Self-timer lamp .............................115
Microphone (for movies)........65, 75
Flash sync terminal cover...........195
Ten-pin remote terminal
cover.......................................238, 412
Flash sync terminal ......................195
Ten-pin remote terminal ...238, 412
USB connector cover ..........272, 280
Peripheral connector cover........409
Audio connector cover......... 75, 261
HDMI/Ethernet connector
cover.......................................276, 285
Peripheral connector...................409

13 USB connector .....................272, 280
14 Headphone connector......... 68, 267
15 Connector for external
microphone ............................ 75, 261
16 HDMI connector ...........................285
17 Ethernet connector......................276
18 Lens release button ....................... 28
19 AF-mode button.......52, 54, 98, 101
20 Battery-chamber cover latch....... 24
21 Battery-chamber cover ................. 24
22 Focus-mode selector ..... 52, 97, 108
23 Meter coupling lever ...................453
24 Body cap.................................. 27, 411

Close the Connector Cover
Close the connector cover when the connectors are not in use. Foreign
matter in the connectors can interfere with data transfer.

1 Pv button
6 Vertical shooting shutter-release
Using the Pv button
button lock.......................................42
....................... 54, 66, 126, 342, 355 7 Fn button (vertical)
2 Sub-command dial...................... 345
Using the Fn button (vertical)... 343
3 Fn button
8 CPU contacts
Using the Fn button
9 Lens mounting mark......................28
..............................89, 208, 337, 353 10 Lens mount .............................28, 109
4 Sub-command dial for
11 Tripod socket
vertical shooting.......................... 345
5 Shutter-release button for
vertical shooting

The Speaker
Do not place the speaker in close proximity to magnetic devices. Failure
to observe this precaution could affect the data recorded on the
magnetic devices.

Camera Body (Continued)

1 Viewfinder eyepiece ............. 39, 114
2 Eyepiece shutter lever.......... 39, 114
3 O/Q button
Deletion ............................... 47, 257
Formatting memory cards ....... 35
4 K button
Playback............................... 46, 241
5 Monitor .....46, 49, 63, 241, 359, 360
6 G button
Menus................................... 17, 289
7 L (Z/Q) button
Protection...................................255
Picture Controls ........................177
Help ............................................... 20
8 X button
Playback zoom in......................253
9 W button
Thumbnails ................................241
Playback zoom out...................253

J (OK) button........................ 18, 242
R (info) button ....................... 12, 15
Rear control panel................... 8, 329
S button
ISO sensitivity ............................117
Auto ISO sensitivity control....119
Two-button reset......................211
14 T button
Image quality and size ....... 91, 94
15 U button
White balance .........155, 160, 163
Two-button reset......................211
16 H button
Using the microphone
....................................262, 263, 264
10
11
12
13

1 Viewfinder ........................................38
2 Sub-selector
.......................104, 105, 136, 342, 356
3 B button
AF-ON ..........................99, 106, 317
4 Main command dial.................... 345
5 Multi selector................... 18, 45, 243
6 Card slot cover release button
(under cover) ...................................32
7 Memory card slot cover ......... 32, 34
8 C button
Using the AF-ON button for
vertical shooting...................... 318
9 Main command dial (vertical).... 345
Speaker ....................................78, 267

10 Focus selector lock ...................... 103
11 Microphone
(for voice memos)........................ 261
12 Live view selector .................... 49, 63
13 a button
Live view ....................... 49, 63, 349
14 Multi selector (vertical) .............. 348
15 Memory card access lamp ..... 33, 44
16 Ambient brightness sensor for
automatic monitor brightness
control ......................................57, 359

The Top Control Panel
1
2
3

4
5
6
7
8

1 Shutter speed ..........................128, 130

2
3
4
5
6
7

9
10

11
12
13

8 Number of exposures remaining
AF-area mode ..........................100, 102
........................................................41, 464
Exposure compensation value .....138
Number of shots remaining before
Flash compensation value.............206
memory buffer fills................. 113, 464
Number of shots in
Capture mode indicator................. 411
exposure and flash bracketing
9 Aperture stop indicator......... 129, 405
sequence............................................142 10 Aperture (f-number) ............... 129, 130
Number of shots in
Aperture (number of stops)... 129, 405
WB bracketing sequence ...............146
Bracketing increment ............ 143, 147
HDR exposure differential..............194
Number of shots in ADL bracketing
Number of exposures (multiple
sequence ........................................... 150
exposure) ...........................................216
Number of shots per interval........ 226
Number of intervals for
Maximum aperture
interval timer photography...........226
(non-CPU lenses) ............................. 237
Focal length (non-CPU lenses) .....237
PC mode indicator........................... 411
ISO sensitivity....................................117 11 Battery indicator .................................40
Flexible program indicator ............127
12 Frame count.........................................45
Exposure mode.................................125
Preset white balance
Shooting menu bank ......................300
recording indicator.......................... 166
Active D-Lighting amount.... 151, 341
Custom settings bank .....................311
Manual lens number....................... 237
XQD card indicator.......................34, 35
Time-lapse recording indicator.... 233
CompactFlash card indicator ....34, 35
13 “k” (appears when memory remains
for over 1000 exposures) ..................41

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

25
26

Clock battery indicator ............ 31, 424
FV lock indicator...............................209
Shutter-speed lock icon .................134
Flash sync indicator .........................331
Flash mode ........................................203
Metering.............................................124
AF-area mode indicator.........100, 102
Autofocus mode...........................97, 98
Interval timer indicator...................226
Time-lapse on indicator .................233
Multiple exposure indicator ..........215
Aperture lock icon ...........................135
HDR (series) indicator .....................194
Multiple exposure (series)
indicator .............................................216
HDR indicator....................................191
Satellite signal indicator.................239

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

27 “Beep” indicator ............................... 326
28 Exposure compensation
indicator............................................. 138

29 Flash compensation indicator ...... 206
30 Exposure and flash
bracketing indicator........................ 142
WB bracketing indicator ................ 146
ADL bracketing indicator............... 150
Active D-Lighting indicator .... 151, 341
31 Exposure indicator........................... 131
Exposure compensation
display ................................................ 138
Bracketing progress indicator:
Exposure and flash bracketing..... 142
WB bracketing ............................... 146
ADL bracketing.............................. 150
PC connection indicator................. 411

Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.

The Rear Control Panel
1
2

6
7
8
9
10

4
5

1 “Remaining” indicator ....................329
2 Image size
(JPEG and TIFF images) .................... 94

3 ISO sensitivity indicator..................117
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator........121

4 ISO sensitivity....................................117

11
12
6 Image quality (JPEG images) ...........90
7 Small image size indicator
(NEF/RAW images) .............................95

8 Voice memo recording
indicator (shooting mode) ............ 262

9 Voice memo status

ISO sensitivity (high/low gain) .....118
indicator.................................... 264, 265
Number of exposures remaining ....329 10 Voice memo recording mode....... 262
Length of voice memo....................264 11 White balance................................... 155
White balance fine-tuning.............160
White balance fine-tuning
White balance preset number ......166
indicator............................................. 160
Color temperature ..................157, 161
White balance preset protection
PC mode indicator ...........................411
indicator............................................. 176
5 “k” (appears when memory remains 12 Secondary slot function....................96
for over 1000 exposures).................. 41
Image quality.......................................90
Color temperature indicator .........163

Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.

LCD Illuminators
Rotating the power switch toward D Power switch
activates the standby timer, control
panel backlights (LCD illuminators),
and button backlights (0 330),
making it easier to use the camera in
the dark. After the power switch is
released, the backlights will remain lit
for six seconds while the standby
timer is active or until the shutter is released or the power switch is
rotated toward D again.

The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays
The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with
temperature, and the response times of the displays may drop at low
temperatures. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.

The Viewfinder Display
1

X
6
7

9 10 11 12

14 15 16

1 Framing grid (displayed when On
is selected for Custom Setting d6)
..........................................................329
2 12-mm reference circle for centerweighted metering......................123
3 AF area brackets ............................. 38
4 Focus points.......... 43, 103, 315, 316
Spot metering targets.................123
AF-area mode indicator..............101
Roll indicator 1 ..............................340

19 20

25
5 Exposure indicator .......................131
Exposure compensation display
..........................................................138
Bracketing progress indicator:
Exposure and flash
bracketing ..................................142
Pitch indicator 2 ............................340
6 Exposure compensation
indicator .........................................138
Flash compensation indicator....206

7 Bracketing indicator:
Exposure and flash
bracketing ................................. 140
WB bracketing .......................... 146
ADL bracketing......................... 150
8 Focus indicator.......................43, 109
9 Metering ........................................ 123
10 Autoexposure (AE) lock.............. 136
11 Exposure mode ............................ 125
12 Shutter speed lock icon.............. 134
13 Shutter speed ...................... 128, 130
Autofocus mode ...................... 97, 98
14 Aperture lock icon ....................... 135
15 Aperture (f-number) .......... 129, 130
Aperture
(number of stops)............... 129, 405
16 ISO sensitivity indicator ............. 117
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator .... 120
17 ISO sensitivity ............................... 117
Active D-Lighting amount......... 341
AF-area mode...................... 101, 102
18 Network display ........................... 276

19 Frame count.................................. 329
Number of exposures
remaining .......................41, 329, 464
Number of shots remaining before
memory buffer fills.......43, 113, 464
Preset white balance
recording indicator...................... 166
Exposure compensation value.... 138
Flash compensation value......... 206
PC mode indicator ......................... 411
20 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures) ........................................41
21 Flash-ready indicator 3
........................................ 199, 209, 454
22 FV lock indicator .......................... 209
23 Flash sync indicator..................... 331
24 Aperture stop indicator..... 129, 405
25 Low battery warning .....................40

1 Functions as a pitch indicator when camera is rotated to take pictures in “tall”
(portrait) orientation.
2 Functions as a roll indicator when camera is rotated to take pictures in “tall” (portrait)
orientation.
3 Displayed when an optional flash unit is attached (0 196). The flash-ready indicator
lights when the flash is charged.

Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.

No Battery
When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted, the
display in the viewfinder will dim. This is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction. The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fullycharged battery is inserted.

The Information Display
Shooting information, including shutter
speed, aperture, frame count, number of
exposures remaining, and AF-area mode, is
displayed in the monitor when the R button
is pressed.
R button

7
8
9

19
18
17

10
11
15

Exposure mode.................................125
Flexible program indicator ............127
Shutter-speed lock icon .................134
Shutter speed ..........................128, 130
Exposure compensation value .....138
Flash compensation value.............206
Number of shots in exposure and
flash bracketing sequence.............142
Number of shots in WB bracketing
sequence............................................146
Number of exposures (multiple
exposure) ...........................................216
Focal length (non-CPU lenses) .....237
5 Multiple exposure indicator ..........215

21
20

16
1
2
3
4

6 Aperture (f-number) .............. 129, 130
Aperture (number of stops).... 129, 405
Bracketing increment ............ 143, 147
Number of shots in ADL bracketing
sequence ........................................... 150
Maximum aperture
(non-CPU lenses) ............................. 237
7 Exposure indicator .......................... 131
Exposure compensation display..... 138
Bracketing progress indicator:
Exposure and flash bracketing ... 142
WB bracketing ............................... 146
ADL bracketing.............................. 150
8 “Beep” indicator............................... 326

9 Position of current frame in

11
12
13
14
15

bracketing sequence .............144, 148
ADL bracketing amount ................151
“k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures) ........................................... 41
Frame count ....................................... 45
Manual lens number .......................237
Sub-selector center
assignment ........................................342
Pv button assignment ....................342
Active D-Lighting indicator ...........189
High ISO noise reduction
indicator .............................................308

16 Shooting menu bank...................... 300
17 Number of exposures
remaining ...................................41, 464

18 Exposure and flash
bracketing indicator........................ 142
WB bracketing indicator ................ 146
ADL bracketing indicator............... 150
19 Focus points indicator .................... 103
AF-area mode indicator ........ 100, 101
20 Flash mode........................................ 203
21 Flash sync indicator......................... 331

Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.

Turning the Monitor Off
To clear shooting information from the monitor, press the R button twice
more or press the shutter-release button halfway. The monitor will turn
off automatically if no operations are performed for about 10 seconds.

See Also
For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see
Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, 0 325). For information on
changing the color of the lettering in the information display, see
Custom Setting d9 (Information display, 0 330).

The Information Display (Continued)
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
29
30
31
32
33
34

47
46
45
44
43

35
36
37
42

22 Release mode indicator..................111 34
Continuous shooting speed..........112 35
23 FV lock indicator...............................209 36
24 Clock battery indicator ............ 31, 424
25 Interval timer indicator...................226 37
Time-lapse indicator .......................233 38
26 Image comment indicator.............366
27 Aperture stop indicator.........129, 405 39
28 Aperture lock icon ...........................135 40
HDR (series) indicator .....................194 41
29
30
31
32
33

Multiple exposure (series)
indicator .............................................216
Copyright information
indicator .............................................367
IPTC indicator....................................368
Satellite signal indicator.................239
Network display ...............................276
Exposure compensation
indicator .............................................138

42
43
44
45
46
47

Flash compensation indicator ...... 206
Battery indicator .................................40
HDR indicator ................................... 191
HDR exposure differential ............. 194
Picture Control indicator................ 178
Function assigned to Fn button
(vert.) .................................................. 343
Fn button assignment .................... 337
D button assignment................. 344
Long exposure noise reduction
indicator............................................. 308
Custom settings bank..................... 311
Autofocus mode indicator.........97, 98
Vignette control indicator ............. 306
Exposure delay mode ..................... 327
Image area indicator..........................85
Metering ............................................ 123

Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.

❚❚ Changing Settings in the Information Display
To change settings for the items listed below,
press the R button in the information
display. Highlight items using the multi
selector and press J to view options for the
highlighted item.
R button

1
2
3
4
5

Shooting menu bank.................. 300 6
High ISO noise reduction........... 308 7
Active D-Lighting......................... 188 8
Pv button assignment ................ 342 9
Sub-selector center
assignment.................................... 342 10

Fn button (vert.) assignment .... 343
Fn button assignment................. 337
D button assignment............. 344
Long exposure noise
reduction ....................................... 308
Custom settings bank................. 311

Tool Tips
A tool tip giving the name of the selected item
appears in the information display. Tool tips can
be turned off using Custom Setting d8 (Screen
tips; 0 329).

The BS-2 Accessory Shoe Cover
The supplied BS-2 accessory shoe
cover can be used to protect the
accessory shoe or to prevent light
reflected from the metal parts of
the shoe from appearing in
photographs. The BS-2 attaches to
the camera accessory shoe as shown at right.

To remove the accessory shoe
cover, hold it down with your
thumb and slide it off as shown at
right while keeping a firm grip on
the camera.

sTutorial
Camera Menus
Most shooting, playback, and setup options
can be accessed from the camera menus. To
view the menus, press the G button.

G button

s
Tabs
Choose from the following menus:
• D: Playback (0 289)
• C: Shooting (0 299)
• A: Custom Settings (0 309)

• B: Setup (0 358)
• N: Retouch (0 375)
• O/m: MY MENU or RECENT SETTINGS
(defaults to MY MENU; 0 396)

Slider shows position in current menu.
Current settings are shown by icons.

Menu options
Options in current menu.

If d icon is displayed, help for current item can be viewed by pressing
L (Z/Q) button (0 20).

Using Camera Menus
❚❚ Menu Controls
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the menus.
Multi selector
Select
highlighted
item

Move cursor up

Cancel and return
to previous menu

Select
highlighted
item or display
sub-menu

Move cursor down

J button
Select
highlighted item

❚❚ Navigating the Menus
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.

Display the menus.
Press the G button to display the
menus.

Highlight the icon for the
current menu.
Press 4 to highlight the icon for
the current menu.

G button

Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.

Position the cursor in the
selected menu.
Press 2 to position the cursor in
the selected menu.

Highlight a menu item.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a
menu item.

Display options.
Press 2 to display options for
the selected menu item.

Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an
option.

Select the highlighted item.
Press J to select the highlighted item. To
exit without making a selection, press the
G button.
J button

Note the following points:
• Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available.
• While pressing 2 or the center of the multi selector generally has
the same effect as pressing J, there are some cases in which
selection can only be made by pressing J.
• To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the
shutter-release button halfway (0 44).

Help
If a d icon is displayed at the bottom left
corner of the monitor, help can be displayed
by pressing the L (Z/Q) button.

A description of the currently
selected option or menu will
be displayed while the button
is pressed. Press 1 or 3 to
scroll through the display.
L (Z/Q) button

First Steps
Attach the Camera Strap
Attach the strap securely to the camera eyelets.

Charge the Battery

The D4S is powered by an EN-EL18a rechargeable Li-ion battery
(supplied). To maximize shooting time, charge the battery in the
supplied MH-26a battery charger before use. Batteries take about
2 hours and 35 minutes to fully recharge when no charge remains.

Plug the charger in.
Insert the AC adapter plug into the
battery charger and plug the power
cable into an electrical outlet.

Remove the terminal cover.
Remove the terminal cover from the
battery.
Terminal cover

See Also
For information on using the MH-26a to charge two batteries, see
page 460.

Remove the contact protector.
Remove the contact protector from the
charger battery chamber.

Charge the battery.
Contacts

Chamber
lamps
Charge
lamps
(green)

Guide

Insert the battery (terminals first), aligning the end of the
battery with the guide and then sliding the battery in the
direction indicated until it clicks into place. The chamber lamp
and charge lamps will flash slowly while the battery charges:
Charge state
Less than 50% of maximum capacity
50–80% of maximum capacity
More than 80% but less than 100% of
maximum capacity
100% of maximum capacity

Charge lamps
Chamber
50%
80%
100%
lamp
H (flashes H (flashes
I (off)
I (off)
slowly)
slowly)
H (flashes
H (flashes
K (glows)
I (off)
slowly)
slowly)
H (flashes
H (flashes
K (glows) K (glows)
slowly)
slowly)
K (glows) I (off)
I (off)
I (off)

Charging is complete when the chamber lamp stops flashing
and the charge lamps turn off. About 2 hours and 35 minutes
are required to fully charge an exhausted battery; note that
the battery will not charge if its temperature is below 0 °C
(32 °F) or above 60 °C (140 °F).

Remove the battery when charging is complete.
Remove the battery and unplug the charger.

Calibration
See page 459 for more information on calibration.

Insert the Battery

Turn the camera off.

Inserting and Removing
Batteries
Always turn the camera off
before inserting or removing
batteries.

Remove the battery-chamber cover.
Lift the battery-chamber cover latch, turn
it to the open (A) position (q) and remove
the BL-6 battery-chamber cover (w).

Attach the cover to the battery.
If the battery release is positioned so that
the arrow (4) is visible, slide the battery
release to cover the arrow. Insert the two
projections on the battery into the
matching slots in the cover and slide the
battery release to completely reveal the
arrow.

The BL-6 Battery-Chamber Cover
The battery can be charged with the BL-6 attached. To prevent dust
from accumulating inside the battery chamber when the battery is not
inserted, slide the battery release in the direction indicated by the arrow
(4), remove the BL-6 from the battery, and replace it on the camera.
Other battery covers can not be used with this camera.

Insert the battery.
Insert the battery as shown at right.

Latch the cover.
To prevent the battery from
becoming dislodged during
operation, rotate the latch to
the closed position and fold it
down as shown at right. Be
sure the cover is securely
latched.

Removing the Battery
Before removing the battery, turn the camera off,
lift the battery-chamber cover latch, and turn it
to the open (A) position. Note that the battery
may be hot after use; observe due caution when
removing the battery. To prevent short-circuits,
replace the terminal cover when the battery is
not in use.

EN-EL18a Rechargeable Li-ion Batteries
The supplied EN-EL18a shares information with compatible devices,
enabling the camera to show battery charge state in six levels (0 40).
The Battery info option in the setup menu details battery charge,
battery life, and the number of pictures taken since the battery was last
charged (0 365). The battery can be recalibrated as necessary to
ensure that battery level continues to be reported accurately (0 459).

The Battery and Charger
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xii–xv and 426–429 of
this manual. Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0 °C
(32 °F) or above 40 °C (104 °F); failure to observe this precaution could
damage the battery or impair its performance. Capacity may be
reduced and charging times increase at battery temperatures from 0 °C
(32 °F) to 15 °C (59 °F) and from 45 °C (113 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F).

Do not short the charger terminals; failure to observe this precaution
could result in overheating and damage to the charger. Charge indoors
at ambient temperatures of 5 °C (41 °F) to 35 °C (95 °F). Battery capacity
may temporarily drop if the battery is charged at low temperatures or
used at a temperature below the temperature at which it was charged.
If the battery is charged at a temperature below 5 °C (41 °F), the battery
life indicator in the Battery info (0 365) display may show a temporary
decrease.
Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in
use.
A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge
when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement.
Purchase a new EN-EL18a battery.

Attach a Lens
Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera
when the lens is removed. The lens generally used in this manual
for illustrative purposes is an AF-S NIKKOR 50mm f/1.4G.

Lens cap

Lens mounting mark

CPU contacts (0 403)

s
Focus-mode switch (0 28)
Focus ring (0 108)

1
2

Turn the camera off.
Remove the rear lens cap and the camera body cap.

Attach the lens.

Keeping the mounting mark on the lens aligned with the
mounting mark on the camera body, position the lens in the
camera’s bayonet mount (q). Being careful not to press the
lens-release button, rotate the lens counter-clockwise until it
clicks into place (w).

s
A

Detaching the Lens
Be sure the camera is off when removing or
exchanging lenses. To remove the lens, press and
hold the lens release button (q) while turning
the lens clockwise (w). After removing the lens,
replace the lens caps and camera body cap.

Lens Focus Mode
If the lens is equipped with a focus mode
switch, select autofocus mode (A, M/A, or A/M).

CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings
In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring (0 403), lock
aperture at the minimum setting (highest f-number).

Image Area
The DX format image area is automatically
selected when a DX lens is attached (0 86).

Image area

Basic Setup
The language option in the setup menu is automatically
highlighted the first time menus are displayed. Choose a
language and set the camera clock.

Turn the camera on.

Select Language in the
setup menu.

Power switch

G button

Press the G button to display
the camera menus, then select
Language in the setup menu.
For information on using
menus, see “Using Camera
Menus” (0 18).

Select a language.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight
the desired language and
press J.
J button

Select Time zone and date.
Select Time zone and date and
press 2.

Set time zone.
Select Time zone and press 2.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight the
local time zone (the UTC field
shows the difference between
the selected time zone and
Coordinated Universal Time, or
UTC, in hours) and press J.

Turn daylight saving time
on or off.
Select Daylight saving time
and press 2. Daylight saving
time is off by default; if daylight
saving time is in effect in the
local time zone, press 1 to highlight On and press J.

Set the date and time.
Select Date and time and press
2. Press 4 or 2 to select an
item, 1 or 3 to change. Press
J when the clock is set to the
current date and time (note
that the camera uses a 24-hour clock).

Set date format.
Select Date format and press
2. Press 1 or 3 to choose the
order in which the year, month,
and day will be displayed and
press J.

Exit to shooting mode.
Press the shutter-release button halfway
to exit to shooting mode.

The Clock Battery
The camera clock is powered by a separate, non-rechargeable CR1616
lithium battery with a life of about two years. When this battery is low, a
B icon will be displayed in the top control panel while the standby
timer is on. For information on replacing the clock battery, see
page 424.

The Camera Clock
The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household
clocks. Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces and
reset as necessary.

GPS Units (0 238)
If a GPS unit (0 412) is connected, the camera clock will be set to the
time and date provided by the GPS unit (0 240).

Insert a Memory Card
Pictures are stored on memory cards (available separately; 0 462).
The camera is equipped with two card slots, one for XQD and the
other for Type I CompactFlash cards. Type II cards and microdrives
can not be used.

Turn the camera off.

Power switch

s
D

Inserting and Removing Memory Cards
Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory
cards.

Open the card slot cover.
Open the door protecting the card-slot
cover release button (q) and press the
release button (w) to open the card slot
(e).

Insert the memory card.
XQD memory cards: Holding the card with
the rear label toward the monitor, slide it
into the XQD card slot until it clicks into
place. The green memory card access
lamp will light briefly.
Memory card access
lamp

CompactFlash memory cards: Insert the card
Eject button
into the CompactFlash card slot with the
rear label toward the monitor (q). When
the memory card is fully inserted, the
eject button will pop up (w) and the
green memory card access lamp will light
briefly.

Inserting Memory Cards
After confirming that you are inserting the card into the correct
slot, insert the memory card terminals first. Inserting the card
into the wrong slot or inserting it upside down or backwards
could damage the camera or the card. Check to be sure that the
card is in the correct orientation.
XQD card

CompactFlash card

Direction of
insertion for
left (XQD)
card slot
Rear label

Direction of
insertion for
right
(CompactFlash) card
slot

4GB

Rear label

Close the card slot cover.
If this is the first time the memory card
will be used after being used or
formatted in another device, format the
card as described on page 35.

Memory Card Icons
The memory cards currently inserted in the
camera are indicated as shown (the example at
right shows the icons displayed when both an
XQD and a CompactFlash card are inserted). If
the memory card is full or an error has occurred,
the icon for the affected card will flash (0 446).

Top control panel

Using Two Memory Cards
When two memory cards are inserted, you can choose either of the two
to serve as the primary card (0 41) and select the role played by the
remaining card (0 96).

Removing Memory Cards
After confirming that the memory card access lamp is off, turn the
camera off and open the memory card slot cover.

XQD memory cards: Press the card in to eject it (q).
The memory card can then be removed by hand.

CompactFlash memory cards: Press the eject button
(q) to partially eject the card (w). The memory
card can then be removed by hand. Do not push
on the memory card while pressing the eject
button. Failure to observe this precaution could
damage the camera or memory card.

Format the Memory Card
Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being
used or formatted in other devices.

Formatting Memory Cards
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain.
Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to keep to a
computer before proceeding (0 272).

1
2

Turn the camera on.
Press the I (Q) and O
(Q) buttons.

O (Q) button I (Q) button

Hold the I (Q) and O (Q)
buttons down simultaneously
until a flashing C appears
in the shutter-speed displays
in the top control panel and
viewfinder. If two memory
cards are inserted, the card to
be formatted is shown by a
flashing icon. By default, the
primary card slot (0 96) will
be selected; you can choose
the secondary slot by rotating
the main command dial. To
exit without formatting the memory card, wait until C
stops flashing (about six seconds) or press any button other
than the I (Q) and O (Q) buttons.

Press the I (Q) and O (Q) buttons again.
Press the I (Q) and O (Q) buttons together a second time
while C is flashing to format the memory card. Do not
remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power
source during formatting.
When formatting is complete, the top
control panel will show the number of
photographs that can be recorded at
current settings and the frame-count
displays will show B.

Memory Cards
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when
removing memory cards from the camera.
• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do
not remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or
remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while
data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer. Failure to
observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to
the camera or card.
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the card.
• Do not expose to water, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.
• Do not format memory cards in a computer.

No Memory Card
If no memory card is inserted, the top control
panel and viewfinder will show S. If the
camera is turned off with a charged battery
and no memory card inserted, S will be
displayed in the top control panel.

See Also
See page 359 for information on formatting memory cards using the
Format memory card option in the setup menu.

Adjust Viewfinder Focus
The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate
individual differences in vision. Check that the display in the
viewfinder is in focus before shooting.

Turn the camera on.
Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on.

Lift the diopter adjustment control
(q).

Focus the viewfinder.

Rotate the diopter adjustment control
(w) until the viewfinder display, focus
points, and AF area brackets are in sharp
focus. When operating the control with
your eye to the viewfinder, be careful not
AF area brackets
to put your fingers or fingernails in your
eye.

Focus point

Replace the diopter adjustment
control.
Push the diopter adjustment control
back in (e).

Adjusting Viewfinder Focus
If you are unable to focus the viewfinder as described above, select
single-servo AF (AF-S; 0 97), single-point AF (0 100), and the center
focus point (0 103), and then frame a high-contrast subject in the
center focus point and press the shutter-release button halfway to focus
the camera. With the camera in focus, use the diopter adjustment
control to bring the subject into clear focus in the viewfinder. If
necessary, viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using optional
corrective lenses (0 410).

Diopter-Adjustment Viewfinder Lenses
Corrective lenses (available separately; 0 410)
can be used to further adjust viewfinder
diopter. Before attaching a diopter-adjustment
viewfinder lens, remove the DK-17 viewfinder
eyepiece by closing the viewfinder shutter to
release the eyepiece lock (q) and then
unscrewing the eyepiece as shown at right (w).

Basic Photography and Playback
Turn the Camera On
Before taking photographs, turn the camera on and check the
battery level and number of exposures remaining as described
below.

Turn the camera on.

Power switch

Turn the camera on. The
control panels will turn on and
the display in the viewfinder
will light.

Check the battery level.
Check the battery level in the top control
panel or viewfinder.
Icon
Control panel
Viewfinder
Description
L
—
Battery fully charged.
K
—
J
—
Battery partially discharged.
I
—
Low battery. Charge battery or ready
H
d
spare battery.
H
d
Shutter release disabled. Charge or
(flashes)
(flashes) exchange battery.

Check the number of exposures remaining.
The top control panel shows the
number of photographs that can be
taken at current settings (values over
1000 are rounded down to the nearest
hundred; e.g., values between 2900
and 2999 are shown as 2.9 k). If two
memory cards are inserted, the
displays show the space available on
the card in the primary slot. When
this number reaches zero, A will flash
in the exposure-count displays while
the shutter-speed displays will show a
flashing n or j and the icon for
the affected card will flash. Insert
another memory card or delete some
photos.

Choosing the Primary Card Slot
The Primary slot selection option is used to
choose which of the two card slots serves as
the primary slot. Primary slot selection can
be accessed from the shooting menu (0 96)
or in viewfinder photography by keeping the
J button pressed and pressing 1. Highlight
J button
the desired slot and press J to select.

Ready the Camera
When framing photographs in the
viewfinder, hold the handgrip in your right
hand and cradle the camera body or lens
with your left. Keep your elbows propped
lightly against your torso for support and
place one foot half a pace ahead of the
other to keep your upper body stable.
When framing photographs in portrait (tall)
orientation, hold the camera as shown in
the bottom of the three illustrations at right.

Framing Photos in Portrait (Tall) Orientation
The camera is equipped with controls
for use in portrait (tall) orientation,
including a vertical shutter-release, Fn,
and B buttons, main and subcommand dials, and multi selector
(0 104, 318, 343, 348). Rotate the
Vertical shooting shuttervertical shooting shutter-release
release button lock
button lock to L to avoid accidentally
operating these controls when the
camera is in landscape (wide) orientation.

Focus and Shoot

Press the shutterrelease button
halfway (0 44).

Focus point

At default settings, the
camera will focus on the
subject in the center
focus point. Frame a
photo in the viewfinder
with the main subject
positioned in the center
focus point and press the
shutter-release button halfway.

Focus
indicator

Buffer
capacity

Check indicators in the viewfinder.
When the focus operation is complete, the in-focus indicator
(I) will appear in the viewfinder.
Viewfinder display
I
2
4
2 4
(flashes)

Description
Subject in focus.
Focus point is between camera and subject.
Focus point is behind subject.
Camera unable to focus on subject in focus
point using autofocus.

While the shutter-release button is pressed halfway,
focus will lock and the number of exposures that
can be stored in the memory buffer (“t”; 0 113) will
be shown in the viewfinder display.
For information on what to do if the camera is unable to focus
using autofocus, see “Getting Good Results with Autofocus”
(0 107).

Shoot.
Smoothly press the shutterrelease-button the rest of the
way down to release the shutter
and record the photograph.
While the photograph is being
Memory card access
recorded to the memory card,
lamp
the memory card access lamp
will light. Do not eject the memory card or remove or disconnect
the power source until the lamp has gone out and recording is
complete.

s
A

The Shutter-Release Button
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. The camera
focuses when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. To take the
photograph, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.

Focus

Take photograph

The Standby Timer
The shutter speed and aperture displays in the top control panel and
viewfinder will turn off if no operations are performed for about six
seconds, reducing the drain on the battery. Press the shutter-release
button halfway to reactivate the display in the viewfinder.

Exposure meters
on

Exposure meters
off

Exposure meters
on

The length of time before the standby timer expires automatically can
be adjusted using Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 324).

The Multi Selector
The multi selector can be used to select the
focus point while the exposure meters are on
(0 103).

Multi selector

Camera Off Display
If the camera is turned off with a battery and
memory card inserted, the memory card icon,
frame count, and number of exposures
remaining will be displayed (some memory
cards may in rare cases only display this
information when the camera is on).

Top control panel

Viewing Photographs

Press the K button.

K button

A photograph will be
displayed in the monitor.
The memory card
containing the picture
currently displayed is
shown by an icon.

View additional pictures.
Additional pictures can be
displayed by pressing 4 or 2.
To view additional information
on the current photograph,
press 1 and 3 (0 244).

N I KON D4S

1/ 12

1/ 125
0

F5. 6

100

50mm

, 0

100NCD4S DSC_0001. JPG
15/ 10/ 2013 10: 02: 27

N OR
ORMAL
AL
4928x3280

To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the
shutter-release button halfway.

Image Review
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0 295),
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting.

See Also
See page 242 for information on choosing a memory card slot.

Deleting Unwanted Photographs
Unwanted photographs can be deleted by pressing the O (Q)
button. Note that photographs can not be recovered once
deleted.

Display the photograph.
Display the photograph you wish to
delete as described in “Viewing
Photographs” on the previous page. The
location of the current image is shown
by an icon at the bottom left corner of
the display.

Delete the photograph. O (Q) button
Press the O (Q) button. A
confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight
Selected image and press
O (Q) again to delete the
image and return to
playback (for information on the All images option, see
page 257). To exit without deleting the picture, press K.

Delete
To delete multiple images or to select the memory card from which
images will be deleted, use the Delete option in the playback menu
(0 259).

xLive View Photography
Follow the steps below to take photographs in live view.

Rotate the live view selector to
C (live view photography).

Live view selector

Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised and the view
through the lens will be displayed in the
camera monitor. The subject will no
longer be visible in the viewfinder.
a button

Position the focus point.
Position the focus point over your subject as described on
page 53.

Focus.
Press the shutter-release button halfway
to focus.

The focus point will flash green while the
camera focuses. If the camera is able to
focus, the focus point will be displayed in
green; if the camera is unable to focus,
the focus point will flash red (note that
pictures can be taken even when the
Sub-selector
focus point flashes red; check focus in the
monitor before shooting). Exposure can
be locked by pressing the center of the sub-selector (0 136);
focus locks while the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway.

Exposure Preview
During live view photography, you can
press J to preview the effects of shutter
speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity on
exposure. When Quiet is selected for Live
view photography in the shooting menu,
exposure can be adjusted by ±5 EV
(0 138), although only values between –3
and +3 EV are reflected in the preview display. Note that the
preview may not accurately reflect the final results when flash
lighting is used, Active D-Lighting (0 188), High Dynamic Range
(HDR; 0 190), or bracketing is in effect, A (auto) is selected for the
Picture Control Contrast parameter (0 180), or p is selected
for shutter speed. If the subject is very bright or very dark, the
exposure indicators will flash to warn that the preview may not
accurately reflect exposure. Exposure preview is not available
when A or % is selected for shutter speed.

Take the picture.
Press the shutter-release button the rest
of the way down to shoot. The monitor
will turn off.

Exit live view mode.
Press the a button to exit live view
mode.

Using Autofocus in Live View Photography and Movie Live
View
Use an AF-S lens. The desired results may not be achieved with
other lenses or teleconverters. Note that in live view, autofocus is
slower and the monitor may brighten or darken while the camera
focuses. The focus point may sometimes be displayed in green
when the camera is unable to focus. The camera may be unable to
focus in the following situations:
• The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame
• The subject lacks contrast
• The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply
contrasting brightness, or includes spot lighting or a neon sign or
other light source that changes in brightness
• Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor,
sodium-vapor, or similar lighting
• A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used
• The subject appears smaller than the focus point
• The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns
(e.g., blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper)
• The subject is moving

See Also
See page 169 for information on measuring a value for preset white
balance during live view photography and movie live view.

Focusing in Live View Photography and
Movie Live View
To focus using autofocus, rotate the Focus-mode selector
focus-mode selector to AF and
follow the steps below to choose
autofocus and AF-area modes. For
information on focusing manually,
see page 59.

❚❚ Choosing a Focus Mode
The following autofocus modes are available during live view
photography and movie live view:

Mode

Description
Single-servo AF: For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutterAF-S
release button is pressed halfway.
Full-time servo AF: For moving subjects. Camera focuses
AF-F continuously until shutter-release button is pressed. Focus locks
when shutter-release button is pressed halfway.

To choose an autofocus mode, press the AF-mode button and
rotate the main command dial until the desired mode is displayed
in the monitor.

AF-mode
button

Main command
dial

Monitor

❚❚ Choosing an AF-Area Mode
The following AF-area modes can be selected during live view
photography and movie live view:
Mode

Description
Face-priority AF: Use for portraits. The camera automatically detects
and focuses on portrait subjects; the selected subject is indicated
by a double yellow border (if multiple faces, up to a maximum of
35, are detected, the camera will focus on the closest subject; to
!
choose a different subject, use the multi selector). If the camera
can no longer detect the subject (because, for example, the
subject has turned to face away from the camera), the border will
no longer be displayed.
Wide-area AF: Use for hand-held shots of landscapes and other nonportrait subjects. Use the multi selector to move the focus point
5
anywhere in the frame, or press the center of the multi selector to
position the focus point in the center of the frame.
Normal-area AF: Use for pin-point focus on a selected spot in the
frame. Use the multi selector to move the focus point anywhere in
6
the frame, or press the center of the multi selector to position the
focus point in the center of the frame. A tripod is recommended.
Subject-tracking AF: Position the focus point over your subject and
press the center of the multi selector. The focus point will track the
selected subject as it moves through the frame. To end tracking,
press the center of the multi selector again. Note that the camera
&
may be unable to track subjects if they move quickly, leave the
frame or are obscured by other objects, change visibly in size,
color, or brightness, or are too small, too large, too bright, too dark,
or similar in color or brightness to the background.

To choose an AF-area mode, press the AF-mode button and rotate
the sub-command dial until the desired mode is displayed in the
monitor.

AF-mode
button

Sub-command
dial

Monitor

Previewing Focus During Live View Photography
To temporarily select maximum aperture for an improved focus preview
during live view photography, press the Pv button. To return aperture to
its original value, press the button again or focus using autofocus. If the
shutter-release button is pressed all the way down to take a picture
during focus preview, aperture will return to the original value before
the photo is taken.

The Live View Display: Live View
Photography
er
q
w

t
y
u

Item
q Time remaining

Description
The amount of time remaining before live
view ends automatically. Displayed if
shooting will end in 30 s or less.

55, 68

Monitor hue
Adjust monitor hue (monitor white balance).
56
w (monitor white
balance) indicator
The current autofocus mode.
52
e Autofocus mode
The current AF-area mode.
53
r AF-area mode
The current focus point. The display varies
49
t Focus point
with the option selected for AF-area mode.
Monitor brightness
A monitor brightness indicator.
57
y indicator
A guide to the options available during live
56, 57
u Guide
view photography.

The Count Down Display
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends automatically
(the timer turns red if live view is about to end to protect the internal
circuits or, if an option other than No limit is selected for Custom
Setting c4—Monitor off delay > Live view; 0 325—5 s before the
monitor is due to turn off automatically). Depending on shooting
conditions, the timer may appear immediately when live view is
selected.

❚❚ Adjusting Monitor Hue (Monitor White Balance)
If flash lighting is used with Flash or Preset manual white balance
(0 155), the colors in the monitor may differ from those in the final
photograph. Monitor hue can be adjusted to reduce the effects of
ambient lighting on the display in the monitor during live view
photography, for example when using a flash.

Highlight the monitor hue
indicator.
Press and hold W and press 4 or 2 to
highlight the monitor hue indicator at
the left side of the display.

W button

Adjust monitor hue.
Keeping the W button pressed,
rotate the main command dial
to adjust monitor hue (select
to preview the hue of the
final photograph in the
monitor; if another option is selected when Quiet is chosen
for Live view photography in the shooting menu (0 60), the
hue seen in the monitor during live view photography will
differ from that seen in the final image). At settings other than
, the icon for the selected option will be displayed in the
monitor when you release the W button. Monitor hue is reset
when the camera is turned off.

Recalling Monitor Hue (Monitor White Balance)
To restore the most recently selected monitor hue when starting
live view, hold the U button while pressing a.

❚❚ Adjusting Monitor Brightness
Monitor brightness can be adjusted as described below. Note that
brightness adjustment is not available during exposure preview.

Highlight the monitor brightness
indicator.
Press and hold W and press 4 or 2 to
highlight the monitor brightness
indicator at the right side of the
display.
W button

Adjust monitor brightness.
Keeping the W button pressed, press
1 or 3 to adjust monitor brightness
(note that this affects live view only
and has no effect on photographs or movies or on the
brightness of the monitor for menus or playback; to adjust the
brightness of the monitor for menus and playback without
affecting live view photography or movie live view, use the
Monitor brightness option in the setup menu as described
on page 359). If A (auto) is selected and the monitor is on, the
camera will automatically adjust brightness in response to
ambient lighting conditions as measured by the ambient
brightness sensor (0 5).

The Information Display: Live View
Photography
To hide or display indicators in the monitor during live view
photography, press the R button.
Virtual horizon
(0 372)

Information on

Information off

Histogram
(exposure preview
only; 0 50)

Framing guides

Manual Focus
To focus in manual focus mode (0 108),
rotate the lens focus ring until the subject is
in focus.

To magnify the view in the monitor up to
about 15 × for precise focus, press the X
button. While the view through the lens is
zoomed in, a navigation window will appear
in a gray frame at the bottom right corner of
the display. Use the multi selector to scroll to X button
areas of the frame not visible in the monitor
(available only if wide- or normal-area AF is
selected for AF-area mode), or press W to
zoom out.

Navigation window

Live View Shutter Release Options
The following options can be displayed by pressing G and
selecting Live view photography in the shooting menu:
Mode

M Quiet

x
L Silent

Description
Except when an optional flash unit is used, the mirror
remains up during live view photography, reducing noise
during shooting. The noise of the shutter is still audible.
The mirror remains up and the shutter stays open during
live view photography for less noise than Quiet mode; L is
displayed in the monitor. While the shutter-release button
is pressed, the camera will take up to five seconds of JPEG
photos at about 12 fps in continuous low-speed release
mode, or at about 24 fps in continuous high-speed release
mode; the time remaining is shown in the frame-count
display. In other release modes, one photo will be taken
each time the shutter-release button is pressed. ISO
sensitivity is set automatically except in exposure mode h,
when you can choose from values between ISO 200 and
Hi 4 (0 76). In exposure mode h, shutter speed can be set
to values between 1/25 s and 1/8000 s. Exposure can be
previewed in the monitor (0 50); to view or hide an
indicator (0 131) showing the difference between the
value selected by the camera and the value you have
selected, press J.

Silent Mode
In silent mode, the flash will not fire, Active D-Lighting (0 188), HDR
(0 190), vignette control (0 306), distortion control (0 307), multiple
exposure (0 214), and high ISO noise reduction (0 308) turn off, and
image quality is fixed at JPEG fine. Image size is determined solely by
the option selected for Image area (0 86) and is unaffected by the
option selected for JPEG/TIFF recording > Image size:
• FX (36 × 24) 1.0×: 1920 × 1280
• DX (24 × 16) 1.5×: 1280 × 848
• 1.2× (30 × 20) 1.2×: 1600 × 1064
• 5 : 4 (30 × 24): 1600 × 1280
Exposure can be adjusted by ±3 EV (0 138). Matrix metering is
selected automatically, and the following settings can be adjusted.
e, f
g
h

Aperture

Shutter speed

ISO sensitivity

—
✔
✔

—
—
✔

Note that silent mode is not completely silent: the shutter sounds and the
mirror is raised and lowered at the start and end of live view photography.

HDMI
If the camera is connected to an HDMI video device during live view
photography, the camera monitor will remain on and the video device
will display the view through the lens.

See Also
For information on choosing the roles played by the center of the multi
selector and by the movie-record button and command dials, see
Custom Settings f1 (Multi selector center button, 0 335) and f16
(Assign movie record button, 0 349). For information on preventing
unintended operation of the a button, see Custom Setting f17 (Live
view button options, 0 349).

Shooting in Live View Mode
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with
photographs or exposure, close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter.

Although they will not appear in the final picture unless Silent is
selected for Live view photography (0 60), jagged edges, color
fringing, moiré, and bright spots may appear in the monitor, while
bright bands may appear in some areas with flashing signs and other
intermittent light sources or if the subject is briefly illuminated by a
strobe or other bright, momentary light source. In addition, distortion
may occur if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at
high speed through the frame. Flicker and banding visible in the
monitor under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps can be
reduced using Flicker reduction (0 363), although they may still be
visible in the final photograph at some shutter speeds. When shooting
in live view mode, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong
light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage
to the camera’s internal circuitry.
Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s
internal circuits; exit live view when the camera is not in use. Note that
the temperature of the camera’s internal circuits may rise and noise
(bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be displayed
in the following instances (the camera may also become noticeably
warm, but this does not indicate a malfunction):
• The ambient temperature is high
• The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to
record movies
• The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended
periods
If live view does not start when you press the a button, wait for the
internal circuits to cool and then try again.
Movie recording is not available during live view photography and
pressing the movie-record button has no effect. Select movie live view
(0 63) to shoot movies.

yMovie Live View
Movies can be recorded in live view.

Rotate the live view selector to
1 (movie live view).

Live view selector

Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised and the view
through the lens will be displayed in the
camera monitor, modified for the effects
of exposure. The subject will no longer
be visible in the viewfinder.

a button

D The 0 Icon
A 0 icon (0 67) indicates that movies can not be recorded.
A

Before Recording
Before recording, choose a color space (0 305) and Picture Control
(0 177). White balance can be set at any time by pressing the U
button and rotating the main command dial (0 155).

Choose a focus mode (0 52).

Choose an AF-area mode (0 53).

Focus.

B button

Frame the opening shot and press the
B button to focus. Note that the
number of subjects that can be detected
in face-priority AF drops in movie live
view.

Focusing in Movie Live View
Focus can also be adjusted by pressing the shutter-release button
halfway before beginning recording.

Exposure Mode
The following settings can be adjusted in movie live view:
Aperture
e, f
g
h

—
✔
✔

Shutter speed ISO sensitivity Exposure compensation
—
—
✔

—
—
✔

✔
✔
—

In exposure mode h, shutter speed can be set to values between
1/25 s and 1/8000 s (the slowest available shutter speed varies with
the frame rate; 0 74). In other exposure modes, shutter speed is
adjusted automatically. If the subject is over- or under-exposed in
mode e or f, end live view and start movie live view again or select
exposure g and adjust aperture.

Start recording.
Press the movie-record button to start
recording. A recording indicator and the
time available are displayed in the
monitor. Exposure is set using matrix
metering and can be locked by pressing
the center of the sub-selector (0 136) or
altered by up to ±3 EV using exposure
compensation (0 138). In autofocus
mode, the camera can be refocused by
pressing the AF-ON button.

Movie-record button
Recording indicator

Time remaining

Audio
The camera can record both video and sound; do not cover the
microphone on the front of the camera during movie recording.
Note that the built-in microphone may record sounds made by the
lens during autofocus, vibration reduction, or changes to aperture.

See Also
Frame size, frame rate, microphone sensitivity, card slot, and ISO
sensitivity options are available in the Movie settings menu
(0 74). Focus can be adjusted manually as described on page 59.
The roles played by the center of the multi selector, the Fn and Pv
buttons, and the center of the sub-selector can be chosen using
Custom Settings f1 (Multi selector center button; 0 335), g1
(Assign Fn button; 0 353), g2 (Assign preview button; 0 355),
and g3 (Assign sub-selector center; 0 356), respectively. Custom
Setting g4 (Assign shutter button; 0 357) controls whether the
shutter-release button can be used to start movie live view, or to
start and end movie recording, or (when pressed all the way down)
to take photographs during movie recording. For information on
preventing unintended operation of the a button, see Custom
Setting f17 (Live view button options; 0 349). See page 169 for
information on measuring a value for preset white balance during
live view photography and movie live view.

End recording.
Press the movie-record button again to
end recording. Recording will end
automatically when the maximum length
is reached, or the memory card is full.

Maximum Length
The maximum length for individual movie files is 4 GB (for
maximum recording times, see page 74); note that depending on
memory card write speed, shooting may end before this length is
reached.

8
y

Exit live view mode.
Press the a button to exit live view
mode.

Indices
If Index marking is selected as the “press”
option for Custom Setting g1 (Assign Fn
button; 0 353), g2 (Assign preview button;
0 355), or g3 (Assign sub-selector center;
0 356), you can press the selected control
during recording to add indices that can be
used to locate frames during editing and
playback (0 77). Up to 20 indices can be
added to each movie.

Pv button

Index

The Live View Display: Movie Live View
y
q
w
e
r
t

u
i

o
!0

Item
Description
q Headphone volume Volume of audio output to headphones.
Microphone
Microphone sensitivity for movie recording.
w sensitivity
Sound level for audio recording. Displayed
in red if level is too high; adjust microphone
sensitivity accordingly. Left (L) and right (R)
e Sound level
channel indicators appear when optional
ME-1 or other stereo microphone is used.
Display the option selected for Movie
Frequency
settings > Frequency response in the
r response
shooting menu.
Displayed when On is selected for Movie
Wind noise
settings > Wind noise reduction in the
t reduction
shooting menu.
Indicates that movies can not be recorded.
y “No movie” icon
Movie
frame
size
The frame size for movie recording.
u
Time remaining
i (movie live view) The recording time available for movies.
Monitor brightness
A monitor brightness indicator.
o indicator
A guide to the options available during
!0 Guide
movie live view.

0
68
68

75
—
74
65
68
68

❚❚ Adjusting Settings in the Live View Display
Microphone sensitivity, headphone volume, and monitor
brightness can be adjusted as described below. Note that
headphone volume can not be adjusted during recording, and
that brightness affects the monitor only (0 57); pictures recorded
with the camera are unaffected. If an option other than
I (microphone off ) is currently selected, microphone sensitivity
can be changed to any setting other than I while recording is in
progress.

Highlight a setting.
Press and hold W and press 4 or 2 to
highlight the indicator for the desired
setting.

W button

Adjust the highlighted setting.
Keeping the W button pressed, press
1 or 3 to adjust the highlighted
setting.

Headphones
Third-party headphones can be used. Note that high sound levels may
result in high volume; particular care should be taken when
headphones are used.

The Count-Down Display
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends automatically
(0 55). Depending on shooting conditions, the timer may appear
immediately when movie recording begins. Note that regardless of the
amount of recording time available, live view will still end automatically
when the timer expires. Wait for the internal circuits to cool before
resuming movie recording.

The Information Display: Movie Live View
To hide or display indicators in the monitor during movie live view,
press the R button.
Virtual horizon
(0 372)

Information on

Information off

y
Histogram

Framing guides

HDMI
If the camera is connected to an HDMI device (0 285), the view through
the lens will appear both in the camera monitor and on the HDMI
device.

Image Area
Regardless of the option selected for Image area in the shooting
menu (0 88), all movies and photographs recorded in movie live
view have an aspect ratio of 16 : 9 (or 3 : 2 when the movie frame
size is 640 × 424). Movies recorded with an FX-format lens and FX
(36×24) 1.0×, 1.2× (30×20) 1.2×, or 5 : 4 (30×24) selected for
Image area are recorded in a format referred to as “FX-based
movie format”, while “DX-based movie format” is used for those
recorded with a DX-format lens and Auto DX crop (0 86) selected
for Image area, or with a DX- or FX-format lens and DX (24×16)
1.5× selected for Image area. The differences between the crops
displayed during viewfinder and live view photography and movie
live view photo crop are shown below.
16 : 9 photo crop for
movie live view

y
Crop for viewfinder
and live view
photography

3 : 2 photo crop for
movie live view
Crop for viewfinder
and live view
photography

The approximate size of the area at the center of the image sensor
used to record photographs taken in movie live view is 35.7 ×
20.1 mm (16 : 9, FX-based movie format), 23.3 × 13.0 mm (16 : 9,
DX-based movie format), 35.7 × 23.8 mm (3 : 2, FX-based movie
format), or 23.3 × 15.4 mm (3 : 2, DX-based movie format).

Taking Photos During Movie Live View
If Take photos is selected for Custom Setting
g4 (Assign shutter button, 0 357),
photographs can be taken at any time during
movie live view by pressing the shutterrelease button all the way down. If movie recording is in progress,
recording will end and the footage recorded to that point will be
saved. Except when a “1920 × 1080 crop” option is selected for
Frame size/frame rate in the Movie settings menu, photographs
are recorded in the format selected for Image quality in the
shooting menu (0 90). Photographs taken when a “1920 × 1080
crop” option is selected are recorded as fine-quality JPEG images.
For information on image size, see page 72. Note that the
exposure for photographs can not be previewed during movie live
view; mode e, f, or g is recommended but accurate results can be
achieved in mode h by adjusting exposure during live view
photography (0 49) and then ending live view photography,
starting movie live view, and checking the image area.

Wireless Remote Controllers and Remote Cords
If Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter
button), the shutter-release buttons on optional wireless remote
controllers and remote cords (0 411, 412) can be used to start movie
live view and to start and end movie recording (0 357).

Image Size
The following table shows the size of photographs (aspect ratio 16 : 9)
taken in movie live view at frame sizes other than 640 × 424:
Image area
FX-based format
(16 : 9)
DX-based format
(16 : 9)
1920 × 1080; 30p/
25p/24p crop

Option
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small

Size (pixels)
4928 × 2768
3696 × 2072
2464 × 1384
3200 × 1792
2400 × 1344
1600 × 896

Print size (cm/in.) *
41.7 × 23.4/16.4 × 9.2
31.3 × 17.5/12.3 × 6.9
20.9 × 11.7/ 8.2 × 4.6
27.1 × 15.2/10.7 × 6.0
20.3 × 11.4/ 8.0 × 4.5
13.5 × 7.6/ 5.3 × 3.0

—

1920 × 1080

16.3 × 9.1/ 6.4 × 3.6

The following table shows the size of photographs (aspect ratio 3 : 2)
taken in movie live view at frame sizes of 640 × 424:

Image area
FX-based movie
format (3 : 2)
DX-based movie
format (3 : 2)

Option
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small

Size (pixels)
4928 × 3280
3696 × 2456
2464 × 1640
3200 × 2128
2400 × 1592
1600 × 1064

Print size (cm/in.) *
41.7 × 27.8/16.4 × 10.9
31.3 × 20.8/12.3 × 8.2
20.9 × 13.9/ 8.2 × 5.5
27.1 × 18.0/10.7 × 7.1
20.3 × 13.5/ 8.0 × 5.3
13.5 × 9.0/ 5.3 × 3.5

* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals
image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi;
1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm).

A Metering Exposure and White Balance
The area used for metering exposure or auto white balance when
photographs are recorded at a movie frame size of 1920 × 1080; 30p
crop, 1920 × 1080; 25p crop, or 1920 × 1080; 24p crop (0 74) is not
the same as the area in the final photograph, with the result that
optimal results may not be achieved. Take test shots and check the
results in the monitor.

Recording Movies
Flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the
final movie under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the
camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed
through frame (for information on reducing flicker and banding, see
Flicker reduction, 0 363). Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and
bright spots may also appear. Bright bands may appear in some areas
of the frame with flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or if
the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary
light source. When recording movies, avoid pointing the camera at the
sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry. Note that
noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) and unexpected
colors may appear if you zoom in on the view through the lens (0 59)
during movie live view.
Flash lighting can not be used during movie live view.

Recording ends automatically if the lens is removed or the live view
selector is rotated to a new setting.
Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s
internal circuits; exit live view when the camera is not in use. Note that
the temperature of the camera’s internal circuits may rise and noise
(bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be displayed
in the following instances (the camera may also become noticeably
warm, but this does not indicate a malfunction):
• The ambient temperature is high
• The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to
record movies
• The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended
periods
If live view does not start when you press the a button, wait for the
internal circuits to cool and then try again.

Movie Settings
Use the Movie settings option in the
shooting menu (0 299) to adjust the
following settings.

• Frame size/frame rate, Movie quality: Choose from the following
options:

y/y
z/z
1/1
2/2
3/3
4/4
5/5
6/o
7/p
8/8
9/9
1/!

Option 1
1920 × 1080; 60p 2
1920 × 1080; 50p 2
1920 × 1080; 30p 2
1920 × 1080; 25p 2
1920 × 1080; 24p 2
1280 × 720; 60p
1280 × 720; 50p
640 × 424; 30p
640 × 424; 25p
1920 × 1080; 30p crop 3
1920 × 1080; 25p crop 3
1920 × 1080; 24p crop 3

Maximum bit rate
(Mbps) (★ high
quality/Normal)

Maximum length
(★ high quality/
Normal)

42/24

10 min./20 min.

24/12

20 min./
29 min. 59 s

8/5

29 min. 59 s/
29 min. 59 s

24/12

20 min./
29 min. 59 s

1 Actual frame rate is 29.97 fps for values listed as 30p, 23.976 fps for values listed as
24p, and 59.94 fps for values listed as 60p.
2 In DX-based movie format, image quality is equivalent to movies recorded at a
frame size of 1280 × 720.
3 Matrix metering selected automatically. Picture angle equivalent to a focal length
2.7× FX-based movie format length, allowing a telephoto effect without changing
to a longer lens; h is displayed in the monitor. HDR is not available with photos
taken in this mode (0 190).

Frame Size and Rate
Frame size and rate affects the distribution and amount of noise
(randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or bright spots).

• Microphone sensitivity: Turn the built-in or
optional stereo microphones (0 413) on or
off or adjust microphone sensitivity.
Choose Auto sensitivity to adjust
sensitivity automatically, Microphone off
to turn sound recording off; to select
microphone sensitivity manually, select Manual sensitivity and
choose a sensitivity.
• Frequency response: If S Wide range is selected, the built-in
microphone and optional stereo microphones (0 413) will
respond to a wide range of frequencies, from music to the
bustling hum of a city street. Choose T Vocal range to bring
out human voices.
• Wind noise reduction: Select On to enable the low-cut filter for the
built-in microphone (optional stereo microphones are
unaffected), reducing noise produced by wind blowing over the
microphone (note that other sounds may also be affected).
Wind-noise reduction for optional stereo microphones can be
enabled or disabled using microphone controls.
• Destination: Choose the slot to which movies
are recorded. The menu shows the time
available on each card; recording ends
automatically when no time remains. Note
that regardless of the option selected,
photographs are recorded to the card in the
primary slot (0 96).

Using an External Microphone
The optional ME-1 stereo microphone can be used to record sound in
stereo or to avoid recording lens noise caused by autofocus (0 413).

• Movie ISO sensitivity settings: Adjust the
following ISO sensitivity settings.
- ISO sensitivity (mode M): Choose the ISO
sensitivity for exposure mode h from
values between ISO 200 and Hi 4. Auto
ISO sensitivity control is used in other
exposure modes.
- Auto ISO control (mode M): Select On for auto ISO sensitivity control
in exposure mode h, Off to use the value selected for ISO
sensitivity (mode M).
- Maximum sensitivity: Choose the upper limit for auto ISO
sensitivity control from values between ISO 400 and Hi 4. The
lower limit is ISO 200. Auto ISO sensitivity control is used in
exposure modes e, f, and g and when On is selected for Auto
ISO control (mode M) in exposure mode h.

Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
At high ISO sensitivities, the camera may have difficulty focusing and
noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may increase. This
can be prevented by choosing a lower value for Movie ISO sensitivity
settings > Maximum sensitivity.

Viewing Movies
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon in full-frame playback (0 241).
Press the center of the multi selector to start playback; your
current position is indicated by the movie progress bar.
1 icon

Length

Current position/total length

Movie progress
bar

Volume

Guide

The following operations can be performed:
To
Pause
Play

Use

Description
Pause playback.
Resume playback when movie is paused or
during rewind/advance.

Rewind/
advance

Speed increases with
each press, from 2× to
4× to 8× to 16×; keep pressed to skip to
beginning or end of movie (first frame is
indicated by h in top right corner of monitor,
last frame by i). If playback is paused, movie
rewinds or advances one frame at a time; hold
for continuous rewind or advance.

Skip 10 s

Rotate the main command dial to skip ahead
or back 10 s.

Use

Skip ahead/
back
Adjust volume
Trim movie
Exit
Return to
shooting mode

X/W
J

Description
Rotate the sub-command dial to skip to next
or previous index, or to skip to the last or first
frame if the movie contains no indices.
Press X to increase volume, W to decrease.
See page 79 for more information.

/K Exit to full-frame playback.
Press the shutter-release button halfway to
exit to shooting mode.

A The p Icon
Movies with indices (0 66) are indicated by a
p icon in full-frame playback.

The 2 Icon
2 is displayed in full-frame and movie playback if
the movie was recorded without sound.

Editing Movies
Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected
frames as JPEG stills.
Option

Description
Create a copy from which the opening or closing
9 Choose start/end point
footage has been removed.
Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.
4 Save selected frame

Trimming Movies
To create trimmed copies of movies:

1
2

Display a movie full frame (0 241).
Pause the movie on the new
opening or closing frame.

Play the movie back as
described on page 77, pressing
the center of the multi selector
to start and resume playback
Movie progress bar
and 3 to pause and pressing 4
or 2 or rotating the main or sub-command dials to locate the
desired frame. Your approximate position in the movie can be
ascertained from the movie progress bar. Pause playback
when you reach the new opening or closing frame.

Select Choose start/
end point.
Press J, then highlight
Choose start/end point
and press 2.
J button

Choose the current frame as the new
start or end point.
To create a copy that begins from the
current frame, highlight Start point and
press J. The frames before the current
frame will be removed when you save the
copy.
Start point

To create a copy that ends at the current frame, highlight End
point and press J. The frames after the current frame will be
removed when you save the copy.

End point

Confirm the new start or
end point.
If the desired frame is not
currently displayed, press 4 or
2 to advance or rewind (to skip
to 10 s ahead or back, rotate the
main command dial; to skip to an index, or to the first or last
frame if the movie contains no indices, rotate the subcommand dial).

Create the copy.
Once the desired frame is displayed,
press 1.

Preview the movie.
To preview the copy, highlight
Preview and press J (to
interrupt the preview and
return to the save options
menu, press 1). To abandon
the current copy and return to Step 5, highlight Cancel and
press J; to save the copy, proceed to Step 8.

Save the copy.
Highlight Save as new file and
press J to save the copy to a
new file. To replace the original
movie file with the edited copy,
highlight Overwrite existing
file and press J.

Trimming Movies
Movies must be at least two seconds long. The copy will not be saved if
there is insufficient space available on the memory card.
Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.

Choosing the Role of the Current Frame
To make the frame displayed in
Step 5 the new end point (x)
instead of the new start point (w)
or vice versa, press the
L (Z/Q) button.
L (Z/Q) button

Saving Selected Frames
To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still:

Pause the movie on the
desired frame.
Play the movie back as
described on page 77, pressing
the center of the multi selector
to start and resume playback
and 3 to pause. Pause the movie at the frame you intend to
copy.

2
y

Choose Save selected
frame.
Press J, then highlight
Save selected frame and
press 2.
J button

Create a still copy.
Press 1 to create a still copy of
the current frame.

Save the copy.
Highlight Yes and press J to
create a fine-quality (0 90)
JPEG copy of the selected
frame.

Save Selected Frame
JPEG movie stills created with the Save selected frame option can not
be retouched. JPEG movie stills lack some categories of photo
information (0 244).

The Retouch Menu
Movies can also be edited using the Edit movie
option in the retouch menu (0 375).

dImage Recording Options
Image Area
Choose from image areas of FX (36 × 24) 1.0× (FX format), DX (24
× 16) 1.5× (DX format), 5 : 4 (30 × 24), and 1.2× (30 × 20) 1.2×.
See page 464 for information on the number of pictures that can
be stored at different image area settings.
FX format

DX format (24×16)
image circle

DX format

5:4
1.2×

FX format (36×24)
image circle

❚❚ Image Area Options
The camera offers a choice of the following image areas:
Option

Description
Images are recorded in FX format using the full area
FX (36×24)
of the image sensor (36.0 × 23.9 mm), producing an
c 1.0×
angle of view equivalent to a NIKKOR lens on a
(FX format)
35 mm format camera.
A 29.9 × 19.9 mm area at the center of the image
1.2× (30×20) sensor is used to record photographs. To calculate
Z 1.2×
the approximate focal length of the lens in 35 mm
format, multiply by 1.2.
An area at the center of the image sensor
DX (24×16)
23.4 × 15.5 mm is used to record pictures in DX
a 1.5×
format. To calculate the approximate focal length of
(DX format)
the lens in 35 mm format, multiply by 1.5.
Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 5 : 4
b 5 : 4 (30×24) (29.9 × 23.9 mm).

❚❚ Automatic Crop Selection
To automatically select to a DX crop when a DX lens is attached,
select On for Image area > Auto DX crop in the shooting menu
(0 299). The image area selected in the shooting menu or with
the camera controls will be used only when a non-DX lens is
attached. Select Off to use the currently-selected image area with
all lenses.

Auto DX Crop
The controls listed on page 89 can not be used to select image area
when a DX lens is attached and Auto DX crop is on.

Image Area
The selected option is shown in the information
display.

DX Lenses
DX lenses are designed for use with DX format cameras and have a
smaller angle of view than lenses for 35 mm format cameras. If Auto DX
crop is off and an option other than DX (24×16) (DX format) is selected
for Image area when a DX lens is attached, the edges of the image may
be eclipsed. This may not be apparent in the viewfinder, but when the
images are played back you may notice a drop in resolution or that the
edges of the picture are blacked out.

The Viewfinder Display
The 1.2 ×, DX format, and 5 : 4 crops are shown below.

1.2×

DX format

5:4

See Also
See page 70 for information on the crops available in movie live view.

The image area can be selected using the Image area > Choose
image area option in the shooting menu or by pressing a control
and rotating a command dial.

❚❚ The Image Area Menu

Select Image area in
the shooting menu.

G button

Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Image area in
the shooting menu and
press 2.

Select Choose image area.
Highlight Choose image area
and press 2.

Adjust settings.
Choose an option and
press J. The selected crop
is displayed in the
viewfinder (0 87).
J button

Image Size
Image size varies with the option selected for image area.

❚❚ Camera Controls

Assign image area selection to a camera control.
Select Choose image area as the “press + command dials”
option for a camera control in the Custom Settings menu
(0 341). Image area selection can be assigned to the Fn
button (Custom Setting f3, Assign Fn button, 0 337), the Pv
button (Custom Setting f4, Assign preview button, 0 342),
the center of the sub-selector (Custom Setting f6, Assign subselector center, 0 342), or the movie-record button (Custom
Setting f16, Assign movie record button, 0 349).

Use the selected control to choose an image area.
The image area can be selected
by pressing the selected
control and rotating the main
or sub-command dial until the
desired crop is displayed in the
viewfinder (0 87).

d
Fn button

Main
command dial

The option currently selected
for image area can be viewed by
pressing the control to display the image
area in the top control panel or
information display. FX format is
displayed as “36 × 24”, 1.2 × as “30 × 20”,
DX format as “24 × 16”, and 5 : 4 as
“30 × 24”.

Image Quality
The D4S supports the following image quality options. See
page 464 for information on the number of pictures that can be
stored at different image quality and size settings.
Option

File type

NEF (RAW)

NEF

TIFF (RGB)

TIFF
(RGB)

JPEG fine

JPEG normal

JPEG

JPEG basic
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG fine
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG normal
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG basic

NEF/
JPEG

Description
RAW data from the image sensor are saved
without additional processing. Settings such as
white balance and contrast can be adjusted
after shooting.
Record uncompressed TIFF-RGB images at a bit
depth of 8 bits per channel (24-bit color). TIFF is
supported by a wide variety of imaging
applications.
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1:4 (fine quality). *
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1:8 (normal quality). *
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1:16 (basic quality). *
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image
and one fine-quality JPEG image.
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image
and one normal-quality JPEG image.
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image
and one basic-quality JPEG image.

* Size priority selected for JPEG/TIFF recording > JPEG compression.

Image quality is set by pressing
the T button and rotating the
main command dial until the
desired setting is displayed in the
rear control panel.
T button

Main
command dial

Rear control panel

NEF (RAW) Images
NEF (RAW) images can be viewed on the camera or using software such
as Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 411) or ViewNX 2 (available on
the supplied ViewNX 2 installer CD). JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images
can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch
menu (0 387).

NEF+JPEG
When photographs taken at settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG are viewed
on the camera with only one memory card inserted, only the JPEG
image will be displayed. If both copies are recorded to the same
memory card, both copies will be erased when the photo is deleted. If
the JPEG copy is recorded to a separate memory card using the
Secondary slot function > RAW primary - JPEG secondary option,
deleting the JPEG copy will not delete the NEF (RAW) image.

The Image Quality Menu
Image quality can also be adjusted using the
Image quality option in the shooting menu
(0 299).

The following options can be
G button
accessed from the shooting
menu. Press the G button to
display the menus, highlight
the desired option and
press 2.

❚❚ JPEG/TIFF Recording > JPEG Compression
Choose the type of compression for JPEG images.
Option

Description
Images are compressed to produce relatively
O Size priority uniform file size.
Optimal
Optimal image quality. File size varies with scene
P
quality
recorded.

❚❚ NEF (RAW) Recording > NEF (RAW) Compression
Choose the type of compression for NEF (RAW) images.
Option

Description
NEF images are compressed using a reversible
Lossless
N
algorithm, reducing file size by about 20–40%
compressed
with no effect on image quality.
NEF images are compressed using a nonO Compressed
reversible algorithm, reducing file size by about
35–55% with almost no effect on image quality.
Uncompressed NEF images are not compressed.

❚❚ NEF (RAW) Recording > NEF (RAW) Bit Depth
Choose a bit depth for NEF (RAW) images.
Option
q 12-bit
r 14-bit

Description
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit-depth of 12 bits.
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits,
producing files larger than those with a bit depth of
12 bits but increasing the color data recorded.

See Also
See page 94 for the image size options available for JPEG and TIFF
images, page 95 for the image size options available for NEF (RAW)
images.

Image Size
Image size is measured in pixels. In the case of JPEG and TIFF
images, you can choose from #Large, $Medium, or %Small
(note that image size varies depending on the option selected for
Image area, 0 85):
Image area

Option
Large
FX (36×24) 1.0×
Medium
(FX format)
Small
Large
1.2× (30×20)
Medium
1.2×
Small
Large
DX (24×16) 1.5×
Medium
(DX format)
Small
Large
5 : 4 (30×24)
Medium
Small

Size (pixels)
4928 × 3280
3696 × 2456
2464 × 1640
4096 × 2720
3072 × 2040
2048 × 1360
3200 × 2128
2400 × 1592
1600 × 1064
4096 × 3280
3072 × 2456
2048 × 1640

Print size (cm/in.) *
41.7 × 27.8/16.4 × 10.9
31.3 × 20.8/12.3 × 8.2
20.9 × 13.9/ 8.2 × 5.5
34.7 × 23.0/13.7 × 9.1
26.0 × 17.3/10.2 × 6.8
17.3 × 11.5/ 6.8 × 4.5
27.1 × 18.0/10.7 × 7.1
20.3 × 13.5/ 8.0 × 5.3
13.5 × 9.0/ 5.3 × 3.5
34.7 × 27.8/13.7 × 10.9
26.0 × 20.8/10.2 × 8.2
17.3 × 13.9/ 6.8 × 5.5

* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image
size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch
(dpi; 1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm).

Image size for JPEG and TIFF
images can be set by pressing the
T button and rotating the subcommand dial until the desired
option is displayed in the rear
control panel.

T button

Sub-command
dial

Rear control panel

The Image Size Menu
Image size for JPEG and TIFF images can also be
adjusted using the JPEG/TIFF recording >
Image size option in the shooting menu
(0 304).

❚❚ NEF (RAW) Images
When recording photographs G button
in NEF (RAW) format, you can
choose from sizes of o Large
and p Small using the NEF
(RAW) recording > Image size
option in the shooting menu.
Small-size images are about
half the size of their large-size
counterparts. An asterisk (U)
appears in the rear control
panel when p Small is
selected.

d
Rear control panel

NEF (RAW) Images
Image size for NEF (RAW) photographs can not be selected using the
T button and command dials. Small-size NEF (RAW) images are
recorded in uncompressed 12-bit format, regardless of the options
selected for NEF (RAW) compression and NEF (RAW) bit depth in the
NEF (RAW) recording sub-menu, and can not be retouched (0 375).

Using Two Memory Cards
When two memory cards are inserted in the camera, you can
choose one as the primary card using the Primary slot selection
item in the shooting menu. Select XQD card slot to designate the
card in the XQD card slot as the primary card, CF card slot to
choose the CompactFlash card. The roles played by the primary
and secondary cards can be chosen using the Secondary slot
function option in the shooting menu. Choose from Overflow
(the secondary card is used only when the primary card is full),
Backup (each picture is recorded to both the primary and
secondary card), and RAW primary - JPEG secondary (as for
Backup, except that the NEF/RAW copies of photos recorded at
settings of NEF/RAW + JPEG are recorded only to the primary card
and the JPEG copies only to the secondary card).

“Backup” and “RAW Primary - JPEG Secondary”
The camera shows the number of exposures remaining on the card with
the least amount of memory. Shutter release will be disabled when
either card is full. Voice memos (0 261) are appended to the copy
recorded to the memory card in the primary slot.

Recording Movies
When two memory cards are inserted in the camera, the slot used to
record movies can be selected using the Movie settings > Destination
option in the shooting menu (0 75).

NFocus
This section describes the focus options available when
photographs are framed in the viewfinder. Focus can be adjusted
automatically (see below) or manually (0 108). The user can also
select the focus point for automatic or manual focus (0 103) or
use focus lock to focus to recompose photographs after focusing
(0 105).

Autofocus
To use autofocus, rotate the focusmode selector to AF.

Focus-mode selector

Autofocus Mode
Choose from the following autofocus modes:
Mode

Description
Single-servo AF: For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutterrelease button is pressed halfway. At default settings, shutter can
AF-S only be released when in-focus indicator (I) is displayed (focus
priority; 0 314).
Continuous-servo AF: For moving subjects. Camera focuses
continuously while shutter-release button is pressed halfway; if
subject moves, camera will engage predictive focus tracking (0 99)
AF-C to predict final distance to subject and adjust focus as necessary.
At default settings, shutter can be released whether or not subject
is in focus (release priority; 0 313).

Autofocus mode can
be selected by
pressing the AF-mode
button and rotating
the main command
dial until the desired
setting is displayed in
the viewfinder and
top control panel.

AF-mode button

Top control panel

Main command dial

Viewfinder

See Also
For information on using focus priority in continuous-servo AF, see
Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection, 0 313). For information
on using release priority in single-servo AF, see Custom Setting a2 (AF-S
priority selection, 0 314). For information on preventing the camera
from focusing when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, see
Custom Setting a4 (AF activation, 0 315). See Custom Setting a12
(Autofocus mode restrictions, 0 320) for information on limiting
focus-mode selection to AF-S or AF-C and f10 (Customize command
dials) > Change main/sub (0 345) for information on using the subcommand dial to choose the focus mode. See page 52 for information
on the autofocus options available in live view or during movie
recording.

The B Buttons
For the purpose of focusing the camera, pressing
either of the B buttons has the same effect as
pressing the shutter-release button halfway
(note that the B button for vertical shooting
can only be used when the vertical shooting
shutter-release button lock is unlocked; 0 42).

B button

Predictive Focus Tracking
In AF-C mode, the camera will initiate predictive
focus tracking if the subject moves toward or
away from the camera while the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway or either of the B
buttons is pressed. This allows the camera to
track focus while attempting to predict where
the subject will be when the shutter is released.

B button for
vertical shooting

AF-Area Mode

100

Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected.
• Single-point AF: Select the focus point as described on page 103;
the camera will focus on the subject in the selected focus point
only. Use with stationary subjects.
• Dynamic-area AF: Select the focus point as described on page 103.
In AF-C focus mode, the camera will focus based on information
from surrounding focus points if the subject briefly leaves the
selected point. The number of focus points varies with the mode
selected:
- 9-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when there is time to compose
the photograph or when photographing subjects that are
moving predictably (e.g., runners or race cars on a track).
- 21-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects
that are moving unpredictably (e.g., players at a football game).
- 51-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects
that are moving quickly and can not be easily framed in the
viewfinder (e.g., birds).
• 3D-tracking: Select the focus point as described on page 103. In
AF-C focus mode, the camera will track subjects that leave the
selected focus point and select new focus points as required.
Use to quickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving
erratically from side to side (e.g., tennis players). If the subject
leaves viewfinder, remove your finger from the shutter-release
button and recompose the photograph with the subject in the
selected focus point.

• Group-area AF: The camera focuses using a group of focus points
selected by the user, reducing the risk of the camera focusing on
the background instead of on the main subject. Choose for
subjects that are difficult to photograph using a single focus
point. If faces are detected in AF-S focus mode, the camera will
give priority to portrait subjects.
• Auto-area AF: The camera automatically
detects the subject and selects the focus
point; if a face is detected, the camera will
give priority to the portrait subject. The
active focus points are highlighted briefly
after the camera focuses; in AF-C mode, the
main focus point remains highlighted after
the other focus points have turned off.
AF-area mode can be
selected by pressing
the AF-mode button
and rotating the subcommand dial until
the desired setting is
displayed in the
viewfinder and top
control panel.

N
AF-mode button

Top control panel

Sub-command dial

Viewfinder

3D-tracking
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the
area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera.
Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the desired results with
subjects that are similar in color to the background or that occupy a
very small area of the frame.

101

AF-Area Mode
AF-area mode is shown in the top control panel and viewfinder.
AF-area mode
Single-point
AF
9-point
dynamic-area
AF *
21-point
dynamic-area
AF *
51-point
dynamic-area
AF *

Top control
panel Viewfinder

AF-area mode

Top control
panel Viewfinder

3D-tracking
Group-area
AF
Auto-area AF

* Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder. Remaining focus
points provide information to assist focus operation.

Manual Focus
Single-point AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used.

See Also
For information on adjusting how long the camera waits before
refocusing when an object moves in front of the camera, see Custom
Setting a3 (Focus tracking with lock-on, 0 314). See Custom Setting
a5 (Focus point illumination, 0 315) for information on choosing how
the focus point is displayed in dynamic-area and group-area AF, a10
(Store by orientation, 0 319) for information on choosing different
focus points and/or AF-area modes for portrait- and landscapeorientation photographs, a11 (Limit AF-area mode selection, 0 320)
for information on limiting AF-area mode selection, and f10 (Customize
command dials) > Change main/sub (0 345) for information on using
the main command dial to choose the AF-area mode. See page 53 for
information on the autofocus options available in live view or during
movie recording.

102

Focus Point Selection
The camera offers a choice of 51 focus points that can be used to
compose photographs with the main subject positioned almost
anywhere in the frame. Follow the steps below to choose the
focus point (in group-area AF, you can follow these steps to choose
a group of focus points).

Rotate the focus selector
lock to ●.
This allows the multi selector to
be used to select the focus
point.
Focus selector lock

Select the focus point.
Use the multi selector to select
the focus point in the
viewfinder while the exposure
meters are on. The center focus
point can be selected by
pressing the center of the multi
selector.

The focus selector lock can be
rotated to the locked (L)
position following selection to
prevent the selected focus
point from changing when the
multi selector is pressed.

103

The Sub-selector
Sub-selector
The sub-selector can be used in place of the
multi selector to select the focus point. Press the
center of the sub-selector to lock exposure
(0 136) and focus (0 105). Be careful not to put
your fingers or fingernails in your eye when
using the sub-selector.

Portrait (Tall-Orientation) Photographs
When framing shots in portrait (“tall”) orientation, use the multi selector
for vertical shooting to select the focus point. For more information, see
Custom Setting f14 (Assign multi selector (vert.), 0 348).

Using the Sub-selector and Multi Selector
for Vertical Shooting
Use as shown at right. Pressing the sides may
not have the desired effect.

Auto-area AF
The focus point for auto-area AF is selected automatically; manual
focus-point selection is not available.

See Also
For information on choosing when the focus point is illuminated, see
Custom Setting a5 (Focus point illumination, 0 315). For information
on setting focus-point selection to “wrap around,” see Custom Setting
a6 (Focus point wrap-around, 0 316). For information on choosing
the number of focus points that can be selected using the multi
selector, see Custom Setting a7 (Number of focus points, 0 316). For
information on choosing separate focus points and/or AF-area modes
for vertical and horizontal orientations, see Custom Setting a10 (Store
by orientation, 0 319). For information on changing the role of the
multi selector center button, see Custom Setting f1 (Multi selector
center button, 0 335). For information on changing the role played by
the sub-selector, see Custom Settings f5 (Assign sub-selector, 0 342)
and f6 (Assign sub-selector center, 0 342).

104

Focus Lock
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing,
making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus
point in the final composition. If the camera is unable to focus
using autofocus (0 107), focus lock can also be used to recompose
the photograph after focusing on another object at the same
distance as your original subject. Focus lock is most effective
when an option other than auto-area AF is selected for AF-area
mode (0 100).

Focus.
Position the subject in the
selected focus point and press
the shutter-release button
halfway to initiate focus. Check
that the in-focus indicator (I)
appears in the viewfinder.

N
Lock focus.
AF-C focus mode (0 97): With the
shutter-release button pressed
halfway (q), press the center of
the sub-selector (w) to lock
both focus and exposure (an
AE-L icon will be displayed in the
viewfinder). Focus will remain
locked while the center of the
sub-selector is pressed, even if
you later remove your finger
from the shutter-release button.

Shutter-release button

Center of sub-selector

105

AF-S focus mode: Focus locks automatically when the in-focus
indicator (I) appears, and remain locked until you remove
your finger from the shutter-release button. Focus can also be
locked by pressing the center of the sub-selector (see above).

Recompose the photograph
and shoot.
Focus will remain locked
between shots if you keep the
shutter-release button pressed
halfway (AF-S) or keep the center
of the sub-selector pressed, allowing several photographs in
succession to be taken at the same focus setting.

Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject
while focus lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus again at the
new distance.

Locking Focus with the B Button
During viewfinder photography, focus can be locked using either of the
B buttons in place of the shutter-release button (0 99). If AF-ON
only is selected for Custom Setting a4 (AF activation, 0 315), the
camera will not focus when the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway; instead, the camera will focus when an B button is pressed,
at which point focus will lock and remain locked until either B
button is pressed again. The shutter can be released at any time and
the in-focus indicator (I) will not be displayed in the viewfinder. This
applies in AF-C regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting a1
(AF-C priority selection, 0 313) and in AF-S except when Focus is
selected for Custom Setting a2 (AF-S priority selection, 0 314) in
single-point AF AF-area mode.

See Also
See Custom setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L, 0 324) for
information on using the shutter-release button to lock exposure,
Custom Setting f6 (Assign sub-selector center, 0 342) for information
on choosing the role played by the center of the sub-selector.

106

Getting Good Results with Autofocus
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below.
The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus
under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator (●) may be displayed
and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released
even when the subject is not in focus. In these cases, use manual focus
(0 108) or use focus lock (0 105) to focus on another subject at the
same distance and then recompose the photograph.
There is little or no contrast between the subject and
the background.
Example: Subject is the same color as the
background.
The focus point contains objects at different distances
from the camera.
Example: Subject is inside a cage.

The subject is dominated by regular geometric
patterns.
Example: Blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper.

The focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting
brightness.
Example: Subject is half in the shade.

Background objects appear larger than the subject.
Example: A building is in the frame behind the
subject.

The subject contains many fine details.
Example: A field of flowers or other subjects that are
small or lack variation in brightness.

107

Manual Focus
Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support autofocus
(non-AF NIKKOR lenses) or when the autofocus does not produce
the desired results (0 107).
• AF-S lenses: Set the lens focus mode switch to M.
• AF lenses: Set the lens focus mode Focus-mode selector
switch (if present) and camera
focus-mode selector to M.

AF Lenses
Do not use AF lenses with the lens
focus mode switch set to M and
the camera focus-mode selector
set to AF. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the
camera or lens.

108

• Manual focus lenses: Set the camera focus-mode selector to M.
To focus manually, adjust the lens focus ring
until the image displayed on the clear matte
field in the viewfinder is in focus.
Photographs can be taken at any time, even
when the image is not in focus.

The Electronic Rangefinder
The viewfinder focus indicator can be used
to confirm whether the subject in the
selected focus point is in focus (the focus
point can be selected from any of the 51
focus points). After positioning the subject
in the selected focus point, press the
shutter-release button halfway and rotate
the lens focus ring until the in-focus
indicator (I) is displayed. Note that with
the subjects listed on page 107, the infocus indicator may sometimes be
displayed when the subject is not in focus;
confirm focus in the viewfinder before
shooting. For information on using the
electronic rangefinder with optional AF-S/
AF-I teleconverters, see page 404.

Focal Plane Position
To determine the distance between your
subject and the camera, measure from the
focal plane mark (E) on the camera body.
The distance between the lens mounting
flange and the focal plane is 46.5 mm
(1.83 in.).

46.5 mm

Focal plane mark

109

110

kRelease Mode
Choosing a Release Mode
To choose a release mode, press the release
mode dial lock release and turn the release
mode dial to the desired setting.

Mode

Description
Single frame: Camera takes one photograph each time shutterS
release button is pressed.
Continuous low speed: While shutter-release button is held down,
camera records photographs at the frame rate selected for Custom
CL
Setting d2 (Continuous shooting speed, 0 326) > Continuous
low-speed (0 112).
Continuous high speed: While shutter-release button is held down,
camera records photographs at the frame rate selected for Custom
CH
Setting d2 (Continuous shooting speed, 0 326) > Continuous
high-speed (0 112). Use for active subjects.
Quiet shutter-release: As for single frame, except that mirror does not
click back into place while shutter-release button is fully pressed,
allowing user to control timing of click made by mirror, which is
J
also quieter than in single frame mode. In addition, beep does not
sound regardless of setting selected for Custom Setting d1 (Beep;
0 326).
E Self-timer: Take pictures with the self-timer (0 114).
Mirror up: Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto
MUP or close-up photography or in other situations in which the slightest
camera movement can result in blurred photographs (0 116).

111

Continuous Release Modes
In continuous low speed mode, the camera records photographs
at the frame rate selected for Custom Setting d2 (Continuous
shooting speed, 0 326) > Continuous low-speed. In continuous
high speed mode, the maximum frame rate can be chosen from 10
and 11 fps using Custom Setting d2 (Continuous shooting speed,
0 326) > Continuous high-speed.
The foregoing frame rates assume continuous-servo AF, manual or
shutter-priority auto exposure, a shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster,
and other settings at default values. The stated rates may not be
available with some lenses; in addition, frame rates may drop at
extremely small apertures (high f-numbers) or slow shutter
speeds, when vibration reduction (available with VR lenses) or
auto ISO sensitivity control (0 119) is on, or when the battery is
low, a non-CPU lens is attached, or Aperture ring is selected for
Custom Setting f10 (Customize command dials) > Aperture
setting (0 345).

112

The Memory Buffer
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage,
allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to
the memory card. Up to 200 photographs can be taken in succession;
note, however, that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full (tAA).

The approximate number of images that can
be stored in the memory buffer at current
settings is shown in the exposure-count
displays in the viewfinder and top control
panel while the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway. The illustration at right
shows the display when space remains in the buffer for about 99
pictures.
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the
memory card access lamp will light. Depending on shooting conditions
and memory card performance, recording may take from a few seconds
to a few minutes. Do not remove the memory card or remove or
disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out. If the
camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer, the power will
not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded. If the
battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer, the shutter
release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card.

See Also
For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs
that can be taken in a single burst, see Custom Setting d3 (Max.
continuous release, 0 327). For information on the number of
pictures that can be taken in a single burst, see page 464.

113

Self-Timer Mode
The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for selfportraits.

Mount the camera on a tripod.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable,
level surface.

Select self-timer mode.
Press the release mode dial lock
release and turn the release
mode dial to E.
Release mode dial

3
k

Frame the photograph and focus.
In single-servo AF (0 97), photographs
can only be taken if the in-focus (I)
indicator appears in the viewfinder.

Close the Viewfinder Eyepiece Shutter
When taking photos without your eye to
the viewfinder, close the viewfinder
eyepiece shutter to prevent light entering
via the viewfinder from appearing in
photographs or interfering with exposure.

114

Start the timer.
Press the shutter-release
button all the way down to
start the timer. The self-timer
lamp will start to flash. Two
seconds before the photograph is taken, the self-timer lamp
will stop flashing. The shutter will be released about ten
seconds after the timer starts.

To turn the self-timer off before a photograph is taken, turn the
release mode dial to another setting.

See Also
For information on choosing the duration of the self-timer, the number
of shots taken, and the interval between shots, see Custom Setting c3
(Self-timer, 0 325). For information on controlling the beeps that
sound when the self-timer is used, see Custom Setting d1 (Beep,
0 326).

115

Mirror up Mode
Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera
movement when the mirror is raised. Use of a tripod is
recommended.

Select mirror up mode.
Press the release mode dial lock
release and turn the release
mode dial to MUP.
Release mode dial

Raise the mirror.
Frame the picture, focus, and then press
the shutter-release button the rest of the
way down to raise the mirror.

Mirror Up
While the mirror is raised, photos can not be framed in the
viewfinder and autofocus and metering will not be performed.

Take a picture.
Press the shutter-release button all the
way down again to take a picture. To
prevent blurring caused by camera
movement, press the shutter-release button smoothly. The
mirror lowers when shooting ends.

Mirror up Mode
A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for
about 30 s after the mirror is raised.

116

SISO Sensitivity
Manual Adjustment
The camera’s sensitivity to light can be adjusted according to the
amount of light available. Choose from settings that range from
ISO 100 and ISO 25600 in steps equivalent to 1/3 EV. Settings of
from about 0.3 to 1 EV below ISO 100 and 0.3 to 4 EV above ISO
25600 are also available for special situations. The higher the ISO
sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing
higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures.
ISO sensitivity can be adjusted by
pressing the S button and
rotating the main command dial
until the desired setting is
displayed in the control panels or
viewfinder.

Top control panel

S button

Rear control panel

Main
command dial

Viewfinder

117

The ISO Sensitivity Menu
ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the ISO
sensitivity settings option in the shooting
menu (0 299).

ISO Sensitivity
The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an
exposure, allowing faster shutter speeds or smaller apertures, but the
more likely the image is to be affected by noise (randomly-spaced
bright pixels, fog, or lines). Noise is particularly likely at settings
between Hi 0.3 and Hi 4.

Hi 0.3–Hi 4
The settings Hi 0.3 through Hi 4 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0.3–4 EV
over ISO 25600 (ISO 32000–409600 equivalent).

118

Lo 0.3–Lo 1
The settings Lo 0.3 through Lo 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0.3–
1 EV below ISO 100 (ISO 80–50 equivalent). Use for larger apertures
when lighting is bright. Contrast is slightly higher than normal; in most
cases, ISO sensitivities of ISO 100 or above are recommended.

See Also
For information on choosing the ISO sensitivity step size, see Custom
Setting b1 (ISO sensitivity step value; 0 321). For information on
using the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise at
high ISO sensitivities, see page 308.

Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO
sensitivity control in the shooting menu, ISO sensitivity will
automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved
at the value selected by the user (ISO sensitivity is adjusted
appropriately when the flash is used).

Select Auto ISO
G button
sensitivity control for
ISO sensitivity settings
in the shooting menu.
To display the menus, press
the G button. Select
ISO sensitivity settings in
the shooting menu, highlight Auto ISO sensitivity control,
and press 2.

Select On.
Highlight On and press J
(if Off is selected, ISO
sensitivity will remain fixed
at the value selected by the
user).
J button

119

Adjust settings.
The maximum value for auto
ISO sensitivity can be selected
using Maximum sensitivity
(the minimum value for auto
ISO sensitivity is automatically
set to ISO 100; note that if the ISO sensitivity selected by the
user is higher than that chosen for Maximum sensitivity, the
value selected by the user will be used instead). In exposure
modes e and g, sensitivity will only be adjusted if
underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected for
Minimum shutter speed (1/4000–30 s, or Auto; in modes f and
h, ISO sensitivity will be adjusted for optimal exposure at the
shutter speed selected by the user). If Auto is selected, the
camera will choose the minimum shutter speed based on the
focal length of the lens. Press J to exit when settings are
complete.

When On is selected, the viewfinder and
rear control panel show Z. When
sensitivity is altered from the value selected
by the user, these indicators flash and the
altered value is shown in the viewfinder and rear control panel.

Minimum Shutter Speed
Auto shutter-speed selection can be fine-tuned by highlighting Auto
and pressing 2: for example, values faster than those usually selected
automatically can be used with telephoto lenses to reduce blur. Note,
however, that Auto is available only with CPU lenses or when lens data
are provided for non-CPU lenses; if a non-CPU lens is used without lens
data, minimum shutter speed is fixed at 1/30 s. Shutter speeds may drop
below the selected minimum if optimum exposure can not be achieved
at the ISO sensitivity chosen for Maximum sensitivity.

120

Turning Auto ISO Sensitivity Control On or Off
You can turn auto ISO sensitivity control on or
off by pressing the S button and rotating the
sub-command dial. The rear control panel
displays an Z icon when auto ISO
sensitivity control is on and Y when it is off.

Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) is more likely at
higher sensitivities. Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu
to reduce noise (see page 308). When a flash is used, the value selected
for Minimum shutter speed is ignored in favor of the option selected
for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 331). Note that ISO
sensitivity may be raised automatically when auto ISO sensitivity
control is used in combination with slow sync flash modes (available
with optional flash units; 0 196), possibly preventing the camera from
selecting slow shutter speeds.

121

122

VExposure
Metering
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The
following options are available:
Option

Description
Matrix: Produces natural results in most situations. Camera meters
a wide area of the frame and set exposure according to tone
distribution, color, composition, and, with type G, E, or D lenses
(0 401), distance information (3D color matrix metering III; with
other CPU lenses, camera uses color matrix metering III, which
does not include 3D distance information). With non-CPU lenses,
camera uses color matrix metering if focal length and maximum
aperture are specified using Non-CPU lens data option in setup
menu (0 236); otherwise camera uses center-weighted metering.
Center-weighted: Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest
weight to center area (if CPU lens is attached, size of area can be
selected using Custom Setting b6, Center-weighted area, 0 323;
if non-CPU lens is attached, area is 12 mm in diameter). Classic
meter for portraits; recommended when using filters with an
exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
Spot: Camera meters circle 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter
(approximately 1.5% of frame). Circle is centered on current focus
point, making it possible to meter off-center subjects (if non-CPU
lens is used or if auto-area AF is in effect, camera will meter center
focus point). Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed, even
when background is much brighter or darker.

123

To choose a metering
option, press the Y
button and rotate the
main command dial
until the desired
setting is displayed in
the viewfinder and
top control panel.

Y button

Top control panel

Main command dial

Viewfinder

See Also
See Custom Setting b5 (Matrix metering, 0 323) for information on
choosing whether matrix metering uses face detection. For information
on making separate adjustments to optimal exposure for each metering
method, see Custom Setting b7 (Fine-tune optimal exposure, 0 323).

124

Exposure Mode
To determine how the
I (Q) button
camera sets shutter speed
and aperture when adjusting
exposure, press the I (Q)
button and rotate the main
command dial until the
desired option appears in the
Main command dial
top control panel.
Mode

e
f
g
h

Description
Programmed auto (0 127): Camera sets shutter speed and aperture
for optimal exposure. Recommended for snapshots and in other
situations in which there is little time to adjust camera settings.
Shutter-priority auto (0 128): User chooses shutter speed; camera
selects aperture for best results. Use to freeze or blur motion.
Aperture-priority auto (0 129): User chooses aperture; camera selects
shutter speed for best results. Use to blur background or bring
both foreground and background into focus.
Manual (0 130): User controls both shutter speed and aperture.
Set shutter speed to Bulb (A) or Time (%) for long timeexposures.

125

Lens Types
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring (0 403), lock
the aperture ring at the minimum aperture (highest f-number). Type G
and E lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring.
When using non-CPU lenses (0 235), select exposure mode g
(aperture-priority auto) or h (manual). In other modes, exposure mode
g is automatically selected when a non-CPU lens is attached (0 405).
The exposure mode indicator (e or f ) will flash in the top control panel
and g will be displayed in the viewfinder.

Depth-of-Field Preview
To preview the effects of aperture, press and
hold the Pv button. The lens will be stopped
down to the aperture value selected by the
camera (modes e and f ) or the value chosen by
the user (modes g and h), allowing depth of field
to be previewed in the viewfinder.

Pv button

Custom Setting e5—Modeling Flash
This setting controls whether optional flash units that support the
Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS; 0 198) will emit a modeling flash
when the Pv button is pressed. See page 333 for more information.

126

e: Programmed Auto
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and
aperture according to a built-in program to ensure optimal
exposure in most situations.

Flexible Program
In exposure mode e, different combinations of
shutter speed and aperture can be selected by
rotating the main command dial while the
exposure meters are on (“flexible program”).
Rotate the dial to the right for large apertures
(low f-numbers) that blur background details or
fast shutter speeds that “freeze” motion. Rotate Main command dial
the dial to the left for small apertures (high fnumbers) that increase depth of field or slow
shutter speeds that blur motion. All
combinations produce the same exposure.
While flexible program is in effect, an asterisk
(“U”) appears in the top control panel. To restore default shutter speed
and aperture settings, rotate the dial until the asterisk is no longer
displayed, choose another mode, or turn the camera off.

See Also
See page 438 for information on the built-in exposure program. For
information on activating the exposure meters, see “The Standby
Timer” on page 44.

127

f: Shutter-Priority Auto
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the
camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the
optimal exposure.
To choose a shutter speed,
rotate the main command
dial while the exposure
meters are on. Shutter speed
can be set to “p” or to
values between 30 s and
Main command dial
1/8000 s. Shutter speed can be
locked at the selected setting (0 134).

128

g: Aperture-Priority Auto
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the
camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce
the optimal exposure.
To choose an aperture
between the minimum and
maximum values for the lens,
rotate the sub-command dial
while the exposure meters are
on. Aperture can be locked at Sub-command dial
the selected setting (0 134).

Z
A

Non-CPU Lenses (0 401, 405)
Use the lens aperture ring to adjust aperture.
If the maximum aperture of the lens has been
specified using the Non-CPU lens data item
in setup menu (0 236) when a non-CPU lens is
attached, the current f-number will be
displayed in the viewfinder and top control
panel, rounded to the nearest full stop.
Otherwise the aperture displays will show only the number of stops (F,
with maximum aperture displayed as FA) and the f-number must be
read from the lens aperture ring.

129

h: Manual
In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and
aperture. While the exposure meters are on, rotate the main
command dial to choose a shutter speed, and the sub-command
dial to set aperture. Shutter speed can be set to “p” or to
values between 30 s and 1/8000 s, or the shutter can be held open
indefinitely for a long time-exposure (A or %, 0 132).
Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and
maximum values for the lens. Use the exposure indicators to
check exposure.
Sub-command dial

Aperture

Shutter
speed

Z
Main command dial

Shutter speed and aperture can be locked at the selected setting
(0 134).

130

AF Micro NIKKOR Lenses
Provided that an external exposure meter is used, the exposure ratio need
only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set
aperture.

Exposure Indicators
The exposure indicators in the viewfinder and top control panel show
whether the photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current
settings. Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b2 (EV
steps for exposure cntrl, 0 321), the amount of under- or overexposure is shown in increments of 1/3 EV, 1/2 EV, or 1 EV. If the limits of
the exposure metering system are exceeded, the displays will flash.
Optimal exposure

Custom Setting b2 set to 1/3 step
Underexposed by 1/3 EV Overexposed by over 3 EV

Top control
panel
Viewfinder

See Also
For information on reversing the exposure indicators so that negative
values are displayed on the right and positive values on the left, see
Custom Setting f13 (Reverse indicators, 0 347).

131

Long Time-Exposures
(h Mode Only)
Select the following shutter speeds for long time-exposures of
moving lights, the stars, night scenery, or fireworks.
• Bulb (A): The shutter remains open while the shutter-release
button is held down. To prevent blur, use a tripod or an optional
wireless remote controller (0 411) or remote cord (0 412).
• Time (%): Start the exposure by using the shutter-release button
on the camera or on an optional remote cord, or wireless remote
controller. The shutter remains open for thirty minutes or until
the button is pressed a second time.

Length of exposure: 35 s
Aperture: f/25

Ready the camera.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level
surface.

Long Time-Exposures
Close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter to prevent light entering via
the viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or interfering
with exposure (0 114). Nikon recommends using a fully charged
battery or an optional AC adapter and power connector to prevent
loss of power while the shutter is open. Note that noise (bright
spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels or fog) may be present in
long exposures; before shooting, choose On for the Long
exposure NR option in the shooting menu (0 308).

132

Select exposure
mode h.

I (Q) button

Press the I (Q)
button and rotate the
main command dial until
h is displayed in the top
control panel.
Main command dial

Choose a shutter speed.
While the exposure meters are on, rotate
the main command dial to choose a
shutter speed of Bulb (A) or Time
(%). The exposure indicators do not
appear when Bulb (A) or Time (%) is
selected.

Bulb

Time

Open the shutter.
Bulb: After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the
camera or optional remote cord or wireless remote controller
all the way down. Keep the shutter-release button pressed
until the exposure is complete.

Time: Press the shutter-release button all the way down.

Close the shutter.
Bulb: Take your finger off the shutter-release button.
Time: Press the shutter-release button all the way down.
Shooting ends automatically after thirty minutes.

133

Shutter-Speed and Aperture Lock
Shutter speed lock is available in shutter-priority auto and manual
exposure modes, aperture lock in aperture-priority auto and
manual exposure modes. Shutter speed and aperture lock are not
available in programmed auto exposure mode.

Assign shutter speed and aperture lock to a camera
control.
Select Shutter spd & aperture lock as the “Press + command
dials” option in the Custom Settings menu (0 341). Shutter
speed and aperture lock can be assigned to the Fn button
(Custom Setting f3, Assign Fn button, 0 337), the Pv button
(Custom Setting f4, Assign preview button, 0 342), or the
center of the sub-selector (Custom Setting f6, Assign subselector center, 0 342).

2
Z

Lock shutter speed and/or aperture.
Shutter speed (exposure modes f and h): Press the selected control
and rotate the main command dial until F icons appear in the
viewfinder and top control panel.

Fn button

Main command dial

To unlock shutter speed, press the control and rotate the main
command dial until the F icons disappear from the displays.

134

Aperture (exposure modes g and h): Press the selected control and
rotate the sub-command dial until F icons appear in the
viewfinder and the top control panel.

Fn button

Sub-command dial

To unlock aperture, press the control and rotate the subcommand dial until the F icons disappear from the displays.

See Also
Use Custom Setting f8 (Shutter spd & aperture lock; 0 343) to keep
shutter speed and/or aperture locked at the selected values.

135

Autoexposure (AE) Lock
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after using
center-weighted metering and spot metering (0 123) to meter
exposure. Note that matrix metering will not produce the desired
results.

Lock exposure.
Position the subject in the selected
focus point and press the shutterrelease button halfway. With the
shutter-release button pressed halfway
and the subject positioned in the focus
point, press the center of the subselector to lock exposure (if you are
using autofocus, confirm that the I infocus indicator appears in the
viewfinder).
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L
indicator will appear in the viewfinder.

Recompose the
photograph.
Keeping the center of the subselector pressed, recompose
the photograph and shoot.

136

Shutter-release
button

Center of subselector

Metered Area
In spot metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a
4-mm (0.16 in.) circle centered on the selected focus point. In centerweighted metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a
12-mm circle in the center of the viewfinder.

Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted
without altering the metered value for exposure:
Exposure mode
e
f
g

Setting
Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; 0 127)
Shutter speed
Aperture

The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and top control
panel. Note that the metering method can not be changed while
exposure lock is in effect.

See Also
If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L,
0 324), exposure will lock when the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. For information on changing the role of the center of the subselector, see Custom Setting f6 (Assign sub-selector center, 0 342).

137

Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value
suggested by the camera, making pictures brighter or darker. It is
most effective when used with center-weighted or spot metering
(0 123). Choose from values between –5 EV (underexposure) and
+5 EV (overexposure) in increments of 1/3 EV. In general, positive
values make the subject brighter while negative values make it
darker.

–1 EV

+1 EV

To choose a value for
E button
exposure compensation,
press the E button and
rotate the main
command dial until the
desired value is
displayed in the
Main command dial
viewfinder or top control
panel.

±0 EV
(E button pressed)

138

No exposure
compensation

–0.3 EV

+2.0 EV

At values other than ±0.0, the 0 at the
center of the exposure indicators will
flash (exposure modes e, f, and g only)
and a E icon will be displayed in the
viewfinder and top control panel after
you release the E button. The current
value for exposure compensation can be confirmed in the
exposure indicator by pressing the E button.
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure
compensation to ±0.0. Exposure compensation is not reset when
the camera is turned off.

Exposure Mode h
In exposure mode h, exposure compensation affects only the exposure
indicator; shutter speed and aperture do not change.

Using a Flash
When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both flash level
and exposure, altering the brightness of both the main subject and the
background. Custom Setting e4 (Exposure comp. for flash, 0 333) can
be used to restrict the effects of exposure compensation to the
background only.

See Also
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for
exposure compensation, see Custom Setting b3 (Exp./flash comp. step
value, 0 321). For information on making adjustments to exposure
compensation without pressing the E button, see Custom Setting b4
(Easy exposure compensation, 0 322). For information on
automatically varying exposure, flash level, white balance, or Active
D-Lighting, see page 140.

139

Bracketing
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, flash level, Active
D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot,
“bracketing” the current value. Choose in situations in which it is
difficult to set exposure, flash level (i-TTL and, where supported,
auto aperture flash control modes only; see pages 197 and 202),
Active D-Lighting, or white balance and there is not time to check
results and adjust settings with each shot, or to experiment with
different settings for the same subject.

❚❚ Exposure and Flash Bracketing
To vary exposure and/or flash level over a series of photographs:

Exposure modified by:
0 EV

140

Exposure modified by:
–1 EV

Exposure modified by:
+1 EV

Select flash or exposure G button
bracketing for Custom
Setting e6 (Auto
bracketing set) in the
Custom Settings menu.
To display the menus, press
the G button. Select
Custom Setting e6 (Auto
bracketing set) in the
Custom Settings menu,
highlight an option, and
press J. Choose AE &
J button
flash to vary both
exposure and flash level, AE only to vary only exposure, or
Flash only to vary only flash level.

141

Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The
number of shots is shown in the top control panel.
Number of shots

D button

Main command dial Top control panel
Exposure and flash
bracketing indicator

At settings other than zero, a M icon and exposure and
flash bracketing indicator will be displayed in the
viewfinder and top control panel.

142

Select an exposure increment.
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose the exposure increment.
Exposure increment

D button

Sub-command dial

Top control panel

At default settings, the size of the increment can be chosen
from 0.3 (1/3), 0.7 (2/3), 1, 2, and 3 EV. The bracketing programs
with an increment of 0.3 (1/3) EV are listed below.
Control panel display

No. of shots
0
3
3
2
2
3
5
7
9

Bracketing order (EVs)
0
0/+0.3/+0.7
0/–0.7/–0.3
0/+0.3
0/–0.3
0/–0.3/+0.3
0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7
0/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/
+0.7/+1.0
0/–1.3/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/
+0.3/+0.7/+1.0/+1.3

Note that for exposure increments of 2 EV or more, the
maximum number of shots is 5; if a higher value was selected
in Step 2, the number of shots will automatically be set to 5.

See Also
For information on choosing the size of the exposure increment, see
Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl, 0 321). For
information on choosing the order in which bracketing is performed,
see Custom Setting e8 (Bracketing order, 0 334). For information on
choosing the role of the D button, see Custom Setting f9 (Assign BKT
button, 0 344).

143

Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
The camera will vary exposure and/or flash level shot-by-shot
according to the bracketing program selected. Modifications
to exposure are added to those made with exposure
compensation (see page 138).
While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator
will be displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel. A
segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot.

No. shots: 3; increment: 0.7

Display after first shot

❚❚ Canceling Bracketing

144

To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence is zero (r) and M is no longer displayed. The program
last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated.
Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-button reset
(0 211), although in this case the bracketing program will not be
restored the next time bracketing is activated.

Exposure and Flash Bracketing
In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes, shooting
will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing
program have been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the
shutter-release button is pressed. In self-timer mode, the camera will
take the number of shots selected in Step 2 on page 142 each time the
shutter-release button is pressed, regardless of the option selected for
Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Number of shots (0 325); the interval
between shots is however controlled by Custom Setting c3 (Selftimer) > Interval between shots. In other modes, one shot will be
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to
make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all
shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the
next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.

Exposure Bracketing
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture
(programmed auto), aperture (shutter-priority auto), or shutter speed
(aperture-priority auto, manual exposure mode). If On is selected for
ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control (0 119) in
modes e, f, and g and no flash is attached, the camera will modify
exposure by varying ISO sensitivity and only vary shutter speed and/or
aperture if the limits of exposure system are exceeded. Custom Setting
e7 (Auto bracketing (mode M), 0 334) can be used to change how the
camera performs exposure and flash bracketing in manual exposure
mode. Bracketing can be performed by varying flash level together
with shutter speed and/or aperture, or by varying flash level alone.

145

❚❚ White Balance Bracketing
The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph, each with
a different white balance. For more information on white balance,
see page 155.

Select white balance bracketing.
Choose WB bracketing for Custom
Setting e6 Auto bracketing set.

D button

Main command dial Top control panel
WB bracketing
indicator

At settings other than zero, a W icon and WB
bracketing indicator will appear in the top control
panel and M will be displayed in the viewfinder.

146

Select a white balance increment.
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose the white balance adjustment. Each increment is
roughly equivalent to 5 mired.
White balance
increment

D button

Sub-command dial

Top control panel

Choose from increments of 1 (5 mired), 2 (10 mired), or 3
(15 mired). Higher B values correspond to increased amounts
of blue, higher A values to increased amounts of amber
(0 159). The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are
listed below.
Control panel display

No. of White balance
Bracketing order
shots increment
0
1
0
3
1B
0/1B/2B
3
1A
0/2A/1A
2
1B
0/1B
2
1A
0/1A
3
1 A, 1 B
0/1A/1B
5
1 A, 1 B
0/2A/1A/1B/2B
0/3A/2A/1A/
7
1 A, 1 B
1B/2B/3B
0/4 A/3 A/2 A/1 A/
9
1 A, 1 B
1B/2B/3B/4B

See Also
See page 160 for a definition of “mired.”

147

Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies
specified in the bracketing program, and each copy will have a
different white balance. Modifications to white balance are
added to the white balance adjustment made with white
balance fine-tuning.
If the number of shots in the
bracketing program is greater than
the number of exposures remaining,
n and the icon for the affected
card will flash in the top control panel,
a flashing j icon will appear in the
viewfinder as shown at right, and the
shutter release will be disabled.
Shooting can begin when a new memory card is inserted.

148

❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence is zero (r) and W is no longer displayed. The
program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is
activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a twobutton reset (0 211), although in this case the bracketing
program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated.

White Balance Bracketing
White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF
(RAW). Selecting NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine, NEF (RAW)+JPEG
normal, or NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic cancels white balance bracketing.

White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amberblue axis in the white balance fine-tuning display, 0 159). No
adjustments are made on the green-magenta axis.
In self-timer mode, the number of copies specified in the white-balance
program will be created each time the shutter is released, regardless of
the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Number of
shots (0 325).
If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the
camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have
been recorded.

149

❚❚ ADL Bracketing
The camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series of exposures. For
more information on Active D-Lighting, see page 188.

Select ADL bracketing.
Choose ADL bracketing for Custom
Setting e6 Auto bracketing set.

D button

Main command dial Top control panel
ADL bracketing
indicator

At settings other than zero, a d icon and an ADL bracketing
indicator appear in the top control panel and M will be
displayed in the viewfinder. Choose two shots to take one
photograph with Active D-Lighting off and another at a
selected value. Choose three to five shots to take a series of
photographs with Active D-Lighting set successively to values
between Off and Normal (three shots), between Off and High
(four shots), or between Off and Extra high 1 or Low and
Extra high 2 (five shots). If you choose more than two shots,
proceed to Step 4.

150

Select Active D-Lighting.
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose Active D-Lighting.

D button

Sub-command dial

Active D-Lighting is shown in the top control panel.
Control panel display

ADL

Control panel display

ADL

Y
Auto

P
High

R
Low

Z
Extra high 1

Q
Normal

3
Extra high 2

151

Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
The camera will vary Active D-Lighting shot-by-shot according
to the bracketing program selected. While bracketing is in
effect, a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the
top control panel. A segment will disappear from the
indicator after each shot.

No. shots: 3

152

Display after first shot

❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence is zero (r) and d is no longer displayed. The
program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is
activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a twobutton reset (0 211), although in this case the bracketing
program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated.

ADL Bracketing
In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes, shooting
will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing
program have been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the
shutter-release button is pressed. In self-timer mode, the camera will
take the number of shots selected in Step 2 on page 150 each time the
shutter-release button is pressed, regardless of the option selected for
Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Number of shots (0 325); the interval
between shots is however controlled by Custom Setting c3 (Selftimer) > Interval between shots. In other modes, one shot will be
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.

If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to
make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all
shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the
next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.

153

154

rWhite Balance
White Balance Options
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of
the light source. Auto white balance is recommended with most
light sources. If the desired results can not be achieved with auto
white balance, choose an option from the list below or use preset
white balance.
Option
Color temp. *
v Auto
Normal
3500–
8000 K
Keep warm lighting
colors
J Incandescent
3000 K
I Fluorescent
Sodium-vapor lamps
Warm-white
fluorescent
White fluorescent
Cool-white
fluorescent
Day white
fluorescent
Daylight fluorescent
High temp.
mercury-vapor
H Direct sunlight
N Flash

2700 K

Description
White balance is adjusted
automatically. For best results, use
type G, E or D lens. If optional flash
fires, results are adjusted appropriately.
Use under incandescent lighting.
Use with:
• Sodium-vapor lighting (found in
sports venues).

3000 K

• Warm-white fluorescent lights.

3700 K

• White fluorescent lights.

4200 K

• Cool-white fluorescent lights.

5000 K

• Daylight white fluorescent lights.

6500 K

• Daylight fluorescent lights.
• High color temperature light sources
(e.g. mercury-vapor lamps).
Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.
Use with optional flash units.

7200 K
5200 K
5400 K

155

Option
G Cloudy
M Shade
K Choose color temp.
L Preset manual

Color temp. *
6000 K
8000 K
2500–
10,000 K
—

Description
Use in daylight under overcast skies.
Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.
Choose color temperature from list of
values (0 161).
Use subject, light source, or existing
photograph as reference for white
balance (0 164).

* All values are approximate and do not reflect fine-tuning (if applicable).

White balance can be selected by pressing the U button and
rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is
displayed in the rear control panel.

Rear control panel
U button

Main command dial

r
A

The Shooting Menu
White balance can also be adjusted using the
White balance option in the shooting menu
(0 299), which also can be used to fine-tune
white balance (0 158) or measure a value for
preset white balance (0 164). The Auto option
in the White balance menu offers a choice of
Normal and Keep warm lighting colors, which
preserves the warm colors produced by incandescent lighting, while
the I Fluorescent option can be used to select the light source from
the bulb types.

156

Studio Flash Lighting
Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large
studio flash units. Use preset white balance or set white balance to
Flash and use fine-tuning to adjust white balance.

See Also
When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e6 (Auto
bracketing set, 0 333), the camera will create several images each
time the shutter is released. White balance will be varied with each
image, “bracketing” the value currently selected for white balance. See
page 146 for more information.

Color Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other
conditions. Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a
light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an
object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same
wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the
neighborhood of 5000–5500 K appear white, light sources with a lower
color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly
yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature appear
tinged with blue. The camera white balance options are adapted to the
following color temperatures (all figures are approximate):
• I (sodium-vapor lamps): 2700 K
• J (incandescent)/
I (warm-white fluorescent.):
3000 K
• I (white fluorescent): 3700 K
• I (cool-white fluorescent):
4200 K
• I (day white fluorescent): 5000 K

H (direct sunlight): 5200 K
N (flash): 5400 K
G (cloudy): 6000 K
I (daylight fluorescent): 6500 K
I (high temp. mercury-vapor):
7200 K
• M (shade): 8000 K

•
•
•
•
•

157

Fine-Tuning White Balance
White balance can be “fine-tuned” to compensate for variations in
the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast
into an image. White balance is fine-tuned using the White
balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing the U
button and rotating the sub-command dial.

❚❚ The White Balance Menu

Select a white balance
option in the shooting
menu.

G button

To display the menus, press
the G button. Select
White balance in the
shooting menu, then
highlight a white balance option and press 2. If an option
other than Auto, Fluorescent, Choose color temp., or Preset
manual is selected, proceed to Step 2. If Auto or Fluorescent
is selected, highlight the desired setting and press 2. For
information on fine-tuning preset white balance, see
page 174.

158

Fine-tune white balance.
Use the multi selector to finetune white balance. White
balance can be fine-tuned on
the amber (A)–blue (B) axis in
steps of 0.5 and the green (G)–
Coordinates
magenta (M) axis in steps of
Adjustment
0.25. The horizontal (amberblue) axis corresponds to color temperature, while the vertical
(green-magenta) axis has the similar effects to the
corresponding color compensation (CC) filters. The horizontal
axis is ruled in increments equivalent to about 5 mired, the
vertical axis in increments of about 0.05 diffuse density units.
Green (G)

Increase green

Blue (B)

Increase magenta

Amber (A)

Magenta (M)

Increase blue

Increase amber

Press J.
Press J to save settings and return to the
shooting menu. If white balance has
been fine-tuned, an asterisk (“U”) will be
displayed in the rear control panel.
J button

159

❚❚ The U Button
At settings other than K (Choose color temp.) and L (Preset
manual), the U button can be used to fine-tune white balance
on the amber (A)–blue (B) axis (0 159; to fine-tune white balance
when L is selected, use the shooting menu as described on
page 158). Press the U button and rotate the sub-command dial
to fine-tune white balance in steps of 0.5 (with each full increment
equivalent to about 5 mired) until the desired value is displayed in
the rear control panel. Rotating the sub-command dial to the left
increases the amount of amber (A). Rotating the sub-command
dial to the right increases the amount of blue (B). At settings other
than 0, an asterisk (“U”) appears in the rear control panel.

Rear control panel
U button

Sub-command dial

White Balance Fine-Tuning
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For
example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as
J (Incandescent) is selected for white balance will make photographs
slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.

“Mired”
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in
color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color
temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much
greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by
multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10 6, is a measure of
color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is
the unit used in color-temperature compensation filters. E.g.:
• 4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired
• 7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired

160

Choosing a Color Temperature
When K (Choose color temp.) is selected for white balance, color
temperature can be selected using the White balance option in
the shooting menu or by using the U button, multi selector, and
sub-command dial.

Choose Color Temperature
Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or
fluorescent lighting. Choose N (Flash) or I (Fluorescent) for these
sources. With other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the
selected value is appropriate.

❚❚ The White Balance Menu
Enter values for the amber-blue and green-magenta axes (0 159).

Select Choose color
temp.

G button

Press the G button and
select White balance in
the shooting menu.
Highlight Choose color
temp. and press 2.

r
Select a value for amberblue.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits
and press 1 or 3 to change.
Value for amber (A)blue (B) axis

161

Select a value for greenmagenta.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight the G
(green) or M (magenta) axis and
press 1 or 3 to select a value.
Value for green (G)magenta (M) axis

Press J.
Press J to save changes and return to the
shooting menu. If a value other than 0 is
selected for the green (G)–magenta (M)
axis, an asterisk (“U”) will be displayed in
the rear control panel.
J button

162

❚❚ The U Button
The U button can be used to select the color temperature for the
amber (A)–blue (B) axis only. Press the U button and rotate the
sub-command dial until the desired value is displayed in the rear
control panel (adjustments are made in mireds; 0 160). To enter a
color temperature directly in increments of 10 K, press the U
button and press 4 or 2 to highlight a digit and press 1 or 3 to
change.

U button

Sub-command dial

Rear control panel

163

Preset Manual
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance
settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for
light sources with a strong color cast. The camera can store up to
six values for preset white balance in presets d-1 through d-6. Two
methods are available for setting preset white balance:
Method

Direct measurement

Copy from existing
photograph

Description
Neutral gray or white object is placed under
lighting that will be used in final photograph and
white balance is measured by camera (0 165). In
live view photography and movie live view (0 49,
63), white balance can be measured in a selected
area of the frame (spot white balance, 0 169).
White balance is copied from photo on memory
card (0 172).

White Balance Presets
Changes to white balance presets apply to all shooting menu banks
(0 300). A confirmation dialog will be displayed if the user attempts to
change a white balance preset created in another shooting menu bank.

164

Viewfinder Photography

Light a reference object.
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will
be used in the final photograph. In studio settings, a standard
gray panel can be used as a reference object. Note that
exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring
white balance; in exposure mode h, adjust exposure so that
the exposure indicator shows ±0 (0 131).

Set white balance to L (Preset manual).
Press the U button and rotate the main command dial until
L is displayed in the rear control panel.

Rear control panel
U button

Main command dial

Measuring Preset White Balance (Viewfinder Photography)
Preset manual white balance can not be measured while you are
shooting an HDR photograph (0 190) or multiple exposure (0 214), or
when Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter
button, 0 357).

165

Select a preset.
Press the U button and rotate the sub-command dial until
the desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-6) is displayed in
the rear control panel.

Rear control panel
U button

Sub-command dial

Select direct measurement mode.
Release the U button briefly and then
press the button until the L icon in
the rear control panel starts to flash. A
flashing D will also appear in the top
control panel and viewfinder. The
displays will flash for about six seconds.

Top control panel

Rear control panel

Viewfinder

Measure white balance.
Before the indicators stop flashing, frame the
reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and
press the shutter-release button all the way down.
The camera will measure a value for white balance and store it
in the preset selected in Step 3. No photograph will be
recorded; white balance can be measured accurately even
when the camera is not in focus.

166

Check the results.
If the camera was able to measure a
value for white balance, C will flash
in the control panels for about six
seconds, while the viewfinder will show
a flashing a.

Top control panel

Rear control panel

Viewfinder

If lighting is too dark or too bright, the
camera may be unable to measure
white balance. A flashing b a will
appear in the control panels and
viewfinder for about six seconds. Press
the shutter-release button halfway to
return to Step 5 and measure white
balance again.

Top control panel

Rear control panel

r
Viewfinder

167

Direct Measurement Mode
If no operations are performed during viewfinder photography while
the displays are flashing, direct measurement mode will end in the time
selected for Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 324).

Protected Presets
If the current preset is protected (0 176), 3 will flash in the top
control panel and viewfinder (and L in the rear control panel) if you
attempt to measure a new value.

Selecting a Preset
Selecting Preset manual for the White balance
option in the shooting menu displays the dialog
shown at right; highlight a preset and press J. If
no value currently exists for the selected preset,
white balance will be set to 5200 K, the same as
Direct sunlight.

168

Live View (Spot White Balance)
In live view photography and movie live view (0 49, 63), white
balance can be measured in a selected area of the frame,
eliminating the need to prepare a reference object or change
lenses during telephoto photography.

Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised and the view
through the lens will be displayed in the
camera monitor.
a button

Set white balance to L (Preset manual).
Press the U button and rotate the main command dial until
L is displayed in the rear control panel.

Rear control panel
U button

Main command dial

Select a preset.
Press the U button and rotate the sub-command dial until
the desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-6) is displayed in
the rear control panel.

Rear control panel
U button

Sub-command dial

169

Select direct measurement mode.
Release the U button briefly and then
press the button until the L icon in
the rear control panel starts to flash. A
spot white balance target (r) will be
displayed at the selected focus point.

Position the target over a white or grey area.
While L flashes in the display, use the
multi selector to position the r over a
white or grey area of the subject. To
zoom the area around the target in for
more precise positioning, press the X
button.

Measure white balance.
Press the center of the multi selector or
press the shutter-release button all the
way down to measure white balance.
The time available to measure white
balance is that selected for Custom
Setting c4 (Monitor off delay) > Live
view (0 325).
If the camera is unable to measure white
balance, the message shown at right will
be displayed. Choose a new white
balance target and repeat the process
from Step 4.

170

Rear control panel

Exit direct measurement mode.
Press the U button to exit direct measurement mode.
When Preset manual is selected for
White balance in the shooting menu,
the position of the target used to
measure preset white balance will be
displayed on presets recorded during
live view photography.

Measuring Preset White Balance (Live View Photography)
Preset manual white balance can not be measured when Record
movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter button,
0 357) and the live view selector is rotated to 1. Preset manual white
balance can not be set while an HDR exposure is in progress (0 190) or
when a setting other than
is selected for monitor hue (0 56).

171

Managing Presets
❚❚ Copying White Balance from a Photograph
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from an
existing photograph to a selected preset.

Select L (Preset
G button
manual) for White
balance in the shooting
menu.
Press the G button and
select White balance in
the shooting menu.
Highlight Preset manual and press 2.

Select a destination.
Highlight the destination preset
(d-1 to d-6) and press the center
of the multi selector.

3
r

172

Choose Select image.
Highlight Select image and
press 2.

Highlight a source image.
Highlight the source image. To
view the highlighted image full
frame, press and hold the X
button.
To view images in other locations, press
W and select the desired card and folder
(0 242).

Copy white balance.
Press J to copy the white balance value
for the highlighted photograph to the
selected preset. If the highlighted
photograph has a comment (0 366), the
comment will be copied to the comment J button
for the selected preset.

173

Choosing a White Balance Preset
Press 1 to highlight the current white balance
preset (d-1–d-6) and press 2 to select another
preset.

Fine-Tuning Preset White Balance
The selected preset can be fine-tuned by
selecting Fine-tune and adjusting white balance
as described on page 159.

174

❚❚ Entering a Comment
Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to
thirty-six characters for a selected white balance preset.

Select L (Preset manual).
Highlight Preset manual in the
white balance menu (0 172)
and press 2.

Select a preset.
Highlight the desired preset
and press the center of the
multi selector.

Select Edit comment.
Highlight Edit comment and
press 2.

Edit the comment.
Edit the comment as described on
page 184.

175

❚❚ Protecting a White Balance Preset
Follow the steps below to protect the selected white balance
preset. Protected presets can not be modified and the Fine-tune
and Edit comment options can not be used.

Select L (Preset manual).
Highlight Preset manual in the
white balance menu (0 172)
and press 2.

Select a preset.
Highlight the desired preset
and press the center of the
multi selector.

Select Protect.
Highlight Protect and press 2.

Select On.
Highlight On and press J
to protect the selected
white balance preset. To
remove protection, select
Off.

176

J button

JImage Enhancement
Picture Controls
Nikon’s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share
image processing settings, including sharpening, contrast,
brightness, saturation, and hue, among compatible devices and
software.

Selecting a Picture Control
The camera offers a choice of preset Picture Controls. Choose a
Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene.
Option

Description
Standard processing for balanced results.
Q Standard
Recommended for most situations.
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for
R Neutral
photographs that will later be extensively
processed or retouched.
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect.
Choose for photographs that emphasize primary
S Vivid
colors.
T Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.
Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a
o Portrait
rounded feel.
p Landscape
Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.

Press L (Z/Q).
A list of Picture Controls
will be displayed.

L (Z/Q) button

177

Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired
Picture Control and
press J.
J button

Custom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing
Picture Controls using the Manage Picture Control option in the
shooting menu (0 183). Custom Picture Controls can be saved to a
memory card for sharing among other cameras of the same model and
compatible software (0 186).

The Picture Control Indicator
The current Picture Control is shown in the
information display when the R button is
pressed.

J
Picture Control
indicator

The Shooting Menu
Picture Controls can also be selected using the
Set Picture Control option in the shooting
menu (0 299).

178

Modifying Picture Controls
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls (0 183) can be
modified to suit the scene or the user’s creative intent. Choose a
balanced combination of settings using Quick adjust, or make
manual adjustments to individual settings.

Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture
Control in the Picture Control
list (0 177) and press 2.

Adjust settings.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the
desired setting and press 4 or
2 to choose a value (0 180).
Repeat this step until all
settings have been adjusted, or
select Quick adjust to choose a preset combination of
settings. Default settings can be restored by pressing the
O (Q) button.

Press J.

Modifications to Original Picture Controls
Picture Controls that have been modified from
default settings are indicated by an asterisk
(“U”) in the Set Picture Control menu.

179

❚❚ Picture Control Settings
Option

Manual adjustments
(all Picture Controls)

Description
Choose from options between –2 and +2 to reduce or
exaggerate the effect of the selected Picture Control
(note that this resets all manual adjustments). For
Quick adjust
example, choosing positive values for Vivid makes
pictures more vivid. Not available with Neutral,
Monochrome, or custom Picture Controls.
Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to adjust
sharpening automatically according to the type of
Sharpening scene, or choose from values between 0 (no
sharpening) and 9 (the higher the value, the greater the
sharpening).
Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to
the type of scene, or choose from values between –3
and +3 (choose lower values to prevent highlights in
Contrast
portrait subjects from being “washed out” in direct
sunlight, higher values to preserve detail in misty
landscapes and other low-contrast subjects).
Choose –1 for reduced brightness, +1 for enhanced
Brightness
brightness. Does not affect exposure.
Control the vividness of colors. Select A to adjust
saturation automatically according to the type of scene,
Saturation
or choose from values between –3 and +3 (lower values
reduce saturation and higher values increase it).
Choose negative values (to a minimum of –3) to make
reds more purple, blues more green, and greens more
Hue
yellow, positive values (up to +3) to make reds more
orange, greens more blue, and blues more purple.
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome
Filter
photographs. Choose from OFF, yellow, orange, red,
effects
and green (0 181).
Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from
B&W (black-and-white), Sepia, Cyanotype (blue-tinted
Toning
monochrome), Red, Yellow, Green, Blue Green, Blue,
Purple Blue, Red Purple (0 182).
Manual adjustments
(non-monochrome only)

Manual adjustments
(monochrome only)

180

“A” (Auto)
Results for auto sharpening, contrast, and saturation vary with exposure
and the position of the subject in the frame. Use a type G, E, or D lens
for best results.

The Picture Control Grid
Pressing the W button in Step 2 on page 179
displays a Picture Control grid showing the
contrast and saturation for the selected Picture
Control in relation to the other Picture Controls
(only contrast is displayed when Monochrome
is selected). Release the W button to return to
the Picture Control menu.
The icons for Picture Controls that use auto
contrast and saturation are displayed in green in
the Picture Control grid, and lines appear
parallel to the axes of the grid.

Previous Settings
The line under the value display in the Picture
Control setting menu indicates the previous
value for the setting. Use this as a reference
when adjusting settings.

Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on
monochrome photographs. The following filter effects are available:
Y
O
R
G

Option
Yellow
Orange
Red
Green

Description
Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the brightness of
the sky in landscape photographs. Orange produces more
contrast than yellow, red more contrast than orange.
Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits.

Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced
than those produced by physical glass filters.

181

Toning (Monochrome Only)
Pressing 3 when Toning is selected displays
saturation options. Press 4 or 2 to adjust
saturation. Saturation control is not available
when B&W (black-and-white) is selected.

Custom Picture Controls
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as
those on which the custom Picture Control was based.

182

Creating Custom Picture Controls
The preset Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be
modified and saved as custom Picture Controls.

Select Manage Picture G button
Control in the shooting
menu.
To display the menus, press
the G button. Highlight
Manage Picture Control
in the shooting menu and
press 2.

Select Save/edit.
Highlight Save/edit and
press 2.

Select a Picture Control.
Highlight an existing Picture
Control and press 2, or press J
to proceed to Step 5 to save a
copy of the highlighted Picture
Control without further
modification.

183

Edit the selected Picture Control.
See page 180 for more information. To
abandon any changes and start over from
default settings, press the O (Q) button.
Press J when settings are complete.

Select a destination.
Choose a destination for the
custom Picture Control (C-1
through C-9) and press 2.

Name the Picture
Control.

Keyboard

area
The text-entry dialog
shown at right will be
Name area
displayed. By default, new
Picture Controls are named
by adding a two-digit number (assigned automatically) to the
name of the existing Picture Control; to use the default name,
proceed to Step 7. To move the cursor in the name area, hold
the W button and press 4 or 2. To enter a new letter at the
current cursor position, use the multi selector to highlight the
desired character in the keyboard area and press the center of
the multi selector. To delete the character at the current
cursor position, press the O (Q) button.

Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen
characters long. Any characters after the nineteenth will be
deleted.

184

Save changes and exit.
Press J to save changes
and exit. The new Picture
Control will appear in the
Picture Control list.
J button

Manage Picture Control > Rename
Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any
time using the Rename option in the Manage
Picture Control menu.

Manage Picture Control > Delete
The Delete option in the Manage Picture
Control menu can be used to delete selected
custom Picture Controls when they are no
longer needed.

The Original Picture Control Icon
The original preset Picture Control on which the
custom Picture Control is based is indicated by
an icon in the top right corner of the edit
display.

Original Picture
Control icon

185

Sharing Custom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility
available with ViewNX 2 or optional software such as Capture NX 2
can be copied to a memory card and loaded into the camera, or
custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to
the memory card to be used in other D4S cameras and compatible
software and then deleted when no longer needed (if two
memory cards are inserted, the card in the primary slot will be
used; 0 96).

186

To copy custom Picture Controls to
or from the memory card, or to
delete custom Picture Controls from
the memory card, highlight Load/
Save in the Manage Picture
Control menu and press 2. The
following options will be displayed:
• Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture Controls from the memory
card to custom Picture Controls C-1 through C-9 on the camera
and name them as desired.
• Delete from card: Delete
selected custom Picture
Controls from the memory
card. The confirmation
dialog shown at right will be
displayed before a Picture
J button
Control is deleted; to delete
the selected Picture Control, highlight Yes and press J.
• Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) from
the camera to a selected destination (1 through 99) on the
memory card.

Saving Custom Picture Controls
Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at
any one time. The memory card can only be used to store user-created
custom Picture Controls. The preset Picture Controls supplied with the
camera (0 177) can not be copied to the memory card, renamed, or
deleted.

187

Preserving Detail in Highlights
and Shadows
Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows,
creating photographs with natural contrast. Use for high contrast
scenes, for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor
scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded
subjects on a sunny day. It is most effective when used with
matrix metering (0 123).

Active D-Lighting off

Active D-Lighting: Y Auto

“Active D-Lighting” versus “D-Lighting”
The Active D-Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure
before shooting to optimize the dynamic range, while the D-Lighting
option in the retouch menu (0 379) brightens shadows in images after
shooting.

188

To use Active D-Lighting:

Select Active
D-Lighting in the
shooting menu.

G button

To display the menus, press
the G button. Highlight
Active D-Lighting in the
shooting menu and press
2.

Choose an option.
Highlight the desired
option and press J. If
Y Auto is selected, the
camera will automatically
adjust Active D-Lighting
J button
according to shooting
conditions (in exposure mode h, however, Y Auto is
equivalent to Q Normal).

Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting can not be used with movies. Noise (randomlyspaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may appear in photographs taken
with Active D-Lighting. Uneven shading may be visible with some
subjects. Active D-Lighting can not be used at ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3
or above.

See Also
When ADL bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e6 (Auto
bracketing set, 0 333), the camera varies Active D-Lighting over a
series of shots (0 150).

189

High Dynamic Range (HDR)
Used with high-contrast subjects, High Dynamic Range (HDR)
preserves details in highlights and shadows by combining two
shots taken at different exposures. HDR is most effective when
used with matrix metering (0 123; with other metering methods
and a non-CPU lens, an exposure differential of Auto is equivalent
to about 2 EV). It can not be used to record NEF (RAW) images.
Movie recording (0 63), flash lighting (0 195), bracketing
(0 140), multiple exposure (0 214), and time-lapse photography
(0 229) can not be used while HDR is in effect and shutter speeds
of A and % are not available.

+
First exposure
(darker)

190

Second exposure
(brighter)

Select HDR (high
dynamic range).
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight HDR (high
dynamic range) in the
shooting menu and
press 2.

G button

Combined HDR
image

Select a mode.
Highlight HDR mode and
press 2.

Highlight one of the
following and press J.
• To take a series of HDR
photographs, select 0 On
(series). HDR shooting
will continue until you
J button
select Off for HDR mode.
• To take one HDR photograph, select On (single photo). Normal
shooting will resume automatically after you have created a
single HDR photograph.
• To exit without creating additional HDR photographs, select Off.
If On (series) or On (single photo) is
selected, a y icon will be displayed in
the top control panel.

191

Choose the exposure
differential.
To choose the difference in
exposure between the two
shots, highlight Exposure
differential and press 2.
The options shown at right will
be displayed. Highlight an
option and press J. Choose
higher values for high-contrast
subjects, but note that
choosing a value higher than
required may not produce the desired results; if Auto is
selected, the camera will automatically adjust exposure to suit
the scene.

Choose the amount of
smoothing.
To choose how much the
boundaries between the two
images are smoothed, highlight
Smoothing and press 2.

192

The options shown at right will
be displayed. Highlight an
option and press J. Higher
values produce a smoother
composite image. Uneven
shading may be visible with
some subjects.

Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera takes two exposures when
the shutter-release button is pressed all
the way down. “l y” will be displayed
in the top control panel and l u in
Top control panel
the viewfinder while the images are
combined; no photographs can be taken
until recording is complete. Regardless of
the option currently selected for release
Viewfinder
mode, only one photograph will be taken
each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If On (series) is selected, HDR will only turn off when Off is
selected for HDR mode; if On (single photo) is selected, HDR
turns off automatically after the photograph is taken. The y
icon clears from the display when HDR shooting ends.

Framing HDR Photographs
The edges of the image may be cropped out. The desired results may
not be achieved if the camera or subject moves during shooting. Use of
a tripod is recommended. Depending on the scene, shadows may
appear around bright objects or halos may appear around dark objects;
this effect can be reduced by adjusting the amount of smoothing.

193

A The D Button
If HDR (high dynamic range) is selected for
Custom Setting f9 (Assign BKT button; 0 344),
you can select the HDR mode by pressing the
D button and rotating the main command
dial and the exposure differential by pressing
the D button and rotating the sub-command
dial. The mode and exposure differential are
shown in the top control panel: y and R
appear when On (series) is selected and y
when On (single photo) is selected; no icon appears when HDR is off.
A

Interval Timer Photography
If On (series) is selected for HDR mode before interval timer shooting
begins, the camera will continue to shoot HDR photographs at the
selected interval (if On (single photo) is selected, interval timer
shooting will end after a single shot).

Shooting Menu Banks
HDR settings can be adjusted separately for each bank (0 300), but
switching to a bank in which HDR is active during multiple exposure
(0 214) or interval timer shooting (0 221) disables HDR. HDR is also
disabled if you switch to a bank in which an NEF (RAW) option is
selected for image quality.

194

lFlash Photography
Using a Flash
The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) and
can be used with CLS-compatible flash units. Optional flash units
can be attached directly to the camera accessory shoe as described
below. The accessory shoe is equipped with a safety lock for flash
units with a locking pin.

Remove the accessory shoe cover.

Mount the flash unit on the
accessory shoe.
See the manual provided with the flash
unit for details.

l
A

The Sync Terminal
A sync cable can be connected to the sync
terminal as required. Do not connect another
flash unit via a sync cable when performing rearcurtain sync flash photography with a flash unit
mounted on the camera accessory shoe.

195

The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved
communication between the camera and compatible flash units
for improved flash photography.

❚❚ CLS-Compatible Flash Units
The camera can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash
units:
• The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-400, SB-300, and SB-R200:
Flash unit
Feature
SB-910 1 SB-900 1 SB-800 SB-700 1 SB-600 SB-400 2 SB-300 2 SB-R200 3
Guide ISO 100 34/111 34/111 38/125 28/92 30/98 21/69 18/59 10/33
No. 4 ISO 200 48/157 48/157 53/174 39/128 42/138 30/98 25/82 14/46
1 If a color filter is attached to the SB-910, SB-900, or SB-700 when v or
N (flash) is selected for white balance, the camera will automatically detect the
filter and adjust white balance appropriately.
2 Wireless flash control is not available.
3 Controlled remotely with optional SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, or SB-700 flash unit
or SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander.
4 m/ft, 20 °C (68 °F), SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom
head position; SB-910, SB-900, and SB-700 with standard illumination.

• SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander: When mounted on a CLScompatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander for
remote SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash
units in up to three groups. The SU-800 itself is not equipped
with a flash.

l
A

Guide Number
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide
Number by the aperture. If, for example, the flash unit has a Guide
Number of 34 m or 111 ft (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F); its range at an aperture
of f/5.6 is 34÷5.6 or about 6.1 meters (or in feet, 111÷5.6=approximately
19 ft 10 in.). For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity, multiply the
Guide Number by the square root of two (approximately 1.4).

196

The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash
units:
CLS-compatible flash units
SU-800
SB-910
SB-900
Close-up
SB-800 SB-700 SB-600 Commander photography SB-R200 SB-400 SB-300

i-TTL balanced fill-flash
for digital SLR 1
Standard i-TTL flash for
digital SLR
AA Auto aperture
A Non-TTL auto
GN Distance-priority manual
M Manual
RPT Repeating flash
Remote flash control
i-TTL i-TTL
Quick wireless flash
[A:B]
control
AA Auto aperture
A Non-TTL auto
M Manual
RPT Repeating flash
i-TTL i-TTL
Quick wireless flash
[A:B]
control
AA Auto aperture
A Non-TTL auto
M Manual
RPT Repeating flash
Flash Color Information
Communication
Auto FP High-Speed Sync 6
FV lock 7
AF-assist for multi-area AF
Red-eye reduction
Camera modeling illumination
Camera flash mode selection
Camera flash unit firmware
update

—

—
—
z
z
—
z
z

—
—
—
z
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
z
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
z4
—
—
—

i-TTL

Single flash

z3
z
z
z
z
z

Remote
Master
Advanced Wireless Lighting

—

z5
z
z
z
z

—
—
z
—
z

—
—
—
—
z

—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
z

—
—
—
—
—

—

z5
z
z
z

—
—
z
z

—
—
—
—

—
—
z
—

—
—
—
—

—

z
z
z
z
z
—

z
z
z
—
z
—

z
z
—
—
z
—

—
z
—
z
—
z

—
z
—
—
—
z

—

197

1 Not available with spot metering.
2 Can also be selected with flash unit.
3 AA/A mode selection performed on flash unit using custom settings. Unless
lens data have been provided using the Non-CPU lens data option in the
setup menu, “A” will be selected when a non-CPU lens is used.
4 Can only be selected with camera.
5 Unless lens data have been provided using the Non-CPU lens data option
in the setup menu, non-TTL auto (A) is used with non-CPU lenses, regardless
of mode selected with flash unit.
6 Available only in i-TTL, AA, A, GN, and M flash-control modes.
7 Availalbe only in i-TTL, AA, and A flash-control modes.
8 Firmware updates for the SB-910 and SB-900 can be performed from the
camera.

l
A

Modeling Illumination
CLS-compatible flash units such as the SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700,
and SB-600 emit a modeling flash when the camera Pv button is
pressed. This feature can be used with Advanced Wireless Lighting to
preview the total lighting effect achieved with multiple flash units.
Modeling illumination can be turned off using Custom Setting e5
Modeling flash (0 333).

198

❚❚ Other Flash Units
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual
modes.
Flash unit

Flash mode
A Non-TTL auto
M Manual
G Repeating flash
REAR Rear-curtain sync 3

SB-80DX,
SB-28DX,
SB-28, SB-26,
SB-25, SB-24
✔
✔
✔
✔

SB-50DX
—
✔
—
✔

SB-30, SB-27 1,
SB-22S, SB-22, SB-23, SB-29 2,
SB-21B 2,
SB-20, SB-16B,
SB-29S 2
SB-15
✔
—
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔

1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set
flash unit to A (non-TTL auto flash).
2 Autofocus is available with AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED and
AF-S Micro NIKKOR 60mm f/2.8G ED lenses only.
3 Available when camera is used to select flash mode.

Notes on Optional Flash Units
Refer to the flash unit manual for detailed instructions. If the unit
supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR
cameras. The D4S is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the
SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and
12800. At values over 12800, the desired results may not be achieved at
some ranges or aperture settings. If the flash-ready indicator flashes for
about three seconds after a photograph is taken in i-TTL or non-TTL
auto mode, the flash has fired at full power and the photograph may be
underexposed.

When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash
photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We
recommend that you select standard i-TTL flash control. Take a test shot
and view the results in the monitor.
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash
unit. Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may
produce incorrect exposure.

199

Notes on Optional Flash Units (Continued)
The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SB-400 provide red-eye
reduction, while the SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SU-800
provide AF-assist illumination with the following restrictions:
• SB-910 and SB-900: AF-assist
illumination is available
with 17–135 mm AF lenses, 17–19 mm 20–105 mm 106–135 mm
however, autofocus is
available only with the focus points shown at right.
• SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800: AFassist illumination is
24–34 mm 35–49 mm 50–105 mm
available with 24–105 mm
AF lenses, however,
autofocus is available only with the focus points shown at right.
• SB-700: AF-assist
illumination is available
24–27 mm 28–135 mm
with 24–135 mm AF lenses,
however, autofocus is
available only with the focus points shown at right.
In exposure mode e, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is
limited according to ISO sensitivity, as shown below:
100
4

200
4.8

Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:
400
800
1600
3200
5.6
6.7
8
9.5

6400
11

12800
13

If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the
maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.

200

Flash Control Mode
The information display shows the flash control mode for optional flash
units as follows:
Flash sync

Auto FP (0 331)

i-TTL
Auto aperture (AA)
Non-TTL auto flash (A)
Distance-priority manual
(GN)
Manual
Repeating flash

—

Advanced wireless
lighting

Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories
Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V
applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation,
but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash. Before using a
Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-authorized
service representative for more information.

201

i-TTL Flash Control
When a CLS-compatible flash unit is set to TTL, the camera
automatically selects one of the following types of flash control:
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR: Flash unit emits series of nearly invisible
preflashes (monitor preflashes) immediately before main flash.
Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by
RGB sensor with approximately 91K (91,000) pixels and are analyzed in
combination with range information from matrix metering system to
adjust flash output for natural balance between main subject and
ambient background lighting. If type G, E, or D lens is used, distance
information is included when calculating flash output. Precision of
calculation can be increased for non-CPU lenses by providing lens data
(focal length and maximum aperture; see 0 235). Not available when
spot metering is used.
Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR: Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in
frame to standard level; brightness of background is not taken into
account. Recommended for shots in which main subject is emphasized
at expense of background details, or when exposure compensation is
used. Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when
spot metering is selected.

202

Flash Modes
The camera supports the following flash modes:
Flash mode

Description
This mode is recommended for most situations. In
programmed auto and aperture-priority auto modes,
shutter speed will automatically be set to values between
Front1/250 and 1/60 s (1/8000 to 1/60 s with Auto FP High-Speed
curtain sync
Sync; 0 331).
Choose this mode (available with SB-910, SB-900, SB-800,
SB-700, SB-600, and SB-400 only) to reduce “red-eye” effect
sometimes caused by flash. Not recommended with
Red-eye moving subjects or in other situations in which quick
reduction shutter response is required. Do not move camera during
shooting.
Combines red-eye reduction with slow sync. Use for
portraits taken against a backdrop of night scenery.
Red-eye Available only with SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600,
reduction and SB-400 in programmed auto and aperture-priority
with slow auto exposure modes. Use of a tripod is recommended to
sync
prevent blurring caused by camera shake.
Flash is combined with shutter speeds as slow as 30 s to
capture both subject and background at night or under
dim light. This mode is only available in programmed auto
and aperture-priority auto exposure modes. Use of tripod
Slow sync
is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera
shake.
In shutter-priority auto or manual exposure mode, flash
fires just before the shutter closes. Use to create effect of a
stream of light behind moving objects. In programmed
auto and aperture-priority auto, slow rear-curtain sync is
Rear-curtain
used to capture both subject and background. Use of
sync
tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by
camera shake.
Flash off

The flash does not fire.

203

❚❚ Choosing a Flash Mode
To choose the flash mode, press
the M button and rotate the main
command dial until the desired
flash mode is selected in the top
control panel:
M button

204

Main
command dial

Front-curtain sync

Red-eye reduction 1

Red-eye reduction with
slow sync 1, 2

Flash off

Rear-curtain sync 4

Slow sync 3

1 Y icon flashes if flash unit does not support red-eye reduction.
2 Red-eye reduction with slow sync is available only in exposure modes e
and g. In modes f and h, red-eye reduction with slow sync becomes
red-eye reduction.
3 Available only in exposure modes e and g. In modes f and h, slow sync
becomes front-curtain sync.
4 In exposure modes e and g, flash-sync mode will be set to slow
rear-curtain sync when the M button is released.

Studio Flash Systems
Rear-curtain sync can not be used with studio flash systems, as the
correct synchronization can not be obtained.

Shutter Speed and Aperture
Shutter speed and aperture can be set as follows when an optional flash
unit is used:
Mode
e
f
g
h

Shutter speed
Set automatically by camera
(1/250 s–1/60 s) 1, 2
Value selected by user
(1/250 s–30 s) 2
Set automatically by camera
(1/250 s–1/60 s) 1, 2
Value selected by user
(1/250 s–30 s, A, %) 2

Aperture
Set automatically
by camera

Value selected by
user 3

See page
127
128
129
130

1 Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30 s in slow sync, slow rear-curtain
sync, and slow sync with red-eye reduction flash modes.
2 Speeds as fast as 1/8000 s are available with optional flash units that support
auto FP high-speed sync when 1/250 s (Auto FP) is selected for Custom
Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 331).
3 Flash range varies with aperture and ISO sensitivity. When setting aperture
in exposure modes g and h, consult the table of flash ranges provided with
optional flash unit.

See Also
For information on choosing a flash sync speed, see Custom Setting e1
(Flash sync speed, 0 331). For information on choosing the slowest
shutter speed available when using the flash, see Custom Setting e2
(Flash shutter speed, 0 332). For information on turning the flash on or
off using the Fn button, see Custom Setting f3 (Assign Fn button,
0 337).

205

Flash Compensation
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output by from –3 EV to
+1 EV in increments of 1/3 EV, changing the brightness of the main
subject relative to the background. Flash output can be increased
to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced to prevent
unwanted highlights or reflections. In general, choose positive
values to make the main subject brighter, negative values to make
it darker.
To choose a value for flash
compensation, press the M button
and rotate the sub-command dial
until the desired value is displayed
in the top control panel.
M button

±0 EV
(M button pressed)

206

–0.3 EV

Sub-command
dial

+1.0 EV

At values other than ±0.0, a Y icon will be displayed in the top
control panel and E will be displayed in the viewfinder after you
release the M button. The current value for flash compensation can
be confirmed by pressing the M button.
Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash
compensation to ±0.0. Flash compensation is not reset when the
camera is turned off.

Optional Flash Units
The flash compensation selected with the optional flash unit is added to
the flash compensation selected with the camera.

See Also
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for
flash compensation, see Custom Setting b3 (Exp./flash comp. step
value, 0 321). For information on choosing whether flash
compensation is applied in addition to exposure compensation when
the flash is used, see Custom Setting e4 (Exposure comp. for flash,
0 333). For information on automatically varying flash level over a
series of shots, see page 140.

207

FV Lock
This feature is used to lock flash output, allowing photographs to
be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring that
flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is
not positioned in the center of the frame. Flash output is adjusted
automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture. FV
lock is available with CLS compatible flash units only (0 196).
To use FV lock:

Assign FV lock to a camera control.
Select FV lock as the “press” option for
Custom Setting f3 (Assign Fn button,
0 337), f4 (Assign preview button,
0 342), or f5 (Assign sub-selector
center, 0 342).

Attach a CLS-compatible flash unit.
Mount a CLS-compatible flash unit (0 197) on the camera
accessory shoe.

3
l

208

Set the flash unit to the appropriate mode.
Turn the flash unit on and set the flash mode to TTL, monitor
pre-flash AA, or monitor pre-flash A. See the Speedlight
instruction manual for details.

Focus.
Position the subject in the
center of the frame and press
the shutter-release button
halfway to focus.

Lock flash level.
After confirming that the flash-ready
indicator (M) is displayed in the
viewfinder, press the button selected in
Step 1. The flash will emit a monitor
preflash to determine the appropriate
flash level. Flash output will be locked at this level and FV lock
icons (P and e) will appear in the top control panel and
viewfinder.

Recompose the photograph.

Take the photograph.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
shoot. If desired, additional pictures can be taken without
releasing FV lock.

209

Release FV lock.
Press the button selected in Step 1 to release FV lock. Confirm
that the FV lock icons (P and e) are no longer displayed in
the top control panel and viewfinder.

Metering
The metering areas for FV lock are as follows:
Flash unit
Stand-alone flash unit
Used with other flash
units (Advanced
Wireless Lighting)

210

Flash mode
i-TTL
AA
i-TTL
AA
A (master
flash)

Metered area
6-mm circle in center of frame
Area metered by flash exposure
meter
Entire frame
Area metered by flash exposure
meter

tOther Shooting Options
Two-Button Reset: Restoring
Default Settings
The camera settings listed below can be
restored to default values by holding the S
and U buttons down together for more
than two seconds (these buttons are marked
by a green dot). The control panels turn off
briefly while settings are reset.

S
button

U
button

211

❚❚ Settings Accessible from the Shooting Menu 1
Option
Default
Extended menu
Off
banks
Image quality
JPEG normal
JPEG/TIFF recording
Image size
Large
NEF (RAW) recording
Image size
Large
White balance
Auto > Normal
Fine-tuning
A-B: 0, G-M: 0
Picture Control
Unmodified
settings 2
HDR (high
Off 3
dynamic range)
ISO sensitivity settings
ISO sensitivity
100
Auto ISO
sensitivity
Off
control

212

Option
Default
Multiple exposure
Off 4
Interval timer
Off 5
shooting
Live view
Quiet
photography
Movie settings >
Movie ISO sensitivity settings
ISO sensitivity
200
(mode M)
Auto ISO control
Off
(mode M)
Maximum
25600
sensitivity

1 With the exception of multiple exposure and interval timer settings, only
settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting menu bank option
will be reset (0 300). Settings in the remaining banks are unaffected.
2 Current Picture Control only.
3 Exposure differential and smoothing are not reset.
4 If multiple exposure is currently in progress, shooting will end and multiple
exposure will be created from exposures recorded to that point. Gain and
number of shots are not reset.
5 If interval timer shooting is currently in progress, shooting will end. Starting
time, shooting interval, number of intervals and shots, and exposure
smoothing are not reset.

❚❚ Other Settings
Option
Focus point 1
Preset focus
point
Exposure mode

Default
Center
Center
Programmed
auto
Off

Flexible program
Exposure
Off
compensation
AE lock hold
Off
Aperture lock
Off
Shutter speed lock
Off
Autofocus mode
AF-S
AF-area mode
Viewfinder
Single-point AF
Live view/movie Normal-area AF

Option
Live view
monitor hue
Metering
Bracketing
Flash mode
Flash
compensation
FV lock
Exposure delay
mode

Default

Matrix metering
Off 2
Front-curtain
sync
Off
Off
Off 3

1 Focus point not displayed if auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode.
2 Number of shots is reset to zero. Bracketing increment is reset to 1EV
(exposure/flash bracketing) or 1 (white balance bracketing). Y Auto is
selected for the second shot of two-shot ADL bracketing programs.
3 Only settings in the bank currently selected using the Custom settings
bank option will be reset (0 311). Settings in the remaining banks are
unaffected.

See Also
See page 430 for a list of default settings.

213

Multiple Exposure
Follow the steps below to record a series of two to ten exposures
in a single photograph. Multiple exposures can make use of RAW
data from the camera image sensor to produce colors noticeably
superior to those in software-generated photographic overlays.

❚❚ Creating a Multiple Exposure
Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view. Exit live view
before proceeding. Note that at default settings, shooting will end
and a multiple exposure will be recorded automatically if no
operations are performed for 30 s.

Extended Recording Times
For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s, extend the meteroff delay using Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 324). The
maximum interval between exposures is 30 s longer than the option
selected for Custom Setting c2. If no operations are performed for 30 s
after the monitor has turned off during playback or menu operations,
shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created from the
exposures that have been recorded to that point.

214

Select Multiple
exposure in the
shooting menu.
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Multiple
exposure in the shooting
menu and press 2.

G button

Select a mode.
Highlight Multiple exposure
mode and press 2.

Highlight one of the
following and press J:
• To take a series of multiple
exposures, select 0 On
(series). Multiple
exposure shooting will
J button
continue until you select
Off for Multiple exposure mode.
• To take one multiple exposure, select On (single photo). Normal
shooting will resume automatically after you have created a
single multiple exposure.
• To exit without creating additional multiple exposures, select Off.
If On (series) or On (single photo) is
selected, a n icon will be displayed in
the top control panel.

215

Choose the number of
shots.
Highlight Number of shots and
press 2.
Press 1 or 3 to choose the
number of exposures that will
be combined to form a single
photograph and press J.

The D Button
If Multiple exposure is selected for
Custom Setting f9 (Assign BKT button;
0 344), you can select the multiple
exposure mode by pressing the D button
and rotating the main command dial and
the number of shots by pressing the D
button and rotating the sub-command
dial. The mode and number of shots are
shown in the top control panel:
$F appears when On (series) is selected and $ when On (single
photo) is selected; no icon appears when multiple exposure is off.

216

Choose the amount of gain.
Highlight Auto gain and
press 2.

The following options will be
displayed. Highlight an option
and press J.
• On: Gain is adjusted
according to number of
exposures actually recorded
(gain for each exposure is set to 1/2 for 2 exposures, 1/3 for
3 exposures, etc.).
• Off: Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure.
Note that photographs may be affected by noise (randomlyspaced bright pixels, fog, or lines).

217

Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
In continuous release modes (0 111), the camera
records all exposures in a single burst. If On (series)
is selected, the camera will continue to record
multiple exposures while the shutter-release button is
pressed; if On (single photo) is selected, multiple exposure
shooting will end after the first photograph. In self-timer
mode, the camera will automatically record the number of
exposures selected in Step 3 on page 216, regardless of the
option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Number
of shots (0 325); the interval between shots is however
controlled by Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Interval
between shots. In other release modes, one photograph will
be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed;
continue shooting until all exposures have been recorded (for
information on interrupting a multiple exposure before all
photographs are recorded, see page 219).
The n icon will flash until shooting ends.
If On (series) is selected, multiple
exposure shooting will only end when
Off is selected for multiple exposure
mode; if On (single photo) is selected,
multiple exposure shooting ends automatically when the
multiple exposure is complete. The n icon clears from the
display when multiple exposure shooting ends.

218

❚❚ Interrupting Multiple Exposures
To interrupt a multiple exposure before the
specified number of exposures have been
taken, select Off for multiple exposure mode.
If shooting ends before the specified number
of exposures have been taken, a multiple
exposure will be created from the exposures
that have been recorded to that point. If Auto gain is on, gain will
be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded.
Note that shooting will end automatically if:
• A two-button reset is performed (0 211)
• The camera is turned off
• The battery is exhausted
• Pictures are deleted

219

Multiple Exposure
Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple
exposure.
Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view. Taking
photographs in live view resets Multiple exposure mode to Off.

The shooting information listed in the playback photo information
display (including date of recording and camera orientation) is for the
first shot in the multiple exposure.

Voice Memos
Voice recording is disabled while multiple exposures are being shot, but
a memo can be recorded when shooting finishes (0 261).

Interval Timer Photography
If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is
taken, the camera will record exposures at the selected interval until the
number of exposures specified in the multiple exposure menu have
been taken (the number of shots listed in the interval timer shooting
menu is ignored). These exposures will then be recorded as a single
photograph and interval timer shooting will end (if On (single photo) is
selected for multiple exposure mode, multiple exposure shooting will
also end automatically).

Other Settings
While a multiple exposure is being shot, memory cards can not be
formatted and some menu items are grayed out and can not be
changed.

220

Interval Timer Photography
The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at
preset intervals.

Before Shooting
Select a release mode other than self-timer (E) when using the interval
timer. Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at
current settings and view the results in the monitor.
Before choosing a starting time, select Time zone and date in the setup
menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and
date (0 30).
Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before
shooting begins. To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the
camera battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before
use or use an AC adapter and power connector (available separately).

Select Interval timer
shooting in the
shooting menu.

G button

Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Interval timer
shooting in the shooting
menu and press 2.

221

Choose a start option.
Highlight Start options and press 2 and
then choose from the following starting
triggers.
• To start shooting immediately, highlight
Now and press J. Shooting begins
about 3 s after settings are completed; proceed to Step 3.
• To choose a starting time,
highlight Choose start day
and start time and press 2 to
display the start time options
shown at right. Press 4 or 2
to highlight the start date
(any day within the next 8 days), hour (H), or minute (M) and
press 1 or 3 to change. Press J to return to the interval
timer menu.

222

Choose the interval.
Highlight Interval and press 2,
then press 4 or 2 to highlight
hours, minutes, or seconds and
press 1 or 3 to change.
Choose an interval longer than
the time needed to take the number of shots selected in Step
4. If the interval is too short, the number of photos taken may
be less than the total listed in Step 4 (the number of intervals
multiplied by the number of shots per interval). Press J to
return to the interval timer menu.

Choose the number of
intervals and number of
shots per interval.
Highlight No. of intervals ×
shots/interval and press 2,
then press 4 or 2 to highlight
number of intervals or number
of shots and press 1 or 3 to
change. Press J to return to
the interval timer menu.

Number of Number
intervals of shots/
interval

Total
number
of shots

Choose whether to enable
exposure smoothing.
Highlight Exposure
smoothing and press 2, then
press 1 or 3 to highlight an
option and press J to select.
Selecting On allows the camera to adjust exposure to match
the first shot in each series in e, f, and g modes (note that
exposure smoothing only takes effect in mode h if auto ISO
sensitivity control is on).

223

Start shooting.
Highlight Start and press
J. The first series of shots
will be taken at the
specified starting time, or
after about 3 s if Now was J button
selected for Start options
in Step 2. Shooting will continue at the selected interval until
all shots have been taken. Note that because the shutter
speed, frame rate, and time needed to record images may vary
from one interval to the next, the time between the end of one
interval and the beginning of the next may vary. If shooting
can not proceed at current settings (for example, if the interval
is set to zero seconds or if a shutter speed of A or % is
currently selected in manual exposure mode or the start time
is in less than a minute), a warning will be displayed in the
monitor.

224

Cover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with
photographs and exposure, close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter
(0 114).

Out of Memory
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no
pictures will be taken. Resume shooting (0 227) after deleting some
pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card.

Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer photography can not be combined with time-lapse
photography (0 229) and is not available when Record movies is
selected for Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter button, 0 357).

Bracketing
Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography.
If exposure, flash, or ADL bracketing is active while interval timer
photography is in effect, the camera will take the number of shots in the
bracketing program at each interval, regardless of the number of shots
specified in the interval timer menu. If white balance bracketing is
active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will take
one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of copies
specified in the bracketing program.

225

During Shooting
During interval timer photography, the Q
icon will flash in the top control panel.
Immediately before the next shooting interval
begins, the shutter speed display will show the
number of intervals remaining, and the
aperture display will show the number of shots remaining in the current
interval. At other times, the number of intervals remaining and the
number of shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutterrelease button halfway (once the button is released, the shutter speed
and aperture will be displayed until the standby timer expires).
To view current interval timer settings or to
pause (0 227) or end (0 228) interval timer
shooting, select Interval timer shooting
between shots. While interval timer
photography is in progress, the interval timer
menu will show the starting time, the shooting
interval, the number of intervals and shots
remaining, and exposure smoothing. None of these items can be
changed while interval timer photography is in progress.
Pictures can be played back and shooting and menu settings can be
adjusted freely while interval timer photography is in progress. The
monitor will turn off automatically about four seconds before each
interval.

226

❚❚ Pausing Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer photography can be paused by:
• Pressing the J button between intervals
• Selecting Pause in the interval timer menu
• Turning the camera off and then on again (if desired, the
memory card can be replaced while the camera is off )
• Selecting self-timer (E) release mode
To resume shooting:

Choose new start options.
Choose new start options as
described on page 222.

Resume shooting.
Highlight Restart and
press J. Note that if
interval timer photography
was paused during
shooting, any shots
J button
remaining in the current
interval will be canceled.

227

❚❚ Interrupting Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer shooting will end automatically if the battery is
exhausted. Interval timer photography can also be ended by:
• Selecting Off in the interval timer menu
• Performing a two button reset (0 211)
• Resetting settings for the current shooting menu bank using the
Shooting menu bank item in the shooting menu (0 300)
• Changing bracketing settings (0 140)
• Terminating HDR (0 190) or multiple exposure shooting (0 214)
Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends.

❚❚ No Photograph
The camera will skip the current interval if any of the following
situations persist for eight seconds or more after the interval was
due to start: the photograph or photographs for the previous
interval have yet to be taken, the memory card is full, the number
of shots available in continuous shooting modes is 0, or the
camera is unable to focus in AF-S (note that the camera focuses
again before each shot). Shooting will resume with the next
interval.

Release Mode
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the
specified number of shots at each interval.

t A Shooting Menu Banks

Changes to interval timer settings apply to all shooting menu banks
(0 300). If shooting menu settings are reset using the Shooting menu
bank item in the shooting menu (0 301), interval timer shooting will
end and interval timer settings will be reset as follows:
• Start options: Now
• Number of shots: 1
• Interval: 00:01':00"
• Exposure smoothing: Off
• Number of intervals: 1

228

Time-Lapse Photography
The camera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to
create a silent time-lapse movie using the options currently
selected for Frame size/frame rate, Movie quality, and
Destination in the movie settings menu (0 74).

Before Shooting
Before beginning time-lapse photography, take a test shot at current
settings (framing the photo in the viewfinder for an accurate exposure
preview) and view the results in the monitor. To record changes in
brightness, choose manual exposure (0 130); for consistent coloration,
choose a white balance setting other than auto (0 155). We also
recommend that you briefly switch to movie live view and check the
current image area crop in the monitor (0 63); note, however, that
time-lapse photography is not available in live view.
Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before
shooting begins. To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, use an
optional AC adapter and power connector or a fully-charged battery.

Select Time-lapse
photography in the
shooting menu.
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Time-lapse
photography in the
shooting menu and press 2.

G button

229

Choose the interval.
Highlight Interval and press 2,
then press 4 or 2 to highlight
minutes, or seconds and press
1 or 3 to change. Choose an
interval longer than the slowest
anticipated shutter speed. Press J to return to the time-lapse
photography menu.

Select the shooting time.
Highlight Shooting time and
press 2, then press 4 or 2 to
highlight hours or minutes and
press 1 or 3 to change. The
maximum shooting time is 7
hours and 59 minutes. Press J to return to the time-lapse
photography menu.

230

Start shooting.
Highlight Start and press
J.
Time-lapse photography
starts after 3 s. The camera
takes photographs at the J button
interval selected in Step 2
for the time selected in Step 3. Note that because shutter
speed and the time needed to record the image to the
memory card may vary from shot to shot, the interval between
a shot being recorded and the start of the next shot may vary.
Shooting will not begin if a time-lapse movie can not be
recorded at current settings (for example, if the memory card
is full, the interval or shooting time is zero, or the interval is
longer than the shooting time).
When complete, time-lapse movies are recorded to the
memory card selected for Movie settings > Destination
(0 75).

231

Time-Lapse Photography
Time-lapse is not available in live view (0 49, 63), at a shutter speed of
A or % (0 132) or when bracketing (0 140), High Dynamic Range
(HDR, 0 190), multiple exposure (0 214), or interval timer photography
(0 221) is active.

Frame Size
The area used for metering exposure, flash level, or auto white balance
when photographs are recorded at a movie frame size of 1920 × 1080;
30p crop, 1920 × 1080; 25p crop, or 1920 × 1080; 24p crop (0 74) is
not the same as the area in the final photograph, with the result that
optimal results may not be achieved. Take test shots and check the
results in the monitor.

Release Mode
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take one shot
at each interval. The self-timer can not be used.

232

Calculating the Length of the Final Movie
The total number of frames in the final movie
Length recorded/
can be calculated by dividing the shooting time maximum length
by the interval and rounding up. The length of
the final movie can then be calculated by diving
the number of shots by the frame rate selected
for Movie settings > Frame size/frame rate. A
48 frame movie recorded at 1920 × 1080; 24p,
for example, will be about two seconds long.
The maximum length for movies recorded using Memory card
time-lapse photography is 20 minutes.
indicator
Frame size/frame rate

Cover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with
photographs and exposure, close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter
(0 114).

During Shooting
During time-lapse photography, Q will flash
and the time-lapse recording indicator will be
displayed in the top control panel. The time
remaining (in hours and minutes) appears in the
shutter-speed display immediately before each
frame is recorded. At other times, the time remaining can be viewed by
pressing the shutter-release button halfway. Regardless of the option
selected for Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 324), the standby
timer will not expire during shooting.
To view current time-lapse photography settings
or end time-lapse photography (0 234), press
the G button between shots. While timelapse photography is in progress, the time-lapse
photography menu will show exposure
smoothing, the interval, and the time remaining.
These settings can not be changed while timelapse photography is in progress, nor can pictures be played back or
other menu settings adjusted.

233

❚❚ Interrupting Time-Lapse Photography
Time-lapse photography will end automatically if the battery is
exhausted. The following will also end time-lapse photography:
• Selecting Off in the Time-lapse photography menu
• Pressing the J button between frames or immediately after a
frame is recorded
• Turning the camera off
• Removing the lens
• Connecting an HDMI cable
• Inserting a memory card into an empty slot
• Pressing the shutter-release button all the way down to take a
photograph
A movie will be created from the frames shot to the point where
time-lapse photography ended. Note that time-lapse
photography will end and no movie will be recorded if the power
source is removed or disconnected or the destination memory
card is ejected.

❚❚ No Photograph
The camera will skip the current frame if the camera is unable to
focus in AF-S (note that the camera focuses again before each shot).
Shooting will resume with the next frame.

Image Review
The K button can not be used to view pictures while time-lapse
photography is in progress, but the current frame will be displayed for a
few seconds after each shot if On is selected for Image review in the
playback menu (0 295). Other playback operations can not be
performed while the frame is displayed.

See Also
For information on setting a beep to sound when time-lapse
photography is complete, see Custom Setting d1 (Beep, 0 326).

234

Non-CPU Lenses
Non-CPU lenses can be used in exposure modes g and h, with
aperture set using the lens aperture ring. By specifying lens data
(lens focal length and maximum aperture), the user can gain
access to the following CPU lens functions.
If the focal length of the lens is known:
• Power zoom can be used with optional flash units (0 196)
• Lens focal length is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo
info display
If the maximum aperture of the lens is known:
• The aperture value is displayed in the top control panel and
viewfinder
• Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture if the flash unit
supports AA (auto aperture) mode
• Aperture is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info
display
Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens:
• Enables color matrix metering (note that it may be necessary to
use center-weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results
with some lenses, including Reflex-NIKKOR lenses)
• Improves the precision of center-weighted and spot metering
and i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR

235

The camera can store data for up to nine non-CPU lenses. To enter
or edit data for a non-CPU lens:

Select Non-CPU lens
G button
data in the setup menu.
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Non-CPU lens
data in the setup menu
and press 2.

Select a lens number.
Highlight Lens number and
press 4 or 2 to choose a lens
number between 1 and 9.

Enter the focal length and
aperture.
Highlight Focal length (mm) or
Maximum aperture and press
4 or 2 to edit the highlighted
item. Focal length can be
selected from values between 6 and 4000 mm, maximum
aperture from values between f/1.2 and f/22.

Save settings and exit.
Press J. The specified focal length and
aperture will be stored under the chosen
lens number.
J button

236

To recall lens data when using a non-CPU lens:

Assign non-CPU lens number selection to a camera
control.
Select Choose non-CPU lens number as the “Press +
command dials” option for a camera control in the Custom
Settings menu (0 341). Non-CPU lens number selection can
be assigned to the Fn button (Custom Setting f3, Assign Fn
button, 0 337), the Pv button (Custom Setting f4, Assign
preview button, 0 342), or the center of the sub-selector
(Custom Setting f6, Assign sub-selector center, 0 342).

Use the selected control to choose a lens number.
Press the selected control and rotate the main or subcommand dial until the desired lens number is displayed in
the top control panel.
Focal length

Main command dial

Maximum aperture

Lens number

Focal Length Not Listed
If the correct focal length is not listed, choose the closest value greater
than the actual focal length of the lens.

Teleconverters and Zoom Lenses
The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the combined maximum
aperture of the teleconverter and the lens. Note that lens data are not
adjusted when non-CPU lenses are zoomed in or out. The data for
different focal lengths can be entered as separate lens numbers, or the
data for the lens can be edited to reflect the new values for lens focal
length and maximum aperture each time zoom is adjusted.

237

Location Data
A GPS unit can be connected to the ten-pin remote terminal,
allowing the current latitude, longitude, altitude, Coordinated
Universal Time (UTC), and heading to be recorded with each
photograph taken. The camera can be used with optional GP-1
and GP-1A GPS units (see below; note that these units do not
provide the compass heading), or with compatible third-party
units connected via an optional MC-35 GPS adapter cord (0 413).

❚❚ GP-1/GP-1A GPS Units
These optional GPS units are designed for use with Nikon digital
cameras. For information on connecting the unit, see the manual
provided with the device.

238

The o Icon
Connection status is shown by the o icon:
• o (static): The camera has established
communication with the GPS device. Photo
information for pictures taken while this icon
is displayed include an additional page of
location data (0 251).
• o (flashing): The GPS device is searching for a signal. Pictures taken
while the icon is flashing do not include location data.
• No icon: No new location data have been received from the GPS device
for at least two seconds. Pictures taken when the o icon is not
displayed do not include location data.

Heading
The heading is only recorded if the GPS device is
equipped with a digital compass (note that the
GP-1 and GP-1A are not equipped with a
compass). Keep the GPS device pointing in the
same direction as the lens and at least 20 cm
(8 in.) from the camera.

Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the
camera clock.

239

❚❚ Setup Menu Options
The Location data item in the setup menu contains the options
listed below.
• Standby timer: Choose whether or not the exposure meters will
turn off automatically when a GPS unit is attached.
Option

Enable

Disable

Description
Exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations
are performed for the period specified in Custom Setting c2
(Standby timer (0 324); to allow the camera time to
acquire location data when a GP-1 or GP-1A is connected,
the delay is extended by up to one minute after exposure
meters are activated or the camera is turned on). This
reduces the drain on the battery.
Exposure meters will not turn off while a GPS unit is
connected; location data will always be recorded.

• Position: This item is only available if a GPS device is connected,
when it displays the current latitude, longitude, altitude,
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), and heading (if supported) as
reported by the GPS device.
• Set clock from satellite: Select Yes to synchronize the camera
clock with the time reported by the GPS device.

240

IMore About Playback
Viewing Images

Full-frame
playback

Thumbnail playback

Full-Frame Playback
To play photographs back, press the K button. The K button
most recent photograph will be displayed in the
monitor. Additional pictures can be displayed by
pressing 4 or 2; to view additional information on
the current photograph, press 1 or 3 (0 244).

Thumbnail Playback
To view multiple images, press the W button when
a picture is displayed full frame. The number of
images displayed increases from 4 to 9 to 72 each
time the W button is pressed, and decreases with
each press of the X button. Use the multi selector
to highlight images and press the center of the
W button
multi selector to view the highlighted image full
frame.

241

Playback Controls
O (Q): Delete the current picture (0 257)
G: View the menus (0 289)
L (Z/Q):Protect the current picture (0 255)

X: Zoom in (0 253)
W: View multiple images (0 241)
J: Use in combination with the multi
selector as described below

H:Record and play
voice memos
(0 264)

J+

Display slot/folder selection dialog. To choose card and
folder from which pictures are played back, highlight slot
and press 2 to display list of folders, then highlight folder
and press J.

J+

Create retouched copy of current photograph (0 378) or
create edited copy of current movie (0 79).

J+

View the IPTC presets stored on the camera (0 368). To
embed IPTC preset in current photo, highlight preset and
press J (any preset already embedded in current photo
will be replaced).

J+

Upload photographs over a wireless or Ethernet network
(0 276).

Two Memory Cards
If two memory cards are inserted, you can select a memory card for
playback by pressing the W button when 72 thumbnails are displayed.

242

Rotate Tall
To display “tall” (portrait-orientation)
photographs in tall orientation, select On for
the Rotate tall option in the playback menu
(0 296).

Image Review
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0 295),
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting
(because the camera is already in the correct orientation, images are not
rotated automatically during image review). In continuous release
mode, display begins when shooting ends, with the first photograph in
the current series displayed.

Resuming Shooting
To turn the monitor off and return to shooting mode, press K or press
the shutter-release button halfway. Photographs can be taken
immediately.

The Multi Selector
The multi selector can be used to
highlight pictures in the thumbnail
display and in displays like that
shown at right.

See Also
For information on choosing how long the monitor will remain on when
no operations are performed, see Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off
delay, 0 325). For information on choosing the role played by the
center of the multi selector, see Custom Setting f1 (Multi selector
center button, 0 335). For information on using the command dials
for image or menu navigation, see Custom Setting f10 (Customize
command dials) > Menus and playback (0 346).

243

Photo Information
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in fullframe playback. Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo information
as shown below. Note that “image only”, shooting data, RGB
histograms, and highlights are only displayed if corresponding
option is selected for Playback display options (0 291). Location
data are only displayed if a GPS device was used when the photo
was taken (0 238), while IPTC presets are displayed only if
embedded in the photo (0 368).
1/ 12

1/ 125
0

100NCD4S DSC_0001. JPG
15/ 10/ 2013 10: 02: 27

F5. 6

100

None (image only)

50mm

, 0

100NCD4S DSC_0001. JPG
15/ 10/ 2013 10: 02: 27

NOR
ORMAL
AL
4928x3280

File information

N I KON D4S

1/ 12

N OR
ORMAL
AL
4928x3280

Overview data

100-1
IPTC
Caption

Select R, G, B

RGB Highlights

RGB

RGB histogram

244

:
:
:
:
:

100-1

IPTC preset

MTR, SPD, AP.
EXP. MODE, I SO

100-1

Headline
Object Name
City
State
Country
N I KON D4S

Highlights

Event ID

FOCAL LENGTH
LENS
AF / VR
FLASH TYPE
SYNC MODE
,

N I KON D4S

: , 1/ 125
: , 100
: 0. 0
: 50mm
: 50
:S
:
:
:

, F5. 6
LAT I TUDE
LONGI TUDE

/ 1. 4

ALT I TUDE
T I ME (UTC)

100-1

Shooting data

N I KON D4S

:N
: 35º 35. 971'
:E
: 13 9º 43. 696'
: 35m
: 15/10/2013
: 10 : 02 : 27

100-1

Location data

❚❚ File Information
1 23 4

7
1/ 12

15
14
13

100NCD4S DSC_0001. JPG
15/ 10/ 2013 10: 02: 27

NOR
ORMAL
AL
4928x3280

10 9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Voice memo icon ...................................261
Protect status..........................................255
Retouch indicator..................................375
IPTC preset indicator....................242, 368
Focus point 1, 2 ........................................103
AF area brackets 1 ....................................38
Frame number/total number of frames
Image quality ...........................................90
Image size .................................................94
Image area ................................................85
Time of recording...........................30, 363
Date of recording ...........................30, 363
Current card slot ......................................34
Folder name ...........................................302
File name.................................................304

1 Displayed only if Focus point is selected for Playback display options (0 291).
2 If photograph was taken using AF-S, display shows point where focus first locked. If
photograph was taken using AF-C, focus point is only displayed if option other than
auto-area AF was selected for AF-area mode and camera was able to focus.

245

❚❚ Highlights
1

2
100-1

RGB Highlights

1 Image highlights *
2 Folder number–frame number......... 302
3 Current channel *

Select R, G, B

3
* Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be
overexposed) for current channel. Hold W button
and press 4 or 2 to cycle through channels as follows:

W button
RGB
(all channels)

246

R
(red)

G
(green)

B
(blue)

❚❚ RGB Histogram
5

2
3
4

100-1

7
8

RGB

1 Image highlights *
2 Folder number–frame number..........302
3 White balance ........................................155
Color temperature............................161
White balance fine-tuning.............158
Preset manual ...................................164
4 Current channel *
5 Histogram (RGB channel). In all
histograms, horizontal axis gives pixel
brightness, vertical axis number of
pixels.
6 Histogram (red channel)
7 Histogram (green channel)
8 Histogram (blue channel)

* Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be
overexposed) for current channel. Hold W button
and press 4 or 2 to cycle through channels as follows:

W button
RGB
(all channels)

R
G
(red)
(green)
Highlight display off

B
(blue)

247

Playback Zoom
To zoom in on the photograph when the
histogram is displayed, press X. Use the X and
W buttons to zoom in and out and scroll the
image with the multi selector. The histogram will
be updated to show only the data for the portion
of the image visible in the monitor.

Histograms
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from
those displayed in imaging applications. Some sample histograms are
shown below:
If the image contains objects with
a wide range of brightnesses, the
distribution of tones will be
relatively even.
If the image is dark, tone
distribution will be shifted to the
left.
If the image is bright, tone
distribution will be shifted to the
right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to
the right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the
distribution to the left. Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall
exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see
photographs in the monitor.

248

❚❚ Shooting Data
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

MTR, SPD, AP.
EXP. MODE, I SO
FOCAL LENGTH
LENS
AF / VR
FLASH TYPE
SYNC MODE
,

: , 1/ 8000 , F2. 8
: , Hi 0. 3
: + 1. 3, +5 / 6
: 50mm
: 50
/ 1. 4
:C
: O p tional
: SLOW
: TTL-BL, +1. 0

N I KON D4S

100-1

11
12

1 Metering ................................................. 123
Shutter speed .............................. 128, 130
Aperture......................................... 129, 130
2 Exposure mode ..................................... 125
ISO sensitivity 1 ...................................... 117

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

WHI TE BALANCE : AUTO1,
0 , 0
: sRGB
COLOR SPACE
PI CTURE CTRL : STANDARD
QUICK ADJUST : 0
SHARPENING : 3
:0
CONTRAST
BRI GHTNESS : 0
:0
SATURATION
:0
HUE
N I KON D4S

100-1

3 Exposure compensation......................138
Optimal exposure tuning 2..................323
4 Focal length...................................235, 406
5 Lens data .................................................235
6 Focus mode ....................................... 52, 97
Lens VR (vibration reduction) 3
7 Flash type 4
Commander mode 4
8 Flash mode 4 ...........................................203
9 Flash control 4 .........................................332
Flash compensation 4 ...........................206
10 Camera name
11 Image area ................................................85
12 Folder number–frame number..........302
13 White balance ........................................155
Color temperature............................161
White balance fine-tuning.............158
Preset manual ...................................164
14 Color space .............................................305
15 Picture Control .......................................177
16 Quick adjust 5 .........................................180
Original Picture Control 6 .....................177
17 Sharpening .............................................180
18 Contrast ...................................................180
19 Brightness ...............................................180
20 Saturation 7 .............................................180
Filter effects 8 ..........................................180
21 Hue 7 .........................................................180
Toning 8 ....................................................180

249

22
23
24
25
26
27

NOISE REDUC.
ACT. D-LIGHT.
HDR
VIGNETTE CTRL
RETOUCH

: HI ISO/LONG EXP.

COMMENT

: SPRING HAS COME.

: NORMAL
: AUTO, NORMAL
: NORMAL
: WARM FILTER

N I KON D4S

28
29

100-1

ARTI ST

: NIKON TARO

COPYRI GHT

: NI KON

N I KON D4S

22 High ISO noise reduction.................... 308
Long exposure noise reduction ........ 308
23 Active D-Lighting ................................. 188
24 HDR exposure differential .................. 192
HDR smoothing .................................... 192
25 Vignette control.................................... 306
26 Retouch history..................................... 375
27 Image comment ................................... 366
28 Name of photographer 9..................... 367
29 Copyright holder 9 ................................ 367

100-1

1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
2 Displayed if Custom Setting b7 (Fine-tune optimal exposure, 0 323) has been set to
a value other than zero for any metering method.
3 Displayed only if VR lens is attached.
4 Displayed only if optional flash unit (0 195) is used.
5 Standard, Vivid, Portrait, and Landscape Picture Controls only.
6 Neutral, Monochrome, and custom Picture Controls.
7 Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls.
8 Monochrome Picture Controls only.
9 The fourth page of the shooting data is only displayed if copyright information was
recorded with the photograph as described on page 367.

250

❚❚ Location Data 1 (0 238)
1
2
3
4
5

LAT I TUDE
LONGI TUDE
ALT I TUDE
T I ME (UTC)

1
2
3
4
5

:N
: 35º 35. 971'
:E
: 13 9º 43. 696'
: 35m
: 15/10/2013
: 10 : 02 : 27

N I KON D4S

Latitude
Longitude
Altitude
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
Heading 2

100-1

1 Data for movies are for start of recording.
2 Displayed only if GPS device is equipped with electronic compass.

❚❚ IPTC Preset (0 368)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8
9
10
11
12
13
14

IPTC
Caption

Event ID

Headline
Object Name
City
State
Country

:
:
:
:
:

N I KON D4S

IPTC
Category
Supp. Cat
Byline
Byline title
Writer/Editor
Credit
Source

N I KON D4S

100-1

:
:
:
:
:
:

100-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Caption
Event ID
Headline
Object name
City
State
Country

Category
Supplemental Categories (Supp. Cat.)
Byline
Byline title
Writer/editor
Credit
Source

251

❚❚ Overview Data
1 2 34 5
1/ 12

1/ 8000 F2. 8
Hi 0. 3
+ 1. 0
–1. 3
SLOW

NIKON D4S

50mm

, 0

100NCD4S DSC_0001. JPG
15/ 10/ 2013 10: 15: 00

6
7
8
9

N OR
ORMAL
AL
4928x3280

18 19 20 21 22
30
29

–1. 3

1/ 8000 F2. 8
Hi 0. 3
+ 1. 0
SLOW

50mm

23
24

, 0

27 26

16 15 14 13 12 11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Frame number/total number of frames
Image comment indicator..................366
Voice memo icon ..................................261
Protect status.........................................255
Retouch indicator .................................375
Camera name
IPTC preset indicator ...................242, 368
Location data indicator .......................238
Histogram showing the distribution of
tones in the image (0 248).
Image quality........................................... 90
Image size................................................. 94
Image area................................................ 85
File name.................................................304
Time of recording........................... 30, 363
Folder name ...........................................302
Date of recording ........................... 30, 363
Current card slot...................................... 34

Metering ................................................. 123
Exposure mode ..................................... 125
Shutter speed ............................... 128, 130
Aperture ........................................ 129, 130
ISO sensitivity 1 ...................................... 117
Focal length .................................. 235, 406
Active D-Lighting ................................. 188
Picture Control ...................................... 177
Color space............................................. 305
Flash mode 2 .......................................... 203
White balance ....................................... 155
Color temperature........................... 161
White balance fine-tuning ............ 158
Preset manual................................... 164
29 Flash compensation 2 .......................... 206
Commander mode 2
30 Exposure compensation ..................... 138
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28

1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
2 Displayed only if photo was taken with optional flash unit (0 195).

252

Taking a Closer Look:
Playback Zoom
Press the X button to zoom in on the image
displayed in full-frame playback or on the image
currently highlighted in thumbnail playback. The
following operations can be performed while
zoom is in effect:

Use

Zoom in
or out

X/W

View
other
areas of
image

Select
faces

X button

Description
Press X to zoom 36×24
(3 : 2) format images in
to maximum of
approximately 30 ×
(large images), 23 ×
(medium images) or
15 × (small images). Press W to zoom out.
While photo is zoomed in, use multi selector
to view areas of image not visible in
monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to
scroll rapidly to other areas of frame.
Navigation window is displayed when zoom
ratio is altered; area currently visible in
monitor is indicated by yellow border.
Faces (up to 35)
detected during zoom
are indicated by white
borders in navigation
window. Rotate subcommand dial to view
other faces.

253

Use

View
other
images
Change
protect
status
Return to
shooting
mode
Display
menus

254

L (Z/Q)
/K
G

Description
Rotate main command dial to view same
location in other photos at current zoom
ratio. Playback zoom is cancelled when a
movie is displayed.
See page 255 for more information.
Press the shutter-release button halfway or
press the K button to exit to shooting
mode.
See page 289 for more information.

Protecting Photographs from
Deletion
In full-frame, zoom, and thumbnail playback, the L (Z/Q)
button can be used to protect photographs from accidental
deletion. Protected files can not be deleted using the O (Q)
button or the Delete option in the playback menu. Note that
protected images will be deleted when the memory card is
formatted (0 35, 359).
To protect a photograph:

Select an image.
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or
highlight it in the thumbnail list.

Press the L (Z/Q)
button.
The photograph will be
marked with a P icon. To
remove protection from
the photograph so that it
L (Z/Q) button
can be deleted, display the
photograph or highlight it in the thumbnail list and then press
the L (Z/Q) button.

255

Voice Memos
Changes to the protect status of images also apply to any voice memos
that may have been recorded with the images. Voice memo overwrite
status can not be set separately.

Removing Protection from All Images
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently
selected in the Playback folder menu, press the L (Z/Q) and O (Q)
buttons together for about two seconds during playback.

256

Deleting Photographs
To delete all photographs in the current folder or the photograph
displayed in full-frame playback or highlighted in the thumbnail
list, press the O (Q) button. To delete multiple selected
photographs, use the Delete option in the playback menu. Once
deleted, photographs can not be recovered. Note that pictures
that are protected or hidden can not be deleted.

Full-Frame and Thumbnail Playback
Press the O (Q) button to delete the current photograph.

Select an image.
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list.

Press the O (Q) button. O (Q) button
The menu shown at right
will be displayed; highlight
Selected image (to delete
all pictures in the folder
currently selected for
playback—0 290— press
3 and choose a slot).

257

Delete the photograph(s).
To delete the photograph or photographs, press the O (Q)
button (Selected image) or J button (All images). To exit
without deleting the photograph or photographs, press the
K button.

See Also
The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether the
next image or the previous image is displayed after an image is deleted
(0 296).

258

Voice Memos
If a voice memo has been recorded with the
selected image, the confirmation dialog shown
at right will be displayed when Selected image
is chosen in Step 2 on the previous page. This
dialog is not displayed when All images is
selected.
• Image/sound: Select this option and press the O (Q) button to
delete both photo and voice memo.
• Sound only: Select this option and press the O (Q) button to delete
only the voice memo.
To exit without deleting either voice memo or photo, press K.

The Playback Menu
Select Delete in the playback menu to delete pictures and their
associated voice memos. Note that depending on the number of
images, some time may be required for deletion.
Option
Description
Q Selected Delete selected pictures.
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for
R All
playback (0 290). If two cards are inserted, you can
select the card from which pictures will be deleted.

❚❚ Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs

Choose Selected for the G button
Delete option in the
playback menu.
Press the G button and
select Delete in the
playback menu. Highlight
Selected and press 2.

Highlight a picture.
Use the multi selector to
highlight a picture (to view
the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the
X button; to view images
X button
in other locations, press W
and select the desired card
and folder as described on
page 242).

259

Select the highlighted
picture.
Press the center of the multi
selector to select the
highlighted picture. Selected
pictures are marked by a O icon.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select additional pictures; to deselect a
picture, highlight it and press the center of the multi selector.

Press J to complete the
operation.
A confirmation dialog will
be displayed; highlight Yes
and press J.
J button

260

eVoice Memos
Recording Voice Memos
Voice memos up to sixty seconds long can be added to
photographs using the built-in or optional ME-1 stereo
microphones.

Readying the Camera for Recording
Before recording voice memos, adjust settings using the Voice
memo options item in the setup menu.

❚❚ Voice Memo
This option controls whether voice memos
are recorded automatically or manually. The
following options are available:

Option
7 Off

On
8 (Auto and
manual)

Manual
only

Description
Voice memos can not be recorded in shooting mode.
Selecting this option displays
menu shown at right; select
maximum recording time from
5, 10, 20, 30, 45, or 60 s. Unless
On is selected for Image
review in playback menu
(0 295), recording will begin
when shutter-release button is released after
shooting. Recording ends when H button is pressed
or after specified recording time has ended.
Memo can be recorded for most recent photograph
by pressing and holding H button (0 263).

261

❚❚ Voice Memo Overwrite
This option controls whether the voice memo
for the most recent photograph can be
overwritten in shooting mode. The following
options are available:
Option

Description
Voice memo can not be recorded in
Disable shooting mode if one already exists for
most recent image.
Voice memo can be recorded in
shooting mode even if one already
Enable exists for most recent image (0 263).
Existing memo will be deleted and
replaced by new memo.

❚❚ Voice Memo Button
This option controls manual recording. The
following options are available:
Option

Description
Voice memo is recorded while H
Press and
!
button is held down. Recording
hold
will end automatically after 60 s.
Recording begins when H
Press to button is pressed and ends
$ start/
when H button is pressed again.
Recording will end
stop
automatically after 60 s.

Voice Memo
The option selected for Voice memo is indicated by an icon in the rear
control panel.

On (auto and manual)

262

Manual only

Automatic Recording (Shooting Mode)
If On (Auto and manual) is selected for Voice memo (0 261),
a voice memo will be added to the most recent photograph when
shooting ends. Recording will end when the H button is pressed
or after the specified recording time has ended.

Manual Recording (Shooting Mode)
If On (Auto and manual) or Manual only is
selected for Voice memo (0 261), a voice
memo can be recorded for the most recent
photograph by pressing and holding the H
button. A voice memo will be recorded while
the button is held down (note that no voice
memo will be recorded if the H button is not
held down for at least one second).

H button

Automatic Recording
Voice memos will not be recorded automatically during live view
(0 49), movie recording (0 63), or time-lapse photography (0 229), or
when On is selected for the Image review option (0 295) in the
playback menu. A voice memo can however be added to the
photograph displayed during image review even if Off is selected for
Voice memo.

Secondary slot function
If two memory cards are inserted and Backup or RAW primary - JPEG
secondary is selected for the Secondary slot function option (0 96) in
the shooting menu, voice memos will be associated with the images
recorded to the memory card in the primary slot.

263

Playback Mode
To add a voice memo to the photograph currently displayed in
full-frame playback or highlighted in the thumbnail list (0 241):

Choose a photograph.
Display or highlight the photograph.
Only one voice memo can be recorded
per image; additional voice memos can
not be recorded for images already
marked with a h icon.

Press and hold the H button.
A voice memo will be recorded while the
H button is held down (note that no voice
memo will be recorded if the H button is
not held down for at least one second).
H button

During Recording
During recording, the C icon in the rear control
panel will flash. A countdown timer in the rear
control panel shows the length of the voice
memo that can be recorded (in seconds).

264

In playback mode, a C icon is displayed in the
monitor during recording.

Rear control panel

Interrupting Recording
Pressing the shutter-release button or operating other camera controls
may end recording. During interval timer photography, recording ends
automatically about two seconds before the next photograph is taken.
Recording also ends automatically when the camera is turned off.

After Recording
If a voice memo has been recorded for the
most recent photograph, a C icon will be
displayed in the rear control panel.

Rear control panel

If a voice memo exists for the photograph
currently selected in playback mode, a h icon
will be displayed in the monitor.

Voice Memo File Names
Voice memos are stored as WAV files with names of the form
“xxxxnnnn.WAV,” where “xxxxnnnn” is a file name copied from the image
with which the voice memo is associated. For example, the voice memo
for the image “DSC_0002.JPG” would have the file name
“DSC_0002.WAV.” Voice memo file names can be viewed on a computer.

265

Playing Voice Memos
Voice memos can be played back over the
camera’s built-in speaker when the associated
image is viewed in full-frame playback or
highlighted in the thumbnail list (0 241). The
presence of a voice memo is indicated by an
h icon.

Press

Start/end playback

Delete voice memo

Description
Press H to start playback. Playback will end
when H button is pressed again or entire
memo has been played back.
See page 258.

Interrupting Playback
Pressing the shutter-release button or operating other camera controls
may end playback. Playback ends automatically when another image is
selected or the camera is turned off.

266

Voice Memo Playback Options
The Voice memo options > Audio output
item in the setup menu controls whether
voice memos are played back by the camera
(from either the built-in speaker or optional
headphones) or by a device to which the
camera is connected via an HDMI cable.
When sound is played back by the camera,
the Audio output option also controls
playback volume.
Option

Description
Voice memos are played
back over built-in speaker or
(if connected) over optional
headphones. Selecting this
Speaker/
%
option displays menu shown
headphones
at right. Press 1 or 3 to
change volume. Beep will
sound when option is selected. Press J to make
selection and return to setup menu.
& HDMI
Audio signal output to HDMI terminal.
Voice memos are not played back. b icon is
( Off
displayed when photo for which voice memo exists
is viewed in monitor.

267

268

QConnections
Installing ViewNX 2
Install the supplied
ViewNX 2TM
software to display and
edit photographs and
movies that have been
copied to your computer.
Before installing
Your Imaging Toolbox
ViewNX 2, confirm that
your computer meets the
system requirements on page 271. Be sure to use the latest
version of ViewNX 2, which is available for download from the
websites listed on page xx, as earlier versions that do not support
the D4S may fail to transfer NEF (RAW) images correctly.

Launch the
installer.

q Select region (if required)

Start the computer,
w Select
language
insert the installer
CD, and launch the
installer. A language
e Click
Next
selection dialog will
be displayed. If the
desired language is not available, click Region Selection to
choose a different region (region selection is not available in
the European release).

269

Start the installer.
Click Install and follow the onscreen instructions.

Click Install

Q
270

Exit the installer.
Windows

Mac

Click Yes

Click OK

Remove the installer CD from the CD-ROM drive.

Viewing the Nikon Website
To visit the Nikon website after installing ViewNX 2, select All
Programs > Link to Nikon from the Windows start menu (Internet
connection required).

System Requirements

Windows
Mac
• Photos: Intel Celeron,
• Photos: Intel Core or Xeon
Pentium 4, or Core series,
series
1.6 GHz or better
• Movies (playback): Core Duo
• Movies (playback): Pentium D
2 GHz or better; Intel Core i5
3.0 GHz or better; Intel Core i5
or better recommended when
or better recommended when
viewing movies with a frame
CPU
viewing movies with a frame
size of 1280 × 720 or more at a
size of 1280 × 720 or more at a
frame rate of 30 fps or above
frame rate of 30 fps or above
or movies with a frame size of
or movies with a frame size of
1920 × 1080 or more
1920 × 1080 or more
• Movies (editing): Intel Core i5 or
• Movies (editing): Intel Core i5 or
better
better
Pre-installed versions of
Windows 8.1, Windows 7,
Windows Vista, and
OS
OS X 10.9, 10.8, or 10.7
Windows XP; note that 64-bit
versions of Windows XP are not
supported
• 32-bit Windows 8.1, Windows 7, or
Windows Vista: 1 GB or more
(2 GB or more recommended)
Memory • 64-bit Windows 8.1, Windows 7, or 2 GB or more (4 GB or more
(RAM)
Windows Vista: 2 GB or more
recommended)
(4 GB or more recommended)
• Windows XP: 512 MB or more
(2 GB or more recommended)
Hard disk A minimum of 1 GB available on the startup disk (3 GB or more
space recommended)
Resolution: 1024 × 768 pixels
Resolution: 1024 × 768 pixels
(XGA) or more (1280 × 1024 pixels or (XGA) or more (1280 × 1024 pixels or
Graphics more recommended)
more recommended)
Color: 24-bit color (True Color) or
Color: 24-bit color (millions of colors)
more
or more
See the websites listed on page xx for the latest information on supported
operating systems.

271

Using ViewNX 2
Copy Pictures to the Computer
Before proceeding, be sure you have installed the software on the
supplied ViewNX 2 CD (0 269).

Connect the USB cable.
After turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory card
is inserted, connect the supplied USB cable as shown and then
turn the camera on.

Use a Reliable Power Source
To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera
battery is fully charged.

Connecting Cables
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting
interface cables. Do not use force or attempt to insert the
connectors at an angle.

During Transfer
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while
transfer is in progress.

Q
272

The USB Cable Clip
To prevent cable from being disconnected, attach the supplied clip
as shown.

USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the
cable via a USB hub or keyboard.

Start Nikon Transfer 2 component of ViewNX 2.
If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program,
select Nikon Transfer 2.

Windows 7
If the following dialog is displayed, select Nikon Transfer 2 as
described below.
1 Under Import pictures and
videos, click Change
program. A program
selection dialog will be
displayed; select Import file
using Nikon Transfer 2 and
click OK.
2 Double-click Import file.

273

Click Start Transfer.
At default settings, pictures
on the memory card will be
copied to the computer.

Start Transfer

Terminate the connection.
When transfer is complete, turn the camera off and disconnect
the USB cable.

Q
274

View Pictures
Pictures are displayed in ViewNX 2
when transfer is complete.

Starting ViewNX 2 Manually
• Windows: Double-click the
ViewNX 2 shortcut on the
desktop.
• Mac: Click the ViewNX 2 icon in
the Dock.

❚❚ Retouching Photographs
To crop pictures and perform such tasks as
adjusting sharpness and tone levels, click the
Edit button in the ViewNX 2 toolbar.

❚❚ Editing Movies
To perform such tasks as trimming unwanted
footage from movies shot with the camera,
click the Movie Editor button in the
ViewNX 2 toolbar.

❚❚ Printing Pictures
Click the Print button in the ViewNX 2
toolbar. A dialog will be displayed, allowing
you to print pictures on a printer connected
to the computer.

For More Information
Consult online help for more
information on using ViewNX 2.

275

Ethernet and Wireless Networks
The camera can be connected to Ethernet or wireless networks
using the built-in Ethernet port or an optional WT-5 or WT-4
wireless transmitter (0 409). Note that an Ethernet cable
(available separately from commercial sources) is required for an
Ethernet connection.

❚❚ The Built-in Ethernet Port and WT-5 Wireless Transmitter
The following modes are available when the camera is connected
to a network using the built-in Ethernet port or an optional WT-5
wireless transmitter:
Mode
Function
FTP upload Upload existing photos and movies to a computer or ftp
Image transfer server, or upload new photos as they are taken.
Control the camera using optional Camera Control Pro 2
Camera
software and save new photos and movies directly to the
control
computer.
View and take pictures remotely using a browserHTTP server
equipped computer or iPhone.
Synchronized
Synchronize the shutter releases for multiple remote
release (WT-5
cameras with a master camera.
only)

❚❚ WT-4 Wireless Transmitter
The WT-4 can be used in any of the following modes:
Mode

Function
Upload existing photos and movies to a computer or ftp
Transfer mode
server, or upload new photos as they are taken.
Control the camera using optional Camera Control Pro 2
PC mode
software and save new photos and movies directly to the
computer.

Q
276

For more information, see the Network Guide and the
documentation for the wireless transmitter or communication
unit. Be sure to update to the latest versions of the wireless
transmitter or communication unit firmware and supplied
software.

Optional UT-1 Communication Units
In place of the built-in Ethernet port, an optional UT-1 communication
unit (0 409) can be used to connect the camera to a local area network
(LAN). The UT-1 supports the same modes as the WT-4 and can be used
with Ethernet networks or combined with an optional WT-5 wireless
transmitter for connection to wireless networks.

Image Upload
In image transfer, ftp upload, and transfer modes, the picture currently
displayed in full-frame or thumbnail playback can be uploaded to the
computer by holding J and pressing the center of the multi selector.

During Transfer
Movies can not be recorded or played back in image transfer mode
(“image transfer mode” applies when images are being transferred via
an Ethernet or wireless network and when images remain to be sent).
Live view photography is not available during transfer if Silent is
selected for Live view photography in the shooting menu.

Movies
Movies can be uploaded in transfer mode if the camera is connected to
an Ethernet or a wireless network and Auto send or Send folder is not
selected for Network > Options.

277

HTTP Server Mode
The camera can not be used to record or view movies in http server
mode, while live view photography is not available if Silent is selected
for Live view photography in the shooting menu.

Wireless Transmitters
The principal differences between the WT-4 and WT-4A/B/C/D/E and
the WT-5 and WT-5A/B/C/D/E is in the number of channels supported;
unless otherwise stated, all references to the WT-4 also apply to the
WT-4A/B/C/D/E, while all references to the the WT-5 also apply to the
WT-5A/B/C/D/E.

Q
278

Printing Photographs
Selected JPEG images can be printed on a PictBridge printer
(0 461) connected directly to the camera.

Selecting Photographs for Printing
Images created at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB)
(0 90) can not be selected for printing. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)
images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the
retouch menu (0 387).

Printing Via Direct USB Connection
Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an optional AC adapter and
power connector. When taking photographs to be printed via direct
USB connection, set Color space to sRGB (0 305).

See Also
See page 448 for information on what to do if an error occurs during
printing.

279

Connecting the Printer
Connect the camera using the supplied USB cable.

1
2

Turn the camera off.
Connect the USB cable.
Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable. Do not use
force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.

USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the printer; do not connect the
cable via a USB hub.

Turn the camera on.
A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor, followed
by a PictBridge playback display. To print pictures one at a
time, follow the steps below. To print multiple selected
pictures or all pictures, proceed to page 282.

Printing Pictures One at a Time

Display the desired picture.
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures. Press the X button to
zoom in on the current frame (0 253, press K to exit zoom).
To view six pictures at a time, press the center of the multi
selector. Use the multi selector to highlight pictures, or press
the center of the multi selector again to display the
highlighted picture full frame. To view images in other
locations, press W when thumbnails are displayed and select
the desired card and folder as described on page 242.

Q
280

Adjust printing options.
Press J to display the following items, then press 1 or 3 to
highlight an item and press 2 to view options (only options
supported by the current printer are listed; to use the default
option, select Printer default). After selecting an option,
press J to return to the printer settings menu.
Option
Page size

Description
Choose a page size.
This option is listed only when pictures are printed one
No. of copies at a time. Press 1 or 3 to choose number of copies
(maximum 99).
Border
Choose whether to frame photos in white borders.
Choose whether to print the times and dates of
Time stamp
recordings on photos.
This option is listed only when pictures are printed one
at a time. To exit without cropping, highlight No
cropping and press J. To crop the current picture,
highlight Crop and press 2. A crop selection dialog
Cropping
will be displayed; press X to increase the size of the
crop, W to decrease, and use the multi selector to
position the crop. Note that print quality may drop if
small crops are printed at large sizes.

Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To cancel
before all copies have been printed, press J.

281

Printing Multiple Pictures

Display the PictBridge menu.
Press the G button in the PictBridge playback display.

Choose an option.
Highlight one of the following options and press 2.
• Print select: Select pictures for printing. Use the multi
selector to highlight pictures (to view images in other
locations, press W and select the desired card and folder as
described on page 242; to display the current picture full
screen, press and hold the X button) and, keeping the
L (Z/Q) button pressed, press 1 or 3 to choose the
number of prints (maximum 99). To deselect a picture, set
the number of prints to zero.
• Print (DPOF): Print the current DPOF print order (0 283).
The order can be viewed and modified before printing as
described in the description for Print select, above.
• Index print: To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on
the memory card, proceed to Step 3. Note that if the
memory card contains more than 256 pictures, only the first
256 images will be printed. A warning will be displayed if
the page size selected in Step 3 is too small for an index
print.

Adjust printing options.
Adjust printer settings as described in Step 2 on page 281.

Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To cancel
before all copies have been printed, press J.

Q
282

Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set
The DPOF print order option in the playback menu is used to
create digital “print orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers and
devices that support DPOF (0 461).

Choose DPOF print
order > Select/set.

G button

Press the G button and
select DPOF print order in
the playback menu.
Highlight Select/set and
press 2 (to remove all
photographs from the print order, select Deselect all).

Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to highlight
pictures (to view images in other
locations, press W and select the
desired card and folder as described on
page 242; to display the current picture
full screen, press and hold the X button) and, keeping the
L (Z/Q) button pressed, press 1 or 3 to choose the
number of prints (maximum 99). To deselect a picture, set the
number of prints to zero. Press J when all the desired
pictures have been selected.

283

Select imprint options.
Highlight the following options and
press 2 to toggle the highlighted
option on or off.
• Print shooting data: Print shutter
speed and aperture on all pictures in
print order.
• Print date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print
order.

Complete the print order.
Press J to complete the print order.

DPOF Print Orders
To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a
PictBridge printer, select Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and
follow the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to modify and print the
current order (0 282). DPOF print date and shooting data options are
not supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the
date of recording on photographs in the current print order, use the
PictBridge Time stamp option.
The DPOF print order option can not be used if there is not enough
space on the memory card to store the print order.

NEF (RAW) photographs (0 90) can not be selected for printing using
this option. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using the
NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu (0 387).
Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a
computer or other device after the print order is created.

284

Viewing Photographs on TV
The optional High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) cable
(0 410) or a type C HDMI cable (available separately from thirdparty suppliers) can be used to connect the camera to highdefinition video devices.

Turn the camera off.
Always turn the camera off before connecting or
disconnecting an HDMI cable.

Connect the HDMI cable as shown.
Connect to high-definition
device (choose cable with
connector for HDMI
device)

Connect to
camera

3
4

Tune the device to the HDMI channel.
Turn the camera on and press K
button.

K button

During playback, images will be
displayed on the television screen.

285

HDMI Options
The HDMI option in the setup menu (0 358) controls output
resolution and other advanced HDMI options.

❚❚ Output Resolution
Choose the format for images output to the
HDMI device. If Auto is selected, the
camera will automatically select the
appropriate format.

❚❚ Advanced
Option

Description
Auto is recommended in most situations. If the camera
is unable to determine the correct RGB video signal
output range for the HDMI device, you can choose from
the following options:

• Limited range: For devices with an RGB video signal input
range of 16 to 235. Choose this option if you notice
loss of detail in shadows.
• Full range: For devices with an RGB video signal input
range of 0 to 255. Choose this option if shadows are
“washed out” or too bright.
Output display Choose horizontal and vertical frame coverage for HDMI
size
output from 95% or 100%.
If Off is selected when the camera is connected to an
Live view onHDMI device, shooting information will not be displayed
screen display
in the monitor during live view photography.
Choose On to mirror the HDMI display on the camera
monitor, Off to turn the camera monitor off to save
Dual monitor
power. Dual monitor turns on automatically when Live
view on-screen display is Off.
Output range

Q
286

The HDMI Cable Clip
When using the optional Nikon HDMI cable, attach the supplied clip as
shown to prevent accidental disconnection. Do not use cable clips with
non-Nikon cables.

Television Playback
Use of an AC adapter and power connector (available separately) is
recommended for extended playback. If the edges of photographs are
not visible in the television display, select 95% for HDMI > Advanced >
Output display size (0 286).

Video Recorders
To record uncompressed HDMI output, use an AJA Video Systems Ki
Pro-series or Atomos Ninja-series video recorder (available separately
from third-party suppliers).

Voice Memo Options > Audio Output (0 267)
Set HDMI to play back voice memos on the HDMI device.

Slide Shows
The Slide show option in the playback menu can be used for
automated playback (0 297).

Audio
Stereo sound recorded with optional ME-1 (0 413) stereo microphones
plays in stereo when movies are viewed on HDMI devices using a
camera connected via an HDMI cable. Volume can be adjusted using
television controls; the camera controls can not be used.

287

HDMI and Live View
When the camera is connected via an HDMI cable, HDMI displays can be
used for live view photography and movie live view (0 61, 69). Note
that if 1920 × 1080; 60p is selected for the Movie settings > Frame
size/frame rate option in the shooting menu (0 74), the selected
setting will only be reflected in the HDMI output during movie
recording if all the following conditions are met: Auto or 1080p
(progressive) is selected for HDMI > Output resolution, 100% is
selected for HDMI > Advanced > Output display size, and Off is
selected for HDMI > Advanced > Live view on-screen display (0 286).
At other settings, the output resolution, display size, or frame rate may
differ from that selected in the camera menus.

Q
288

UMenu Guide
D The Playback Menu:
Managing Images
To display the playback menu, press G and select the K
(playback menu) tab.
G button

Option
Delete
Playback folder
Hide image
Playback display options
Copy image(s)
Image review
After delete
Rotate tall
Slide show
DPOF print order

0
259
290
290
291
292
295
296
296
297
283

See Also
Menu defaults are listed on page 430.

U
289

Playback Folder

G button ➜ D playback menu

Choose a folder for playback (0 241).
Option
NCD4S
All
Current

Description
Pictures in all folders created with the D4S will be visible
during playback.
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.
Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during
playback.

Hide Image

G button ➜ D playback menu

Hide or reveal selected pictures as described below. Hidden
pictures are visible only in the Hide image menu and can only be
deleted by formatting the memory card.

Protected and Hidden Images
Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the
image.

Choose Select/set.
Highlight Select/set and
press 2 (to skip the remaining
steps and reveal all pictures,
highlight Deselect all and
press J).

U
290

Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to scroll
through the pictures on the
memory card (to view the
highlighted picture full screen,
press and hold the X button; to
view images in other locations, press W and select the
desired card and folder as described on page 242) and press
the center of the multi selector to select the current picture.
Selected pictures are marked by a R icon; to deselect a
picture, highlight it and press the center of the multi selector
again. Continue until all the desired pictures have been
selected.

Press J.
Press J to complete the operation.

J button

Playback Display Options

G button ➜ D playback menu

Choose the information available in the playback photo
information display (0 244). Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option,
then press 2 to select the option for the photo information
display. A L appears next to selected items; to deselect, highlight
an item and press 2. To return to the playback menu, press J.

U
291

Copy Image(s)

G button ➜ D playback menu

Copy pictures from one memory card to another.
Option
Select source
Select image(s)
Select destination
folder
Copy image(s)?

Description
Choose card from which pictures will be copied.
Select pictures to be copied.
Select destination folder on remaining card.
Copy selected pictures to specified destination.

Choose Select source.
Highlight Select source and
press 2.

Select the source card.
Highlight the slot for the card
containing the images to be
copied and press J.

Choose Select image(s).
Highlight Select image(s) and
press 2.

U
292

Select the source folder.
Highlight the folder containing
the images to be copied and
press 2.

Make the initial selection.
Before going on to select or
deselect individual images, you
can mark all or all protected
images in the folder for copying
by choosing Select all images
or Select protected images. To mark only individually
selected images for copying, choose Deselect all before
proceeding.

Select additional images.
Highlight pictures and press the
center of the multi selector to
select or deselect (to view the
highlighted picture full screen,
press and hold the X button).
Selected images are marked with a L. Press J to proceed to
Step 7 when your selection is complete.

Choose Select destination
folder.
Highlight Select destination
folder and press 2.

U
293

Select a destination folder.
To enter a folder number, choose Select
folder by number, enter the number
(0 302), and press J.

To choose from a list of existing folders,
choose Select folder from list, highlight
a folder, and press J.

Copy the images.
Highlight Copy image(s)?
and press J.

J button

A confirmation dialog will
be displayed; highlight Yes and
press J. Press J again to exit
when copying is complete.

U
294

Copying Images
Images will not be copied if there is insufficient space on the destination
card. Be sure the battery is fully charged before copying movies.

If the destination folder contains an image with
the same name as one of the images to be
copied, a confirmation dialog will be displayed.
Select Replace existing image to replace the
image with the image to be copied, or select
Replace all to replace all existing images with
the same names without further prompting. To
continue without replacing the image, select Skip, or select Cancel to
exit without copying any further images. Hidden or protected files in
the destination folder will not be replaced.
Protect status is copied with the images but print marking (0 283) is
not. Voice memos will be copied with their associated images. Hidden
images can not be copied.

Image Review

G button ➜ D playback menu

Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the
monitor immediately after shooting. If Off is selected, pictures can
only be displayed by pressing the K button.

U
295

After Delete

G button ➜ D playback menu

Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted.
Option
Show
S
next
Show
T
previous

Description
Display following picture. If deleted picture was last frame,
previous picture will be displayed.
Display previous picture. If deleted picture was first frame,
following picture will be displayed.
If user was scrolling through pictures in order recorded,
following picture will be displayed as described for Show
Continue
U
next. If user was scrolling through pictures in reverse
as before
order, previous picture will be displayed as described for
Show previous.

Rotate Tall

G button ➜ D playback menu

Choose whether to rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures for
display during playback. Note that because the camera itself is
already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are
not rotated automatically during image review.
Option
On

Off

U
296

Description
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are automatically rotated for
display in the camera monitor. Pictures taken with Off selected for
Auto image rotation (0 364) will be displayed in “wide”
(landscape) orientation.
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are displayed in “wide”
(landscape) orientation.

Slide Show

G button ➜ D playback menu

Create a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder
(0 290). Hidden images (0 290) are not displayed.
Option
Start
Image type
Frame interval
Audio playback

Description
Start slide show.
Choose type of image displayed from Still images and
movies, Still images only, and Movies only.
Choose how long each picture will be displayed.
Display menu of voice memo playback options
(0 298).

To start the slide show, highlight Start and
press J. The following operations can be
performed while the slide show is in
progress:

To
Skip back/skip
ahead
View additional
photo info

Press

Pause/resume

Exit to playback
menu
Exit to playback
mode
Exit to shooting
mode

Description
Press 4 to return to previous frame, 2 to skip
to next frame.
Change or hide photo info (still images only;
0 244).
Pause or resume slide show. Voice memo
playback may continue after J button has
been pressed.

G End slide show and return to playback menu.
K

End slide show and exit to full-frame or
thumbnail playback (0 241).
Press shutter-release button halfway to return
to shooting mode.

U
297

The dialog shown at right is displayed when
the show ends. Select Restart to restart or
Exit to return to the playback menu.

❚❚ Audio Playback
Choose On to play voice memos during slide shows (the sound
recorded with movies always plays regardless of the option
selected). The following options will be displayed:
Option
Frame interval
Length of voice
memo

Description
Playback ends when next frame is displayed, even if
entire memo has not been played.
Next frame is not displayed until entire memo has been
played, even if frame interval is shorter than voice
memo.

Choose Off to disable voice memo playback during slide shows.

U
298

C The Shooting Menu:
Shooting Options
To display the shooting menu, press G and select the
C (shooting menu) tab.
G button

Option
Shooting menu bank
Extended menu banks
Storage folder
File naming
Primary slot selection
Secondary slot function
Image quality
JPEG/TIFF recording
NEF (RAW) recording
Image area
White balance
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control

0
300
301
302
304
96
96
90
304
304
85
155
177
183

Option
Color space
Active D-Lighting
HDR (high dynamic range)
Vignette control
Auto distortion control
Long exposure NR
High ISO NR
ISO sensitivity settings
Multiple exposure
Interval timer shooting
Live view photography
Time-lapse photography
Movie settings

0
305
188
190
306
307
308
308
117
214
221
60
229
74

See Also
Menu defaults are listed on page 430.

U
299

Shooting Menu Bank

G button ➜ C shooting menu

Shooting menu options are stored in one of four banks. With the
exceptions of Extended menu banks, Multiple exposure,
Interval timer shooting, Time-lapse photography, and
modifications to Picture Controls (quick adjust and other manual
adjustments), changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the
others. To store a particular combination of frequently-used settings,
select one of the four banks and set the camera to these settings. The
new settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is
turned off, and will be restored the next time the bank is selected.
Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other
banks, allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination
to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu.
The default names for the four shooting menu banks are A, B, C,
and D. A descriptive caption up to 20 characters long can be
added as described on page 184 by highlighting the menu bank
and pressing 2.

Shooting Menu Bank
The top control panel and information displays
show the current shooting menu bank.

U
300

See Also
Exposure and flash modes, shutter speed, and aperture can be included
in shooting menu banks using the Extended menu banks option in the
shooting menu (0 301). For information on using the controls on the
camera body to select the shooting menu bank, see Custom Setting f3
(Assign Fn button) > Press + command dials (0 341).

❚❚ Restoring Default Settings
To restore default settings,
O (Q) button
highlight a bank in the
Shooting menu bank menu
and press O (Q). A
confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and
press J to restore default
settings for the selected bank. See page 430 for a list of default
settings.

Extended Menu Banks

G button ➜ C shooting menu

Select On to include exposure and flash modes, shutter speed
(modes f and h only), and aperture (modes g and h only) in the
information recorded in each of the four shooting menu banks, to
be recalled whenever the bank is selected. Selecting Off restores
the values in effect before On was selected.

U
301

Storage Folder

G button ➜ C shooting menu

Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored.

❚❚ Select Folder by Number

Choose Select folder by
number.
Highlight Select folder by
number and press 2. The
dialog shown at right will be
displayed, with the current
primary slot (0 96) underlined.

Choose a folder number.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight a digit, press 1 or 3 to change. If a
folder with the selected number already exists, a W, X, or Y
icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number:
• W : Folder is empty.
• X : Folder is partially full.
• Y : Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered
9999. No further pictures can be stored in this folder.

Save changes and exit.
Press J to complete the operation and return to the shooting
menu (to exit without changing the storage folder, press the
G button). If a folder with the specified number does not
already exist, a new folder will be created on the card in the
primary slot. Subsequent photographs will be stored in the
selected folder unless it is already full.

U
302

❚❚ Select Folder from List

Choose Select folder from
list.
Highlight Select folder from
list and press 2.

Highlight a folder.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder.

Select the highlighted folder.
Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the
shooting menu. Subsequent photographs will be stored in
the selected folder.

Folder and File Numbers
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a
picture numbered 9999, the shutter-release will be disabled and no
further photographs can be taken. To continue shooting, create a folder
with a number less than 999, or select an existing folder with a number
less than 999 and less than 999 images.

Startup Time
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card
contains a very large number of files or folders.

U
303

File Naming

G button ➜ C shooting menu

Photographs are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” or, in
the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space (0 305),
“_DSC”, followed by a four-digit number and a three-letter
extension (e.g., “DSC_0001.JPG”). The File naming option is used
to select three letters to replace the “DSC” portion of the file name.
For information on editing file names, see page 184.

Extensions
The following extensions are used: “.NEF” for NEF (RAW) images, “.TIF”
for TIFF (RGB) images, “.JPG” for JPEG images, “.MOV” for movies, and
“.NDF” for dust off reference data. In each pair of photographs recorded
at image-quality settings of NEF (RAW)+JPEG, the NEF and JPEG images
have the same file names but different extensions.

JPEG/TIFF Recording

G button ➜ C shooting menu

Adjust compression (0 92) and size (0 94) settings for
photographs recorded in JPEG and TIFF formats.

NEF (RAW) Recording

G button ➜ C shooting menu

Choose the compression (0 92), bit-depth (0 92), and size (0 95)
of photographs recorded in NEF (RAW) format.

U
304

Color Space

G button ➜ C shooting menu

The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color
reproduction. sRGB is recommended for movies and for generalpurpose printing and display, Adobe RGB, with its broader gamut
of colors, for professional publication and commercial printing.

Adobe RGB
For accurate color reproduction, Adobe RGB images require
applications, displays, and printers that support color management.

Color Space
ViewNX 2 (supplied) and Capture NX 2 (available separately)
automatically select the correct color space when opening
photographs created with this camera. Results can not be guaranteed
with third-party software.

U
305

Vignette Control

G button ➜ C shooting menu

“Vignetting” is a drop in brightness at the edges of a photograph.
Vignette control reduces vignetting for type G, E, and D lenses
(DX and PC lenses excluded). Its effects vary from lens to lens and
are most noticeable at maximum aperture. Choose from High,
Normal, Low, and Off.

Vignette Control
Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, TIFF
and JPEG images may exhibit noise (fog) or variations in peripheral
brightness, while custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls
that have been modified from default settings may not produce the
desired effect. Take test shots and view the results in the monitor.
Vignette control does not apply to movies (0 63), multiple exposures
(0 214), or photographs recorded with a DX lens or DX (24 × 16) 1.5 ×
(DX format) selected for image area (0 86).

U
306

Auto Distortion Control

G button ➜ C shooting menu

Select On to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with wideangle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion when shooting
with long lenses (note that the edges of the area visible in the
viewfinder may be cropped out of the final photograph, and that
the time needed to process photographs before recording begins
may increase). This option does not apply to movies and is
available only with type G, E, and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and certain
other lenses excluded); results are not guaranteed with other
lenses. Before using auto distortion control with DX lenses, select
On for Auto DX crop or choose an image area of DX (24×16) 1.5×
(0 86); selecting other options may result in heavily cropped
photographs or in photographs with severe peripheral distortion.

Retouch: Distortion Control
For information on creating copies of existing photographs with
reduced barrel and pin-cushion distortion, see page 392.

U
307

Long Exposure NR
(Long Exposure Noise Reduction)

G button ➜ C shooting menu

If On is selected, photographs taken at
shutter speeds slower than 1 s will be
processed to reduce noise (bright spots,
randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog). The
time required for processing roughly doubles;
during processing, “l m” will flash in the
shutter speed/aperture displays and pictures
can not be taken (if the camera is turned off before processing is
complete, the picture will be saved but noise reduction will not be
performed). In continuous release mode, frame rates will slow and
while photographs are being processed, the capacity of the
memory buffer will drop.

High ISO NR

G button ➜ C shooting menu

Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to
reduce noise.
Option
High

Description
Reduce noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, lines, or fog),
particularly in photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities.
Normal
Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from High,
Low
Normal, and Low.
Noise reduction is performed only at ISO sensitivities of 6400
Off
and higher. The amount of noise reduction is less than the
amount performed when Low is selected for High ISO NR.

U
308

A Custom Settings:
Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
To display the Custom Settings menu, press G and select the
A (Custom Settings menu) tab.
G button

Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit
individual preferences.
Custom Setting groups
Main menu

Custom settings
bank (0 311)

U
309

The following Custom Settings are available:

U
310

a
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
a8
a9
a10
a11
a12
b
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
c
c1
c2
c3
c4
d
d1
d2
d3
d4
d5
d6
d7
d8
d9
d10

Custom Setting
Custom settings bank
Autofocus
AF-C priority selection
AF-S priority selection
Focus tracking with lock-on
AF activation
Focus point illumination
Focus point wrap-around
Number of focus points
Assign AF-ON button
Assign AF-ON button (vert.)
Store by orientation
Limit AF-area mode selection
Autofocus mode restrictions
Metering/exposure
ISO sensitivity step value
EV steps for exposure cntrl
Exp./flash comp. step value
Easy exposure compensation
Matrix metering
Center-weighted area
Fine-tune optimal exposure
Timers/AE lock
Shutter-release button AE-L
Standby timer
Self-timer
Monitor off delay
Shooting/display
Beep
Continuous shooting speed
Max. continuous release
Exposure delay mode
File number sequence
Viewfinder grid display
Control panel/viewfinder
Screen tips
Information display
LCD illumination

0
311
313
314
314
315
315
316
316
317
318
319
320
320
321
321
321
322
323
323
323
324
324
325
325
326
326
327
327
328
329
329
329
330
330

e
e1
e2
e3
e4
e5
e6
e7
e8
f
f1
f2
f3
f4
f5
f6
f7
f8
f9
f10
f11
f12
f13
f14
f15
f16
f17
f18
f19
g
g1
g2
g3
g4

Custom Setting
Bracketing/flash
Flash sync speed
Flash shutter speed
Optional flash
Exposure comp. for flash
Modeling flash
Auto bracketing set
Auto bracketing (mode M)
Bracketing order
Controls
Multi selector center button
Multi selector
Assign Fn button
Assign preview button
Assign sub-selector
Assign sub-selector center
Assign Fn button (vert.)
Shutter spd & aperture lock
Assign BKT button
Customize command dials
Release button to use dial
Slot empty release lock
Reverse indicators
Assign multi selector (vert.)
Playback zoom
Assign movie record button
Live view button options
Assign remote (WR) Fn
button
Lens focus function buttons
Movie
Assign Fn button
Assign preview button
Assign sub-selector center
Assign shutter button

0
331
332
332
333
333
333
334
334
335
336
337
342
342
342
343
343
344
345
347
347
347
348
348
349
349
350
351
353
355
356
357

Custom Settings Bank

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks. Changes to
settings in one bank have no effect on the others. To store a
particular combination of frequently-used settings, select one of
the four banks and set the camera to these settings. The new
settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned
off, and will be restored the next time the bank is selected.
Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other
banks, allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination
to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu.
The default names for the four Custom Settings banks are A, B, C,
and D. A descriptive caption up to 20 characters long can be added
as described on page 184 by highlighting the menu bank and
pressing 2.

❚❚ Restoring Default Settings
To restore default settings,
O (Q) button
highlight a bank in the Custom
settings bank menu and press
O (Q). A confirmation dialog
will be displayed; highlight Yes
and press J to restore default
settings for the selected bank
(0 433).

U
311

Custom Settings Bank
The top control panel and information displays
show the current Custom Settings bank.

See Also
Menu defaults are listed on page 433. If settings in the current bank
have been modified from default values, an asterisk will be displayed
adjacent to the altered settings in the second level of the Custom
Settings menu.

U
312

a: Autofocus
a1: AF-C Priority Selection

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

When AF-C is selected for viewfinder photography (0 97), this
option controls whether photographs can be taken whenever the
shutter-release button is pressed (release priority) or only when the
camera is in focus (focus priority).
Option
G Release

Focus +
release

Release +
focus

F Focus

Description
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed.
Photos can be taken even when the camera is not in
focus. If the subject is dark or low contrast and the
camera is in continuous mode, priority will be given to
focus for the first shot in each series and to frame rate
for the remaining shots, ensuring a high frame rate if the
distance to the subject does not change during
shooting.
Photos can be taken even when the camera is not in
focus. In continuous mode, frame rate slows for
improved focus if the subject is dark or low contrast.
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator
(I) is displayed.

Regardless of the option selected, focus will not lock when AF-C is
selected for autofocus mode. The camera will continue to adjust
focus until the shutter is released.

U
313

a2: AF-S Priority Selection

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

When AF-S is selected for viewfinder photography (0 97), this
option controls whether photographs can be taken only when the
camera is in focus (focus priority) or whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed (release priority).
Option
G Release
F Focus

Description
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed.
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator
(I) is displayed.

Regardless of the option selected, if the in-focus indicator (I) is
displayed when AF-S is selected for autofocus mode, focus will lock
while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Focus lock
continues until the shutter is released.

a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

This option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden large
changes in the distance to the subject when AF-C is selected during
viewfinder photography (0 97).
Option

U
314

Description
When
the
distance
to
the
subject changes abruptly, the
C 5 (Long)
camera waits for the specified period before adjusting
( 4
the distance to the subject. This prevents the camera
from refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by
D 3 (Normal)
objects passing through the frame. Note that 2,
1 (Short), and Off are equivalent to 3 (Normal) when
) 2
3D-tracking or auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode
E 1 (Short) (0 100).
The camera immediately adjusts focus when the
distance to the subject changes. Use when
Off
photographing a series of subjects at varying distances
in quick succession.

a4: AF Activation

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

If Shutter/AF-ON is selected, both the
shutter-release button and the B button
can be used to initiate autofocus. Select AFON only to prevent the camera focusing
when the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway.

a5: Focus Point Illumination

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose from the following focus point display options.
Option
Manual focus
mode
Continuous
mode
Focus point
brightness
Dynamic-area
AF display

Group-area AF
illumination

Description
Choose On to display the active focus point in manual focus
mode, Off to display the focus point only during focus point
selection.
Choose On to display the active focus point in CH
(continuous high-speed) and CL (continuous low-speed)
modes.
Choose the brightness of the focus point display in the
viewfinder from Extra high, High, Normal, and Low.
Choose On to display both the selected focus point and the
surrounding focus points in dynamic-area AF mode
(0 100). When 3D-tracking is used, a dot will be displayed
in the center of the focus point (n).
Choose how the active
Option
Focus point display
focus points are
displayed in group-area
g
AF (0 101).

U
315

a6: Focus Point Wrap-Around

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one
edge of the viewfinder to another.
Option

Wrap

No wrap

Description
Focus-point selection “wraps
around” from top to bottom, bottom w
q
to top, right to left, and left to right,
so that, for example, pressing 2
when a focus point at the right edge of the viewfinder
display is highlighted (q) selects the corresponding focus
point at the left edge of the display (w).
The focus-point display is bounded by the outermost focus
points so that, for example, pressing 2 when a focus point
at the right edge of the display is selected has no effect.

a7: Number of Focus Points

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the number of focus points available for manual focuspoint selection.
Option

U
316

Description

B 51 points

Choose from the 51 focus points shown at
right.

A 11 points

Choose from the 11 focus points shown at
right. Use for quick focus-point selection.

a8: Assign AF-ON Button

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the function performed when the
B button is pressed.

Option
A AF-ON
B
C
D

E
F

Description
Pressing the B button initiates autofocus.
Focus and exposure lock while the B button is
AE/AF lock
pressed.
AE lock only Exposure locks while the B button is pressed.
Exposure locks when the B button is pressed, and
AE lock (Reset remains locked until the button is pressed a second
on release)
time, the shutter is released, or the standby timer
expires.
Exposure locks when the B button is pressed, and
AE lock (Hold) remains locked until the button is pressed a second
time or the standby timer expires.
AF lock only Focus locks while the B button is pressed.
No operation is performed when the B button is
None
pressed.

U
317

a9: Assign AF-ON Button (Vert.)

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the function assigned to the B
button for vertical shooting.

Option
Same as AF-ON
G
button
A AF-ON
B AE/AF lock
C AE lock only

AE lock (Reset on
release)

E AE lock (Hold)

F AF lock only
None

U
318

Description
Both B buttons perform the function selected
for Custom Setting a8.
Pressing the vertical B button initiates
autofocus.
Focus and exposure lock while the vertical B
button is pressed.
Exposure locks while the vertical B button is
pressed.
Exposure locks when the vertical B button is
pressed, and remains locked until the button is
pressed a second time, the shutter is released, or
the standby timer expires.
Exposure locks when the vertical B button is
pressed, and remains locked until the button is
pressed a second time or the standby timer
expires.
Focus locks while the vertical B button is
pressed.
No operation is performed when the vertical B
button is pressed.

a10: Store by Orientation

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose whether separate focus points can be selected for “wide”
(landscape) orientation, for “tall” (portrait) orientation with the
camera rotated 90° clockwise, and for “tall” orientation with the
camera rotated 90° counterclockwise.
Select Off to use the same focus point and AF-area mode
regardless of camera orientation.

Camera rotated
90°counterclockwise

Landscape (wide)
orientation

Camera rotated
90°clockwise

Choose Focus point to enable separate focus-point selection, or
Focus point and AF-area mode to enable separate selection of
both the focus point and the AF-area mode.

Camera rotated
90°counterclockwise

Landscape (wide)
orientation

Camera rotated
90°clockwise

U
319

a11: Limit AF-Area Mode
Selection

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the AF-area modes that can be
selected using the AF-mode button and subcommand dial in viewfinder photography
(live view is unaffected; 0 100). Highlight the
desired modes and press 2 to select or
deselect. Press J to save changes when
settings are complete.

a12: Autofocus Mode
Restrictions

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the autofocus modes available in
viewfinder photography (0 97). If only one
mode is selected, the autofocus mode can not
be chosen using the AF-mode button and
main command dial.

U
320

b: Metering/Exposure
b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Select the increments used when making
adjustments to ISO sensitivity (0 117). If
possible, the current ISO sensitivity setting is
maintained when the step value is changed.
If the current ISO sensitivity setting is not
available at the new step value, ISO sensitivity
will be rounded to the nearest available setting.

b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Select the increments used when making
adjustments to shutter speed, aperture, and
bracketing.

b3: Exp./Flash Comp. Step Value

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Select the increments used when making
adjustments to exposure and flash
compensation.

U
321

b4: Easy Exposure Compensation

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

This option controls whether the E button is needed to set
exposure compensation (0 138). If On (Auto reset) or On is
selected, the 0 at the center of the exposure display will flash even
when exposure compensation is set to ±0.
Option

Description
Exposure compensation is set by rotating one of the
command dials (see note below). The setting selected
On (Auto reset) using the command dial is reset when the camera turns off
or the standby timer expires (exposure compensation
settings selected using the E button are not reset).
As above, except that the exposure compensation value
On
selected using the command dial is not reset when the
camera turns off or the standby timer expires.
Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E button
Off
and rotating the main command dial.

Change Main/Sub
The dial used to set exposure compensation when On (Auto reset) or
On is selected for Custom Setting b4 (Easy exposure compensation)
depends on the option selected for Custom Setting f10 (Customize
command dials) > Change main/sub (0 345).

Exposure
mode

U
322

e
f
g
h

Customize command dials > Change main/sub
Off
On
Sub-command dial
Sub-command dial
Sub-command dial
Main command dial
Main command dial
Sub-command dial
N/A

b5: Matrix Metering

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose U Face detection on to enable face detection when
shooting portraits with matrix metering during viewfinder
photography (0 123).

b6: Center-Weighted Area

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

When calculating exposure, center-weighted
metering assigns the greatest weight to a
circle in the center of the frame. The diameter
(φ ) of this circle can be set to 8, 12, 15, or
20 mm or to the average of the entire frame.
Note that the diameter is fixed at 12 mm when a non-CPU lens is
used, regardless of the setting selected for Non-CPU lens data in
the setup menu (0 235).

b7: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Use this option to fine-tune the exposure
value selected by the camera. Exposure can
be fine-tuned separately for each metering
method by from +1 to –1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV.

Fine-Tuning Exposure
Exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank
and is not affected by two-button resets. Note that as the exposure
compensation (E) icon is not displayed, the only way to determine how
much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the finetuning menu. Exposure compensation (0 138) is preferred in most
situations.

U
323

c: Timers/AE Lock
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

If On is selected, exposure will lock when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway.

c2: Standby Timer

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose how long the camera continues to
meter exposure when no operations are
performed. The shutter-speed and aperture
displays in the top control panel and
viewfinder turn off automatically when the
standby timer expires.
Choose a shorter standby timer delay for longer battery life.

U
324

c3: Self-Timer

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the length of the shutter release delay, the number of shots
taken, and the interval between shots in self-timer mode.
• Self-timer delay: Choose the length of the
shutter-release delay.

• Number of shots: Press 1 and 3 to choose the
number of shots taken each time the
shutter-release button is pressed.

• Interval between shots: Choose the interval
between shots when the Number of shots
is more than 1.

c4: Monitor off Delay

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose how long the monitor remains on
when no operations are performed during
playback (Playback; defaults to 10 s) and
image review (Image review; defaults to 4 s),
when menus (Menus; defaults to 1 minute) or
information (Information display; defaults to
10 s) are displayed, or during live view and movie recording (Live
view; defaults to 10 minutes). Choose a shorter monitor-off delay
for longer battery life.

U
325

d: Shooting/Display
d1: Beep

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the pitch and volume of the beep that sounds when the
camera focuses using single-servo AF (AF-S; 0 97), when focus
locks during live view photography, or while the release timer is
counting down in self-timer mode (0 114), or when time-lapse
photography ends (0 229). Note that regardless of the option
selected, a beep will not sound in movie live view (0 63), or quietshutter release mode (mode J; 0 111), or if Silent is selected
during live view photography.
• Volume: Choose 3 (high), 2 (medium), 1 (low)
or Off (mute). When an option other than
Off is selected, c appears in the top control
panel and information display.
• Pitch: Choose High or Low.

d2: Continuous Shooting Speed

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the maximum frame advance rate for CH (continuous highspeed) and CL (continuous low-speed) modes. For more
information on frame rate, see page 112.
Option
Continuous
high-speed
Continuous
low-speed

U
326

Description
Choose the frame advance rate for CH (continuous highspeed) mode from 10 and 11 fps.
Choose the frame advance rate for CL (continuous lowspeed) mode from values between 1 and 10 fps.

d3: Max. Continuous Release

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst
in continuous mode can be set to any value between 1 and 200.

The Memory Buffer
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d3, shooting will
slow when the memory buffer fills (tAA). See page 464 for more
information on the capacity of the memory buffer.

d4: Exposure Delay Mode

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

In situations where the slightest camera
movement can blur pictures, select 1 s, 2 s, or
3 s to delay shutter release until one, two, or
three seconds after the mirror is raised.
Exposure delay is not available when Silent is
selected for Live view photography in the
shooting menu (0 60).

U
327

d5: File Number Sequence

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

When a photograph is taken, the camera
names the file by adding one to the last file
number used. This option controls whether
file numbering continues from the last
number used when a new folder is created,
the memory card is formatted, or a new
memory card is inserted in the camera.
Option

Off

Reset

Description
When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted,
or a new memory card inserted in the camera, file
numbering continues from the last number used or from
the largest file number in the current folder, whichever is
higher. If a photograph is taken when the current folder
contains a photograph numbered 9999, a new folder will be
created automatically and file numbering will begin again
from 0001.
File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is
created, the memory card is formatted, or a new memory
card is inserted in the camera. Note that a new folder is
created automatically if a photograph is taken when the
current folder contains 999 photographs.
As for On, except that the next photograph taken is
assigned a file number by adding one to the largest file
number in the current folder. If the folder is empty, file
numbering is reset to 0001.

File Number Sequence
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999
photographs or a photograph numbered 9999, the shutter-release
button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken.
Choose Reset for Custom Setting d5 (File number sequence) and then
either format the current memory card or insert a new memory card.

U
328

d6: Viewfinder Grid Display

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose On to display on-demand grid lines in the viewfinder for
reference when composing photographs (0 10).

d7: Control Panel/Viewfinder

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the information displayed in the viewfinder and rear
control panel.
Option
Rear control
panel

Viewfinder
display

Description
Choose from ISO sensitivity (9) and Exposures
remaining (k). If Exposures remaining is selected, ISO
sensitivity will only be displayed while the S button is
pressed.
Choose from Frame count (l) and Exposures
remaining (k). Note that regardless of the option
selected, memory buffer capacity will be shown while
the shutter-release button is pressed.

d8: Screen Tips

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose On to display tool tips for items selected in the information
display (0 15).

U
329

d9: Information Display

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

If Auto (AUTO) is selected, the color of the lettering in the
information display (0 12) will automatically change from black to
white or white to black to maintain contrast with the background.
To always use the same color lettering, select Manual and choose
Dark on light (B; black lettering) or Light on dark (W; white
lettering). Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for
maximum contrast with the selected text color.

Dark on light

d10: LCD Illumination

Light on dark
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

If Off is selected, the control panel and button backlights
(illuminators) will only light while the power switch is rotated
toward D. If On is selected, the backlights will remain on while the
standby timer is active (0 44; note that regardless of the option
selected, the backlights turn off while the shutter-release button is
pressed). Select Off for increased battery life.

Button Backlights
The following controls are equipped with backlights: the D, M, Y, G,
L (Z/Q), X, W, J, R, a, H, U, T, and S buttons and the
release mode dial.

U
330

e: Bracketing/Flash
e1: Flash Sync Speed

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

This option controls flash sync speed.
Option

Description
Auto FP high-speed sync is used when a compatible flash
unit is attached (0 197). If other flash units are used,
1/250 s
shutter speed is set to 1/250 s. When the camera shows a
(Auto FP) shutter speed of 1/250 s in exposure mode e or g, auto FP
high-speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter
speed is faster than 1/250 s.
1/250 s–1/60 s Flash sync speed set to selected value.

Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit
To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter-priority auto or
manual exposure modes, select the next shutter speed after the slowest
possible shutter speed (30 s or %). An X (flash sync indicator) will be
displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel.

Auto FP High-Speed Sync
Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by
the camera, making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for
reduced depth of field even when the subject is backlit in bright
sunlight. The information display flash mode indicator shows “FP”
when auto FP high-speed sync is active (0 201).

U
331

e2: Flash Shutter Speed

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

This option determines the slowest shutter
speed available when using front- or rearcurtain sync or red-eye reduction in
programmed auto or aperture-priority auto
exposure modes (regardless of the setting
chosen, shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s
in shutter-priority auto and manual exposure modes or at flash
settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction
with slow sync). Options range from 1/60 s (1/60 s) to 30 s (30 s).

e3: Optional Flash

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose a flash control mode for optional SB-400 or SB-300 flash
units.
Option

Description
Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to
r TTL
shooting conditions (0 199).
s Manual Choose a flash level. Monitor pre-flashes are not emitted.

Flash Control Mode
The flash control mode is shown in the
information display (0 12, 201).

U
332

e4: Exposure Comp. for Flash

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when exposure
compensation is used.
Option
YE Entire frame
E

Background
only

Description
Both flash level and exposure compensation are
adjusted to modify exposure over the entire frame.
Exposure compensation applies to background only.

e5: Modeling Flash

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

If On is selected when the camera is used with an optional flash
unit that supports the Nikon Creative Lighting system (0 196), a
modeling flash will be emitted when the camera Pv button is
pressed (0 126). No modeling flash is emitted if Off is selected.

e6: Auto Bracketing Set

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing
(0 140) is in effect. Choose AE & flash (j) to perform both
exposure and flash-level bracketing, AE only (k) to bracket only
exposure, Flash only (l) to perform only flash-level bracketing, WB
bracketing (m) to perform white balance bracketing (0 146), or
ADL bracketing (y) to perform bracketing using Active
D-Lighting (0 150). Note that white balance bracketing is not
available at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or
NEF (RAW) + JPEG.

U
333

e7: Auto Bracketing (Mode M)

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

This option determines which settings are affected when AE &
flash or AE only is selected for Custom Setting e6 in manual
exposure mode.
Option

F Flash/speed
Flash/speed/

G aperture

H Flash/aperture
I

Flash only

Description
Camera varies shutter speed (Custom Setting e6
set to AE only) or shutter speed and flash level
(Custom Setting e6 set to AE & flash).
Camera varies shutter speed and aperture (Custom
Setting e6 set to AE only) or shutter speed,
aperture, and flash level (Custom Setting e6 set to
AE & flash).
Camera varies aperture (Custom Setting e6 set to
AE only) or aperture and flash level (Custom
Setting e6 set to AE & flash).
Camera varies flash level only (Custom Setting e6
set to AE & flash).

Flash bracketing is performed only with i-TTL or AA flash control. If
a setting other than Flash only is selected and the flash is not used,
ISO sensitivity will be fixed at the value for the first shot, regardless
of the setting selected for auto ISO sensitivity control (0 119).

e8: Bracketing Order

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

At the default setting of MTR > under > over (H), exposure, flash,
and white balance bracketing are performed in the order
described on pages 143 and 147. If Under > MTR > over (I) is
selected, shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the
highest value. This setting has no effect on ADL bracketing.

U
334

f: Controls
f1: Multi Selector Center Button

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

This option determines the role assigned to the center of the multi
selector during viewfinder photography, playback, and live view
(regardless of the option selected, pressing the center of the multi
selector when a movie is displayed full frame starts movie
playback).

❚❚ Shooting Mode
J

Option
Select center focus point

A Preset focus point

None

Role assigned to center of multi selector
Select the center focus point.
Pressing the center of the multi selector
selects a preset focus point. To choose the
point, select it and press the center of the
multi selector while pressing the AF-mode
button until the focus point flashes.
Separate focus points can be selected for
“wide” (landscape) orientation and for
each of the two “tall” (portrait)
orientations if Focus point or Focus point
and AF-area mode is selected for Custom
Setting a10 (Store by orientation, 0 319).
Pressing the center of the multi selector
has no effect in viewfinder photography.

U
335

❚❚ Playback Mode
Option

Role assigned to center of multi selector

n Thumbnail on/off Toggle between full-frame and thumbnail playback.
In both full-frame and thumbnail playback,

o View histograms a histogram is displayed while the center of the

p Zoom on/off

Choose slot and

u folder

multi selector is pressed.
Toggle between full-frame or thumbnail playback
and playback zoom. Choose the initial zoom setting
from Low magnification (50%), 1 : 1 (100%), and
High magnification (200%). The zoom display will
center on the active focus point (if the picture was
taken in viewfinder photography) or on the center
of the image (if the picture was taken during live
view).
Display the slot and folder selection dialog (0 242).

❚❚ Live View
J

Option
Select center
focus point

p Zoom on/off

None

Role assigned to center of multi selector
Pressing the center of the multi selector in live view
selects the center focus point.
Press the center of the multi selector to toggle zoom
on and off. Choose the initial zoom setting from
Low magnification (50%), 1 : 1 (100%), and High
magnification (200%). The zoom display will
center on the active focus point.
Pressing the center of the multi selector has no
effect in live view.

f2: Multi Selector

U
336

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

If Restart standby timer is selected, operating the multi selector
when the standby timer expires (0 44) will activate the meters and
start the standby timer. If Do nothing is selected, the timer will not
start when the multi selector is pressed.

f3: Assign Fn Button

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the role played by the Fn button,
either by itself (Press) or when used in
combination with the command dials
(Press + command dials).

❚❚ Press
Selecting Press displays the following options:
Option

Description
During viewfinder photography, you can preview
depth of field while the Fn button is pressed (0 126).
During live view photography, you can press the
q Preview
button once to open the lens to maximum aperture,
making it easier to check focus; pressing the button
again restores aperture to its original value (0 54).
Press the Fn button to lock flash value (supported
flash units only, 0 196, 208). Press again to cancel FV
r FV lock
lock.
Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is
B AE/AF lock
pressed.
C AE lock only Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed.
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and
AE lock (Reset remains locked until the button is pressed a second
D on release)
time, the shutter is released, or the standby timer
expires.
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and
E AE lock (Hold) remains locked until the button is pressed a second
time or the standby timer expires.
F AF lock only Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed.

A AF-ON

Pressing the Fn button initiates autofocus.

U
337

Option
IDisable/

h enable

Bracketing

1 burst

4 + NEF (RAW)

Matrix

L metering
Center-

M weighted
metering

Description
If the flash is currently off, front-curtain sync will be
selected while the Fn button is pressed. If the flash is
currently enabled, it will instead be disabled while the
Fn button is pressed.
If the Fn button is pressed while exposure, flash, or
ADL bracketing is active in single frame or quiet
shutter-release mode, all shots in the current
bracketing program will be taken each time the
shutter-release button is pressed. If white balance
bracketing is active or continuous release mode
(mode CH or CL) is selected, the camera will repeat the
bracketing burst while the shutter-release button is
held down.
If image quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal, or
JPEG basic, “RAW” will be displayed in the rear
control panel and an NEF (RAW) copy will be recorded
with the next picture taken after the Fn button is
pressed (the original image quality setting will be
restored when you remove your finger from the
shutter-release button). NEF (RAW) copies are
recorded at the settings currently selected for NEF
(RAW) recording in the shooting menu (0 304). To
exit without recording an NEF (RAW) copy, press the
Fn button again.
Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is
pressed.
Center-weighted metering is activated while the Fn
button is pressed.

Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is
N Spot metering pressed.
b

U
338

Viewfinder
grid display
Viewfinder
virtual horizon

Press the Fn button to turn the framing grid display in
the viewfinder on or off (0 10).
Press the Fn button to view a virtual horizon display in
the viewfinder (0 340).

Option
Disable
c synchronized
release

Remote
release only

% MY MENU
Access top

3 item in MY
MENU

K Playback
None

Description
Keep the Fn button pressed to take photographs with
the master camera only when using a wireless
transmitter or wireless remote controller for remote
synchronized release.
Keep the Fn button pressed to take photographs with
the remote cameras only when using a wireless
transmitter or wireless remote controller for remote
synchronized release.
Pressing the Fn button displays “MY MENU”.
Press the Fn button to jump to the top item in “MY
MENU.” Select this option for quick access to a
frequently-used menu item.
Fn button performs same function as K button.
Select when using a telephoto lens or in other
circumstances in which it is difficult to operate the K
button with your left hand.
Pressing the button has no effect.

Incompatible Options
If the option selected for Press can not be used in combination with the
option selected for Press + command dials, a message will be
displayed and whichever of Press or Press + command dials was
selected first will be set to None.

U
339

Virtual Horizon
When Viewfinder virtual horizon is selected for f3 (Assign Fn
button) > Press, pressing the Fn button displays a pitch and roll
indicators in the viewfinder. Press the button a second time to clear the
indicators from display.
Roll
Camera tilted right

Camera level

Camera tilted left

Camera level

Camera tilted back

Pitch
Camera tilted forward

The roles of the pitch and roll indicators are reversed when the camera
is rotated to take pictures in “tall” (portrait) orientation. Note that the
display may not be accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle
forward or back. If the camera is unable to measure tilt, the amount of
tilt will not be displayed.

U
340

❚❚ Press + command dials
Selecting Press + command dials displays the following options:
Option

w
y
n

Description
Press the Fn button and
rotate a command dial to
choose from pre-selected
Choose
image areas (0 85).
image area Selecting Choose image
area displays a list of image
areas; highlight options and
press 2 to select or deselect, then press J.
Press the Fn button and rotate the main command
Shutter spd dial to lock shutter speed in modes f and h; press the
& aperture Fn button and rotate the sub-command dial to lock
lock
aperture in modes g and h. See page 134 for more
information.
If the Fn button is pressed when the command dials
are rotated, changes to shutter speed (exposure
1 step spd/ modes f and h) and aperture (exposure modes g and
h) are made in increments of 1 EV, regardless of the
aperture
option selected for Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for
exposure cntrl, 0 321).
Choose non- Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to
CPU lens
choose a lens number specified using the Non-CPU
number
lens data option (0 235).
Active
Press the Fn button and rotate the command dials to
D-Lighting adjust Active D-Lighting (0 188).
If this option is selected, the shooting menu bank can
Shooting
be selected by pressing the Fn button and rotating a
menu bank
command dial.
No operation is performed when the command dials
None
are rotated while the Fn button is pressed.

U
341

f4: Assign Preview Button

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the role played by the Pv button,
either by itself (Press) or when used in
combination with the command dials
(Press + command dials). The options
available are the same as for Assign Fn
button (0 337). The default options for Press
and Press + command dials are Preview and None, respectively.

f5: Assign Sub-selector

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose whether the sub-selector is used for
focus point selection (Focus point selection;
0 103) or performs the same role as the multi
selector (Same as multi selector).

f6: Assign Sub-selector Center

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the role played by the center of the
sub-selector, either by itself (Press) or when
used in combination with the command dials
(Press + command dials). The options
available are the same as for Assign Fn
button (0 337), except that Press has
additional Select center focus point and Preset focus point
options that allow the center of the sub-selector to be used to
select the center focus point or a preset focus point (0 335) and
that 1 step spd/aperture and Active D-Lighting are not available
for Press + command dials. The default options for Press and
Press + command dials are AE/AF lock and None, respectively.

U
342

f7: Assign Fn Button (Vert.)

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the role played by the Fn
button for vertical shooting, either
by itself (Press) or when used in
combination with the command
dials (Press + command dials). The
options available are the same as for
Assign Fn button (0 337), except that AF-ON, Disable
synchronized release, and Remote release only are not available
for Press and that Press + command dials has additional ISO
sensitivity, Exposure mode, Exposure compensation, and
Metering options that allow the Fn button for vertical shooting
and command dials to be used to select ISO sensitivity (0 117),
exposure mode (0 125), exposure compensation (0 138), or
metering (0 123), respectively. The default options for Press and
Press + command dials are respectively AE/AF lock and None.

f8: Shutter Spd & Aperture Lock

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Selecting On for Shutter speed lock locks shutter speed at the
value currently selected in mode f or h. Selecting On for Aperture
lock locks aperture at the value currently selected in mode g or h.
Shutter speed and aperture lock are not available in mode e.

U
343

f9: Assign BKT Button

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the role played by the D button. If
high dynamic range or multiple exposure is
active while another function is assigned to
the D button, the D button can not be
used until high dynamic range or multiple
exposure photography ends.
Option
Auto

t bracketing
Multiple

$ exposure
HDR (high

2 dynamic
range)
None

U
344

Description
Press the t button and rotate a command dial to
choose the bracketing increment and number of shots
in the bracketing sequence (0 140).
Press the t button and rotate a command dial to
choose the mode and number of shots for multiple
exposures (0 216).
Press the t button and rotate a command dial to
choose the mode and the exposure differential
(0 194).
Pressing the button has no effect.

f10: Customize Command Dials

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

This option controls the operation of the main and sub-command
dials.
Option

Reverse
rotation

Change
main/sub

Description
Reverse the direction of rotation of the
command dials when they are used to
make adjustments to Exposure
compensation and/or Shutter speed/
aperture. Highlight options and press
2 to select or deselect, then press J.
This setting also applies to the
command dials for vertical shooting.
Exposure setting: If Off is selected, the
main command dial controls shutter
speed and the sub-command dial
controls aperture. If On is selected, the
main command dial will control
aperture and the sub-command dial
shutter speed. If On (Mode A) is
selected, the main command dial will be used to set aperture
in exposure mode g only.
Autofocus setting: If On is selected, autofocus mode can be
selected by keeping the AF-mode button pressed and rotating
the sub-command dial, AF-area mode by keeping the AF-mode
button pressed and rotating the main command dial.

These settings also apply to the command dials for vertical
shooting.
If Sub-command dial is selected, aperture can only be
adjusted with the sub-command dial (or with the main
command dial if On is selected for Change main/sub). If
Aperture ring is selected, aperture can only be adjusted with
Aperture
the lens aperture ring and the camera aperture display will
setting
show aperture in increments of 1 EV (aperture for type G and E
lenses is still set using the sub-command dial). Note that
regardless of the setting chosen, the aperture ring must be
used to adjust aperture when a non-CPU lens is attached.

U
345

Option

Description
If Off is selected, the multi selector is used to choose the
picture displayed during full-frame playback, highlight
thumbnails, and navigate menus. If On or On (image review
excluded) is selected, the main command dial can be used to
choose the picture displayed during full-frame playback, move
the cursor left or right during thumbnail playback, and move
the menu highlight bar up or down. The sub-command dial is
Menus
used in full-frame playback to skip forward or back according
and
to the option selected for Sub-dial frame advance and in
playback
thumbnail playback to page up or down. While menus are
displayed, rotating the sub-command dial right displays the
sub-menu for the selected option, while rotating it left displays
the previous menu. To make a selection, press 2, the center of
the multi selector, or J. Select On (image review excluded)
to prevent the command dials from being used for playback
during image review.
When On or On (image review excluded) is selected for
Sub-dial
Menus and playback, the sub-command dial can be rotated
frame
during full-frame playback to select a folder or to skip forward
advance
or back 10 or 50 frames at a time.

U
346

f11: Release Button to Use Dial

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Selecting Yes allows adjustments that are normally made by
holding the I (Q), E, D, M, Y, S, T, U, or AF-mode
button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the
command dial after the button is released (this also applies to the
Fn and Pv buttons and the Fn button for vertical shooting, if they
have been assigned Active D-Lighting using Custom Setting f3,
Assign Fn button; 0 337, Custom Setting f4, Assign preview
button; 0 342, or Custom Setting f7, Assign Fn button (vert.);
0 343). Setting ends when any of the affected buttons is pressed
again or the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Except
when No limit is selected for Custom Setting c2 Standby timer,
setting will also end when the standby timer expires.

f12: Slot Empty Release Lock

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when
no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be recorded
(they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode). If
Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is only
enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera.

f13: Reverse Indicators

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

If
(W) is selected, the exposure indicators in the
top control panel and information display are displayed with
negative values on the left and positive values on the right. Select
(V) to display positive values on the left and
negative values on the right.

U
347

f14: Assign Multi Selector (Vert.)

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose whether the multi selector for vertical shooting is used for
focus point selection (Focus point selection; 0 103) or performs
the same role as the matching controls on the multi selector (Same
as multi selector; note that in this case, you can select Info42/
Playback13 for Photo info playback to reverse the role of the
buttons so that pressing the selector up or down displays
additional images and pressing the selector left or right changes
the photo information displayed). The role played by the center of
the multi selector for vertical shooting when Focus point
selection is chosen is that selected for Custom Setting f6 (Assign
sub-selector center, 0 342) > Press.

f15: Playback Zoom

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the controls used for playback zoom.
Option
u Use X and W

Description
Press X to zoom in, W to zoom out.
Press either X or W and rotate the main command
dial right to zoom in, left to zoom out. Pressing
v Use X/W + y
either button without rotating the command dial
has no effect.

U
348

f16: Assign Movie Record Button

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the role played by the movie-record button when C is
selected with the live view selector.
Option

Description
Press the button and rotate a command dial to
9 ISO sensitivity choose an ISO sensitivity (0 117).
Press the button and rotate a command dial to
choose from pre-selected image areas (0 85).
Choose image
Selecting Choose image area displays a list of image
i area
areas; highlight options and press 2 to select or
deselect, then press J.
Shooting menu The shooting menu bank can be selected by pressing
n bank
the button and rotating a command dial (0 300).
Press the button and rotate the main command dial
to lock shutter speed in modes f and h; press the
Shutter spd &
$
button and rotate the sub-command dial to lock
aperture lock
aperture in modes g and h. See page 134 for more
information.
No operation is performed if the command dials are
None
rotated while the button is pressed.

f17: Live View Button Options

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Select Disable to disable the a button,
preventing live view from starting
accidentally. If Enable (standby timer
active) is selected, the a button can only be
used to start live view while the standby timer
is active.

U
349

f18: Assign Remote (WR) Fn
Button

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the role played by the Fn button on
the wireless remote controller.

Option

Description
During viewfinder photography, you can preview
depth of field while the Fn button is pressed (0 126).
During live view photography, you can press the
q Preview
button once to open the lens to maximum aperture,
making it easier to check focus; pressing the button
again restores aperture to its original value (0 54).
Press the Fn button to lock flash value (supported
flash units only, 0 196, 208). Press again to cancel FV
r FV lock
lock.
Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is
B AE/AF lock
pressed.
C AE lock only Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed.
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and
AE lock (Reset remains locked until the button is pressed a second
D on release)
time, the shutter is released, or the standby timer
expires.
F AF lock only Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed.

A AF-ON
IDisable/

h enable

U
350

Pressing the Fn button initiates autofocus.
If the flash is currently off, front-curtain sync will be
selected while the Fn button is pressed. If the flash is
currently enabled, it will instead be disabled while the
Fn button is pressed.

Option

4 + NEF (RAW)

a Live view
None

Description
If image quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal, or
JPEG basic, “RAW” will be displayed in the rear
control panel and an NEF (RAW) copy will be recorded
with the next picture taken after the Fn button is
pressed (the original image quality setting will be
restored when you remove your finger from the
shutter-release button). NEF (RAW) copies are
recorded at the settings currently selected for NEF
(RAW) recording in the shooting menu (0 92). To
exit without recording an NEF (RAW) copy, press the
Fn button again.
Pressing the Fn button starts and ends live view.
Pressing the button has no effect.

f19: Lens Focus Function
Buttons
Choose the role played by the
focus function buttons on the
lens. The buttons can be used for
the assigned function only when
AF-L is selected with the focus
function selector.

Option
F AF lock only
B AE/AF lock
C AE lock only
Preset focus

A point

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Focus function
buttons

Description
Focus locks while a focus function button is pressed.
Focus and exposure lock while a focus function
button is pressed.
Exposure locks while a focus function button is
pressed.
Keep a focus function button pressed to select a
preset focus point (0 335). Release the button to
restore the original focus point selection.

U
351

Option

U
352

Description
Highlight this option and press 2 to select an AFarea mode (3D-tracking excluded; 0 100). The
selected mode will take effect while a focus function
button is pressed; releasing the button restores the
AF-area mode
original AF-area mode. The lens focus function
buttons can not be used to choose the AF-area mode
during autofocus if 3D-tracking is selected using the
controls on the camera.
If the flash is currently off, front-curtain sync will be
IDisable/
selected while a focus function button is pressed. If
the flash is currently enabled, it will instead be
enable
disabled while a focus function button is pressed.
Keep any of the focus function buttons pressed to
Disable
take photographs with the master camera only when
synchronized
using a wireless transmitter or wireless remote
release
controller for remote synchronized release.
Keep any of the focus function buttons pressed to
Remote release take photographs with the remote cameras only
only
when using a wireless transmitter or wireless remote
controller for remote synchronized release.

g: Movie
g1: Assign Fn Button

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the role played by the Fn button during movie live view.

❚❚ Press
Selecting Press displays the following options:
Option

Description
Aperture widens while the button is pressed. Use in
Power aperture combination with Custom Setting g2 (Assign
(open)
preview button) > Press > Power aperture (close)
for button-controlled aperture adjustment.
Press the button during movie recording to add an
Index marking index at the current position (0 66). Indices can be
used when viewing and editing movies.
Press the button to display information on shutter
View photo
speed, aperture, and other photo settings in place of
shooting info movie recording information. Press again to return
to the movie recording display.
None
Pressing the button has no effect.

❚❚ Press + Command Dials
Selecting Press + command dials displays the following options:

Option
Choose image
area
None

Description
Press the button and rotate a command dial to select
an image area for movie live view (0 70).
No operation is performed when the command dials
are rotated while the button is pressed.

U
353

Choose Image Area
When Choose image area is selected, the button can be used in
combination with the command dials to cycle from FX-based movie
format to DX-based movie format to a 1920 × 1080 crop (except when
frame rates of 60p or 50p are selected, movies with a 1920 × 1080 crop
will be shot at the frame rate chosen for Movie settings > Frame size/
frame rate; when 60p or 50p is selected, movies with a 1920 × 1080
crop will be recorded at half the selected frame rate). The image area
can not be changed during shooting.

U
354

g2: Assign Preview Button

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the role played by the Pv button during movie live view.

❚❚ Press
Selecting Press displays the following options:
Option

Description
Aperture narrows while the button is pressed. Use in
Power aperture combination with Custom Setting g1 (Assign Fn
(close)
button) > Press > Power aperture (open) for
button-controlled aperture adjustment.
Press the button during movie recording to add an
Index marking index at the current position (0 66). Indices can be
used when viewing and editing movies.
Press the button to display information on shutter
View photo
speed, aperture, and other photo settings in place of
shooting info movie recording information. Press again to return
to the movie recording display.
None
Pressing the button has no effect.

❚❚ Press + Command Dials
Choose the role played by the Pv button when used in combination
with the command dials. The options available are the same as for
Custom Setting g1 (Assign Fn button) > Press + command dials
(0 353). The default option is None.

Power Aperture
Power aperture is available only in exposure modes g and h and can not
be used during movie recording or while photo shooting info is
displayed (a 6 icon indicates that power aperture can not be used).
The display may flicker while aperture is adjusted.

U
355

g3: Assign Sub-selector Center

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the role played by the center of the sub-selector during
movie live view.

❚❚ Press
Selecting Press displays the following options:
Option

B
C

Description
Press the control during movie recording to add an
Index marking index at the current position (0 66). Indices can be
used when viewing and editing movies.
Press the control to display information on shutter
View photo
speed, aperture, and other photo settings in place of
shooting info movie recording information. Press again to return to
the movie recording display.
AE/AF lock
Focus and exposure lock while the control is pressed.

Exposure locks while the control is pressed.
Exposure locks when the control is pressed, and
E AE lock (Hold) remains locked until the control is pressed a second
time or the standby timer expires.
F AF lock only Focus locks while the control is pressed.
None
Pressing the control has no effect.
AE lock only

❚❚ Press + Command Dials
Choose the role played by the center of the sub-selector when
used in combination with the command dials. The options
available are the same as for Custom Setting g1 (Assign Fn
button) > Press + command dials (0 353). The default option is
None.

U
356

g4: Assign Shutter Button

G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the role played by pressing the shutter-release button
when 1 is selected with the live view selector.
Option

Description
Press the shutter-release button all the way down to
end movie recording and take a photograph with an
Take photos
aspect ratio that matches that of a movie frame (for
information on image size, see page 70).
Press the shutter-release button halfway to start
movie live view. You can then press the shutterrelease button halfway to focus (autofocus mode
only) and press it all the way down to start or end
Record movies recording. To end movie live view, press the a
button. The shutter-release button on an optional
wireless remote controller or remote cord (0 411,
412) functions in the same way as the camera
shutter-release button.
If the shutter-release button is pressed all the way
down during movie recording, the camera will
record a photograph without interrupting movie
recording. Photos are recorded at an image quality
of JPEG fine and the size selected for Movie settings
Live frame grab
> Frame size/frame rate in the shooting menu
(0 74). Note that during movie recording, photos
are taken one at a time regardless of the release
mode selected; this restriction does not apply if
movie recording is not currently in progress.

Record Movies
When this option is selected, interval timer photography (0 221) is not
available and any functions assigned to the shutter-release button
(such as taking photographs, measuring preset white balance, and
taking image dust-off reference photos) can not be used when 1 is
selected with the live view selector. Select Take photos or Live frame
grab to use these options.

U
357

B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
To display the setup menu, press G and select the B (setup
menu) tab.
G button

Option
Format memory card
Monitor brightness
Monitor color balance
Clean image sensor
Lock mirror up for cleaning *
Image Dust Off ref photo
Flicker reduction
Time zone and date
Language
Auto image rotation
Battery info
Image comment

0
359
359
360
417
420
361
363
363
364
364
365
366

Option
Copyright information
IPTC
Voice memo options
Save/load settings
Virtual horizon
Non-CPU lens data
AF fine-tune
HDMI
Location data
Network
Firmware version

* Not available when battery is low.

See Also
Menu defaults are listed on page 437.

Network > Network Connection
Firmware updates are not available when Enable is selected for
Network > Network connection.

U
358

0
367
368
261
370
372
236
373
286
240
276
374

Format Memory Card

G button ➜ B setup menu

To begin formatting, choose a memory card
slot and select Yes. Note that formatting
permanently deletes all pictures and other data
on the card in the selected slot. Before
formatting, be sure to make backup copies as
required.

During Formatting
Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting.

Two-Button Format
Memory cards can also be formatted by pressing the O (Q) and I
(Q) buttons for more than two seconds (0 35).

Monitor Brightness

G button ➜ B setup menu

Adjust the brightness of the monitor for playback, menus, and the
information display.
Option

Description
When the monitor is on, monitor brightness is automatically
Auto adjusted according to ambient lighting conditions. Care should
be taken not to cover the ambient brightness sensor (0 5).
Press 1 or 3 to choose monitor brightness. Choose higher
Manual values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced
brightness.

See Also
The option selected for Monitor brightness has no effect on the
brightness of the display during live view photography or movie live
view. For information on adjusting monitor brightness in live view, see
page 57.

U
359

Monitor Color Balance

G button ➜ B setup menu

Use the multi selector as shown below to
adjust monitor color balance with reference
to a sample image. The sample image is the
last photograph taken or, in playback mode,
the last photograph displayed; to choose a
different image, press the W button and
select an image from a thumbnail list (to view
the highlighted image full frame, press and
hold X; to view images in other locations,
press W and select the desired card and
folder as described on page 242). If the
memory card contains no photographs, an empty frame with a
gray border will be displayed in place of the sample image. Press
J to exit when adjustments are complete. Monitor color balance
applies only to menus, playback, and the view through the lens
displayed during live view photography and movie live view;
pictures taken with the camera are not affected.
Increase amount of green
Increase amount of blue

Increase amount of amber

Increase amount of magenta

U
360

Image Dust Off Ref Photo

G button ➜ B setup menu

Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in
Capture NX 2 (available separately; for more information, see the
Capture NX 2 manual).
Image Dust Off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is
mounted on the camera. A non-DX lens with a focal length of at
least 50 mm is recommended. When using a zoom lens, zoom all
the way in.

Choose a start option.
Highlight one of the
following options and
press J. To exit without
acquiring image dust off
data, press G.
J button
• Start: The message shown
at right will be displayed and “rEF” will
appear in the viewfinder and control
panel displays.
• Clean sensor and then start: Select this
option to clean the image sensor
before starting. The message shown at
right will be displayed and “rEF” will
appear in the viewfinder and control
panel displays when cleaning is
complete.

U
361

Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a welllit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the
viewfinder and then press the shutter-release button halfway.
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity;
in manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.

Acquire dust off reference data.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data. The monitor turns off
when the shutter-release button is pressed. Note that noise
reduction will be performed if the subject is poorly lit,
increasing recording times.
If the reference object is too bright or too
dark, the camera may be unable to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data
and the message shown at right will be
displayed. Choose another reference
object and repeat the process from
Step 1.

Image Sensor Cleaning
Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is
performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor
cleaning is performed. Select Clean sensor and then start only if the
dust off reference data will not be used with existing photographs.

U
362

Image Dust Off Reference Data
The same reference data can be used for
photographs taken with different lenses or at
different apertures. Reference images can not
be viewed using computer imaging software.
A grid pattern is displayed when reference
images are viewed on the camera.

Flicker Reduction

G button ➜ B setup menu

Reduce flicker and banding when shooting
under fluorescent or mercury-vapor lighting
during live view or movie recording. Choose
Auto to allow the camera to automatically
choose the correct frequency, or manually
match the frequency to that of the local AC
power supply.

Flicker Reduction
If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the
frequency of the local power supply, test both the 50 and 60 Hz options
and choose the one that produces the best results. Flicker reduction
may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright, in which
case you should try choosing a smaller aperture (higher f-number). To
prevent flicker, select mode h and choose a shutter speed adapted to the
frequency of the local power supply: 1/125 s, 1/60 s, or 1/30 s for 60 Hz;
1/100 s, 1/50 s, or 1/25 s for 50 Hz.

Time Zone and Date

G button ➜ B setup menu

Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date display
order, and turn daylight saving time on or off (0 30).
Option

Description
Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically set
Time zone
to the time in the new time zone.
Date and time Set the camera clock.
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are
Date format
displayed.
Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock will
Daylight
automatically be advanced or set back one hour. The
saving time
default setting is Off.

B flashes in the top control panel when the clock is not set.

U
363

Language

G button ➜ B setup menu

Choose a language for camera menus and messages.

Auto Image Rotation

G button ➜ B setup menu

Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on
camera orientation, allowing them to be rotated automatically
during playback (0 296) or when viewed in ViewNX 2 (supplied)
or in Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 411). The following
orientations are recorded:

Landscape (wide)
orientation

Camera rotated 90°
clockwise

Camera rotated 90°
counter-clockwise

Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected. Choose
this option when panning or taking photographs with the lens
pointing up or down.

Rotate Tall
To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for
display during playback, select On for the Rotate tall option in the
playback menu (0 296).

U
364

Battery Info

G button ➜ B setup menu

View information on the battery currently
inserted in the camera.

Item
Charge

Description
The current battery level expressed as a percentage.
The number of times the shutter has been released with the
current battery since the battery was last charged. Note that
No. of
the camera may sometimes release the shutter without
shots
recording a photograph, for example when measuring preset
white balance.
• j: Due to repeated use and recharging, calibration is
required to ensure that battery level can be measured
Calibration
accurately; recalibrate battery before charging (0 459).
• —: Calibration not required.
A five-level display showing battery age. 0 (k) indicates that
battery performance is unimpaired, 4 (l) that the battery has
reached the end of its charging life and should be replaced.
Battery Note that fresh batteries charged at temperatures under
about 5 °C (41 °F) may show a temporary drop in charging life;
age
the battery age display will however return to normal once
the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about
20 °C (68 °F) or higher.

U
365

Image Comment

G button ➜ B setup menu

Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken.
Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX 2 (supplied) or
Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 411). The comment is also
visible on the shooting data page in the photo information display
(0 250). The following options are available:
• Input comment: Input a comment as described on page 184.
Comments can be up to 36 characters long.
• Attach comment: Select this option to
attach the comment to all subsequent
photographs. Attach comment can be
turned on and off by highlighting it and
pressing 2. After choosing the desired
setting, press J to exit.

U
366

G button ➜ B setup menu

Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken.
Copyright information is included in the shooting data shown in
the photo information display (0 250) and can be viewed as
metadata in ViewNX 2 (supplied) or in Capture NX 2 (available
separately; 0 411). The following options are available:
• Artist: Enter a photographer name as described on page 184.
Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long.
• Copyright: Enter the name of the copyright holder as described
on page 184. Copyright holder names can be up to 54 characters
long.
• Attach copyright information: Select this
option to attach copyright information to all
subsequent photographs. Attach
copyright information can be turned on
and off by highlighting it and pressing 2.
After choosing the desired setting, press J
to exit.

Copyright Information
To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names,
make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that
the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or transferring
the camera to another person. Nikon does not accept liability for any
damages or disputes arising from the use of the Copyright
information option.

U
367

IPTC

G button ➜ B setup menu

The software needed to create IPTC presets and save them to a
memory card can be downloaded using the supplied ViewNX 2
installer CD (Internet connection required) and installed on your
computer (for more information, see the software’s on-line help).
The memory card can then be inserted in the camera’s primary
card slot and the options in the IPTC menu used to copy presets to
the camera and embed them in new photographs as described
below:
• Copy to camera: Copy IPTC presets from
the card in the primary card slot (0 96) to a
selected destination on the camera. The
camera can store up to ten presets. To copy
a preset, highlight it and press J, then
highlight a destination and press J again
(to preview the preset highlighted in the source list, press 2,
then press J after viewing the preset to proceed to the
destination list).
• Edit: Select a preset from the list of IPTC presets stored on the
camera and choose Rename to rename the preset or Edit IPTC
information to select fields and edit their contents as described
on page 184.
• Delete: Select a preset for deletion from the
camera. A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and press J to
delete the selected preset.

U
368

• Auto embed during shooting: Highlight
the camera IPTC preset that will be
embedded in all subsequent photographs
and press J (to disable embedding, select
Off ).

IPTC Information
IPTC is a standard established by the International Press
Telecommunications Council (IPTC) with the intent of clarifying and
simplifying the information required when photographs are shared
with a variety of publications. The camera supports standard roman
alphanumeric characters only; other characters will not display correctly
except on a computer. Preset names (0 368) may be up to
18 characters long (if a longer name is created using a computer, all
characters after the eighteenth will be deleted); the number of
characters that may appear in each field is given below; any characters
over the limit will not be displayed.
Field
Caption
Event ID
Headline
Object name
City
State
Country
Category

Maximum length
2000
64
256
256
256
256
256
3

Field
Supplemental
Categories
(Supp. Cat.)
Byline
Byline title
Writer/editor
Credit
Source

Maximum length
256
256
256
256
256
256

U
369

Save/Load Settings

G button ➜ B setup menu

Select Save settings to save the following settings to the memory
card, or to the memory card in the primary card slot if two memory
cards are inserted (0 96; if the card is full, an error will be
displayed). Use this option to share settings among D4S cameras.
Menu
Playback

Shooting
(all banks)

U
370

Option
Playback display options
Image review
After delete
Rotate tall
Shooting menu bank
Extended menu banks
File naming
Primary slot selection
Secondary slot function
Image quality
JPEG/TIFF recording
NEF (RAW) recording
Image area
White balance (with fine-tuning and presets d-1–d-6)
Set Picture Control; note that Standard is used for
Picture Controls other than the six preset Picture
Controls supplied with the camera (Standard, Neutral,
Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait, and Landscape)
Color space
Active D-Lighting
Vignette control
Auto distortion control
Long exposure NR

Menu
Shooting
(all banks)

Option
High ISO NR
ISO sensitivity settings
Live view photography
Movie settings

Custom settings
All Custom Settings
(all banks)
Clean image sensor
Flicker reduction
Time zone and date (excepting date and time)
Language
Auto image rotation
Image comment
Setup
Copyright information
IPTC
Voice memo options
Non-CPU lens data
HDMI
Location data
All My Menu items
My Menu/
All recent settings
Recent Settings
Choose tab

Settings saved using the D4S can be restored by selecting Load
settings. Note that Save/load settings is only available when a
memory card is inserted in the camera, and that the Load settings
option is only available if the card contains saved settings.

Saved Settings
Settings are saved in a file named NCSETUPE. The camera will not be
able to load settings if the file name is changed.

U
371

Virtual Horizon

G button ➜ B setup menu

Display roll and pitch information based on information from the
camera tilt sensor. If the camera is tilted neither left nor right, the
roll reference line will turn green, while if the camera is tilted
neither forward nor back, the dot in the center of the display will
turn green. Each division is equivalent to 5°.

Camera level

Camera tilted left or
right

Camera tilted forward
or back

Tilting the Camera
The virtual horizon display is not accurate when the camera is tilted at a
sharp angle forward or back. If the camera is unable to measure tilt, the
amount of tilt will not be displayed.

See Also
For information on viewing a virtual horizon display in the viewfinder,
see Custom Setting f3 (Assign Fn button > Press; 0 337, 338). For
information on displaying a virtual horizon in live view, see pages 58
and 69.

U
372

AF Fine-Tune

G button ➜ B setup menu

Fine-tune focus for up to 20 lens types. AF tuning is not
recommended in most situations and may interfere with normal
focus; use only when required.
Option
Description
AF fine tune • On: Turn AF tuning on.
(On/Off) • Off: Turn AF tuning off.
Tune AF for the current lens (CPU
Move focal
lenses only). Press 1 or 3 to
point away
choose a value between +20 and
from camera.
Saved value
–20. Values for up to 20 lens types
can be stored. Only one value can
be stored for each type of lens.

Default

List saved
values

Choose the AF tuning value used
when no previously saved value
exists for the current lens (CPU
lenses only).

Move focal
point toward
camera.

Current
value

Previous
value

List previously saved AF tuning values.
To delete a lens from the list, highlight
the desired lens and press O (Q). To
change a lens identifier (for example,
to choose an identifier that is the same
as the last two digits of the lens serial
number to distinguish it from other
lenses of the same type in light of the fact that Saved value
can be used with only one lens of each type), highlight the
desired lens and press 2. The menu shown at right will be
displayed; press 1 or 3 to choose an identifier and press J to
save changes and exit.

U
373

AF Tuning
The camera may be unable to focus at minimum range or at infinity
when AF tuning is applied.

Live View
Tuning is not applied to autofocus during live view (0 52).

Saved Value
Only one value can be stored for each type of lens. If a teleconverter is
used, separate values can be stored for each combination of lens and
teleconverter.

Firmware Version
View the current camera firmware version.

U
374

G button ➜ B setup menu

N The Retouch Menu:
Creating Retouched Copies
To display the retouch menu, press G and select the N (retouch
menu) tab.
G button

The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed, or
retouched copies of existing pictures. The retouch menu is only
displayed when a memory card containing photographs other
than small NEF (RAW) images is inserted in the camera.
i
j
k
l
m
n
o

Option
D-Lighting
Red-eye correction
Trim
Monochrome
Filter effects
Color balance
Image overlay 1

0
379
380
381
382
382
383
384

7
8
Z
a
e
9
p

Option
NEF (RAW) processing
Resize
Straighten
Distortion control
Perspective control
Edit movie
Side-by-side comparison 2

0
387
389
391
392
393
79
394

1 Can only be selected by pressing G and selecting N tab.
2 Can only be displayed by holding J and pressing 2 in full-frame playback
when a retouched image or original is displayed.

Small NEF (RAW) + JPEG Images
If the JPEG copies of small NEF (RAW) images taken at image quality
settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG are recorded to the same memory card
(0 96), neither the NEF (RAW) images nor the JPEG copies can be
edited.

U
375

Creating Retouched Copies
To create a retouched copy:

Select an item in the
retouch menu.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an
item, 2 to select.

Select a picture.
Highlight a picture and press J.
To view the highlighted picture
full screen, press and hold the X
button.
To view images in other locations, press
W and select the desired card and folder
as described on page 242.

Retouch
In the case of images recorded at image
quality settings of NEF + JPEG, only the NEF
(RAW) image will be retouched. The camera
may not be able to display or retouch
images created with other devices.

U
376

Select retouch options.
For more information, see the section for the selected item. To
exit without creating a retouched copy, press G.

Monitor off Delay
The monitor will turn off and the operation will be cancelled if no
actions are performed for a brief period. Any unsaved changes will
be lost. To increase the time the monitor remains on, choose a
longer menu display time for Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay,
0 325).

Create a retouched
copy.
Press J to create a
retouched copy.
Retouched copies are
indicated by a & icon.

J button

U
377

Creating Retouched Copies During Playback
Retouched copies can also be created during playback.

Display picture full
frame and hold J and
press 2.

Highlight an option
and press J.

Create retouched
copy.

Retouching Copies
Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch
options, although (with the exceptions of Image overlay and Edit
movie > Choose start/end point) each option can be applied only once
(note that multiple edits may result in loss of detail). Options that can
not be applied to the current image are grayed out and unavailable.

Image Quality
Except in the case of copies created with Trim, Image overlay, NEF
(RAW) processing, and Resize, copies created from JPEG images are
the same size and quality as the original, copies created from NEF (RAW)
photos are saved as large fine-quality JPEG images, and copies created
from TIFF (RGB) photos are saved as fine-quality JPEG images of the
same size as the original. Size-priority compression is used when copies
are saved in JPEG format.

U
378

D-Lighting

G button ➜ N retouch menu

D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit
photographs.

Before

After

Press 1 or 3 to choose the amount of
correction performed. The effect can be
previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy
the photograph.

U
379

Red-Eye Correction

G button ➜ N retouch menu

This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash and is
available only with photographs taken using a flash. The
photograph selected for red-eye correction can be previewed in
the edit display. Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and
create a copy as described in the following table. Note that
red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results
and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the
image that are not affected by red-eye; check the preview
thoroughly before proceeding.
To

Use

Zoom in

Zoom out

View other
areas of image
Cancel zoom

Create copy

U
380

J
J

Description
Press X to zoom in, W to zoom out. While photo
is zoomed in, use multi selector to view areas of
image not visible in monitor. Keep multi selector
pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame.
Navigation window is displayed when zoom
buttons or multi selector are pressed; area
currently visible in monitor is indicated by yellow
border. Press J to cancel zoom.
If the camera detects red-eye in the selected
photograph, a copy will be created that has been
processed to reduce its effects. No copy will be
created if the camera is unable to detect red-eye.

Trim

G button ➜ N retouch menu

Create a cropped copy of the selected
photograph. The selected photograph is
displayed with the selected crop shown in
yellow; create a cropped copy as described in
the following table.
To
Reduce size of
crop
Increase size of
crop

Use

Description

Press W to reduce the size of the crop.

Press X to increase the size of the crop.

Change crop
aspect ratio

Rotate the main command dial to switch
between aspect ratios of 3 : 2, 4 : 3, 5 : 4, 1 : 1,
and 16 : 9.

Position crop

Use multi selector to position the crop. Press
and hold to move the crop rapidly to the
desired position.

Preview crop

Press center of multi selector to preview
cropped image.

Create copy

Save the current crop as a separate file.

Trim: Image Quality and Size
Copies created from NEF (RAW), NEF
(RAW) + JPEG, or TIFF (RGB) photos have an
image quality (0 90) of JPEG fine; cropped
copies created from JPEG photos have the same
image quality as the original. The size of the
copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio and
appears at upper left in the crop display.

Viewing Cropped Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are
displayed.

U
381

Monochrome

G button ➜ N retouch menu

Copy photographs in Black-and-white,
Sepia, or Cyanotype (blue and white
monochrome).

Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype
displays a preview of the selected
image; press 1 to increase color
saturation, 3 to decrease. Press J
to create a monochrome copy.

Increase
saturation

Decrease
saturation

Filter Effects

G button ➜ N retouch menu

Choose from the following color filter effects. After adjusting filter
effects as described below, press J to copy the photograph.
Option

Skylight

Warm filter

U
382

Description
Creates the effect of a skylight
filter, making the picture less
blue. The effect can be previewed
in the monitor as shown at right.

Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects, giving the
copy a “warm” red cast. The effect can be previewed in
the monitor.

Color Balance

G button ➜ N retouch menu

Use the multi selector to create a copy with
modified color balance as shown below. The
effect is displayed in the monitor together
with red, green, and blue histograms (0 247)
giving the distribution of tones in the copy.
Press J to copy the photograph.
Increase amount of green
Increase amount of blue

Increase amount of amber

Increase amount of magenta

Zoom
To zoom in on the image displayed in the
monitor, press X. The histogram will be updated
to show data only for the portion of the image
displayed in the monitor. While the image is
zoomed in, press L (Z/Q) to toggle back and
forth between color balance and zoom. When
zoom is selected, you can zoom in and out with
the X and W buttons and scroll the image with
the multi selector.

U
383

Image Overlay

G button ➜ N retouch menu

Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to
create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals;
the results, which make use of RAW data from the camera image
sensor, are noticeably better than photographs combined in an
imaging application. The new picture is saved at current image
quality and size settings; before creating an overlay, set image
quality and size (0 90, 94; all options are available). To create a
NEF (RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW) and an
image size of Large (the overlay will be saved as a large NEF/RAW
image even if Small is selected).

Select Image overlay.
Highlight Image overlay in the
retouch menu and press 2. The
dialog shown at right will be
displayed, with Image 1
highlighted; press J to display
a picture selection dialog listing only large NEF (RAW) images
created with this camera (small NEF/RAW images can not be
selected).

U
384

Select the first image.
Use the multi selector to
highlight the first photograph
in the overlay. To view the
highlighted photograph full
frame, press and hold the X
button. To view images in other locations, press W and select
the desired card and folder as described on page 242. Press J
to select the highlighted photograph and return to the
preview display.

Select the second image.
The selected image will appear as Image 1. Highlight Image 2
and press J, then select the second photo as described in
Step 2.

Adjust gain.
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2
and optimize exposure for the
overlay by pressing 1 or 3 to
select the gain from values
between 0.1 and 2.0. Repeat for
the second image. The default value is 1.0; select 0.5 to halve
gain or 2.0 to double it. The effects of gain are visible in the
Preview column.

U
385

Preview the overlay.
Press 4 or 2 to place the cursor
in the Preview column and
press 1 or 3 to highlight
Overlay. Press J to preview
the overlay as shown at right (to
save the overlay without displaying a preview, select Save). To
return to Step 4 and select new photos or adjust gain, press
W.

Save the overlay.
Press J while the preview
is displayed to save the
overlay. After an overlay is
created, the resulting
image will be displayed
J button
full-frame in the monitor.

Image Overlay
Only NEF (RAW) photographs with the same image area and bit-depth
can be combined.

The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording,
metering, shutter speed, aperture, exposure mode, exposure
compensation, focal length, and image orientation) and values for
white balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for
Image 1. The current image comment is appended to the overlay when
it is saved; copyright information, however, are not copied. Overlays
saved in NEF (RAW) format use the compression selected for NEF (RAW)
compression in the NEF (RAW) recording menu and have the same bit
depth as the original images; JPEG overlays are saved using size-priority
compression.

U
386

NEF (RAW) Processing

G button ➜ N retouch menu

Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.

Select NEF (RAW)
processing.
Highlight NEF (RAW)
processing in the retouch
menu and press 2 to display a
picture selection dialog listing
only large NEF (RAW) images created with this camera. Small
NEF/RAW images can not be selected; to create JPEG copies of
small NEF (RAW) images, use the supplied ViewNX 2 software
(0 269) or the Capture NX 2 (available separately, 0 411).

Select a photograph.
Highlight a photograph (to
view the highlighted
photograph full frame, press
and hold the X button; to view
images in other locations as
described on page 242, press W). Press J to select the
highlighted photograph and proceed to the next step.

U
387

Choose settings for the JPEG copy.
Adjust the settings listed below. Note that white balance and
vignette control are not available with multiple exposures or
pictures created with image overlay and that exposure
compensation can only be set to values between –2 and
+2 EV. The Picture Control grid is not displayed when Picture
Controls are adjusted.

Image quality (0 90)
Image size (0 94)
White balance (0 155)
Exposure compensation (0 138)
Set Picture Control (0 177)
High ISO NR (0 308)

Color space (0 305)
Vignette control (0 306)
D-Lighting (0 379)

Copy the photograph.
Highlight EXE and press J
to create a JPEG copy of
the selected photograph.
To exit without copying
the photograph, press the J button
G button.

U
388

Resize

G button ➜ N retouch menu

Create small copies of selected photographs.

Select Resize.
To resize selected images, press
G to display the menus and
select Resize in the retouch
menu.

Choose a destination.
If two memory cards are
inserted, you can choose a
destination for the resized
copies by highlighting Choose
destination and pressing 2 (if
only one memory card is
inserted, proceed to Step 3).
The menu shown at right will
be displayed; highlight a card
slot and press J.

U
389

Choose a size.
Highlight Choose size and
press 2.

The options shown at right will
be displayed; highlight an
option and press J.

Choose pictures.
Highlight Select image and
press 2.

Highlight pictures and press the
center of the multi selector to
select or deselect (to view the
highlighted picture full screen,
press and hold the X button; to
view pictures in other locations
as described on page 242, press W). Selected pictures are
marked by a 8 icon. Press J when the selection is complete.
Note that photographs taken at an image-area setting of 5 : 4
(0 86) can not be resized.

U
390

Save the resized copies.
A confirmation dialog will
be displayed. Highlight
Yes and press J to save
the resized copies.
J button

Viewing Resized Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are displayed.

Image Quality
Copies created from NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW) + JPEG, or TIFF (RGB) photos
have an image quality (0 90) of JPEG fine; copies created from JPEG
photos have the same image quality as the original.

Straighten

G button ➜ N retouch menu

Create a straightened copy of the selected
image. Press 2 to rotate the image clockwise
by up to five degrees in increments of
approximately 0.25 degrees, 4 to rotate it
counterclockwise (the effect can be
previewed in the edit display; note that edges
of the image will be trimmed to create a square copy). Press J to
copy the photograph, or press K to exit to playback without
creating a copy.

U
391

Distortion Control

G button ➜ N retouch menu

Create copies with reduced peripheral
distortion. Select Auto to let the camera
correct distortion automatically and then
make fine adjustments using the multi
selector, or select Manual to reduce
distortion manually (note that Auto is not
available with photos taken using auto distortion control; see
page 307). Press 2 to reduce barrel distortion, 4 to reduce
pincushion distortion (the effect can be previewed in the edit
display; note that greater amounts of distortion control result in
more of the edges being cropped out). Press J to copy the
photograph, or press K to exit to playback without creating a
copy. Note that distortion control may heavily crop or distort the
edges of copies created from photographs taken with DX lenses at
image areas other than DX (24×16) 1.5×.

Auto
Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G, E, and D lenses (PC,
fisheye, and certain other lenses excluded). Results are not guaranteed
with other lenses.

U
392

Perspective Control

G button ➜ N retouch menu

Create copies that reduce the effects of
perspective taken from the base of a tall
object. Use the multi selector to adjust
perspective (note that greater amounts of
perspective control result in more of the
edges being cropped out). The results can be
previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy the photograph, or
press K to exit to playback without creating a copy.

Before

After

U
393

Side-by-Side Comparison
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs. This
option is only available if the retouch menu is displayed by
pressing the J and 2 buttons when a copy or original is displayed
full frame.

Select a picture.
Select a retouched copy (shown by a
& icon) or a photograph that has
been retouched in full-frame playback
and press the J and 2 buttons.
J button

Select Side-by-side
comparison.
Highlight Side-by-side
comparison and press J.

U
394

Compare the copy with the
original.

Options used to
create copy

The source image is displayed
on the left, the retouched copy
on the right, with the options
used to create the copy listed at
the top of the display. Press 4
Source Retouched
or 2 to switch between the
image
copy
source image and the
retouched copy. To view the
highlighted picture full frame, press and hold the X button. If
the copy was created from two source images using Image
overlay, or if the source has been copied multiple times, press
1 or 3 to view the other source image. To exit to playback,
press the K button, or press J to exit to playback with the
highlighted image selected.

Side-by-Side Comparison
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a
photograph that was protected (0 255) or has since been deleted or
hidden (0 290).

U
395

O My Menu/m Recent Settings
To display My Menu, press G and select the O (My Menu) tab.
G button

The MY MENU option can be used to create and edit a customized
list of options from the playback, shooting, Custom Settings,
setup, and retouch menus for quick access (up to 20 items). If
desired, recent settings can be displayed in place of My Menu
(0 400).
Options can be added, deleted, and reordered as described on the
following pages.

U
396

❚❚ Adding Options to My Menu

Select Add items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Add
items and press 2.

Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the
menu containing the option
you wish to add and press 2.

Select an item.
Highlight the desired
menu item and press J.

J button

Position the new item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the new
item up or down in My Menu.
Press J to add the new item.

Add more items.
The items currently displayed in My
Menu are indicated by a check mark.
Items indicated by a V icon can not be
selected. Repeat steps 1–4 to select
additional items.

U
397

❚❚ Deleting Options from My Menu

Select Remove items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Remove items and press 2.

Select items.
Highlight items and press 2 to
select or deselect. Selected
items are indicated by a check
mark.

Delete the selected
items.
Press J. A confirmation
dialog will be displayed;
press J again to delete the
selected items.
J button

Deleting Items in My Menu
To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu, press the O (Q)
button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O (Q) again to
remove the selected item from My Menu.

U
398

❚❚ Reordering Options in My Menu

Select Rank items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Rank items and press 2.

Select an item.
Highlight the item you
wish to move and press J.

J button

Position the item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the item
up or down in My Menu and
press J. Repeat Steps 2–3 to
reposition additional items.

Exit to My Menu.

G button

Press the G button to
return to My Menu.

U
399

Recent Settings
To display the twenty most recently used settings, select
m RECENT SETTINGS for O MY MENU > Choose tab.

Select Choose tab.
In My Menu (O), highlight
Choose tab and press 2.

Select m RECENT
SETTINGS.
Highlight m RECENT
SETTINGS and press J.
The name of the menu will
change from “MY MENU”
J button
to “RECENT SETTINGS.”

Menu items will be added to the top of the recent settings menu
as they are used. To view My Menu again, select O MY MENU for
m RECENT SETTINGS > Choose tab.

Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu
To remove an item from the recent settings menu, highlight it and press
the O (Q) button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O (Q)
again to delete the selected item.

U
400

nTechnical Notes
Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories,
cleaning and storing the camera, and what to do if an error
message is displayed or you encounter problems using the camera.

Compatible Lenses
Camera setting

CPU lenses 1

Lens/accessory
Type G, E, or D AF NIKKOR 2
AF-S, AF-I NIKKOR
PC-E NIKKOR series
PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D 5
AF-S / AF-I Teleconverter 7
Other AF NIKKOR
(except lenses for F3AF)
AI-P NIKKOR
AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR or
Nikon Series E lenses 11
Medical-NIKKOR 120mm f/4
Reflex-NIKKOR
PC-NIKKOR
AI-type Teleconverter 17
PB-6 Bellows Focusing
Attachment 19
Auto extension rings
(PK-series 11A, 12, or 13;
PN-11)

Focus mode

Exposure
Metering system
mode
L
e g
M
f h 3D Color N

Non-CPU lenses 10

M (with
electronic
rangefinder)

✔

—
—
✔

✔4
✔4
✔

✔ ✔4 ✔4 ✔4
✔ — ✔6 ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

— ✔ 3,4
— ✔ 3,4
— ✔3

✔8

✔

—

✔

✔3

—

✔9

✔

—

✔

✔3

—

✔9

✔

— ✔ 12 — ✔ 13 ✔ 14

—
—
—
—

✔
—
✔4
✔ 18

✔
✔
✔
✔

—
—
—
—

—

✔ 18

✔

— ✔ 20 —

—

✔

—

✔ 18

✔

— ✔ 12 —

—

✔

1 IX-NIKKOR lenses can not be used.
2 Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR lenses.
3 Spot metering meters selected focus point (0 123).

✔

✔ 15
✔ 12
✔ 16
✔ 12

✔

—

— —
— —
— —
— ✔ 13

✔3

—
✔ 14
✔
✔ 14

n
401

4 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.
5 The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work properly
when shifting and/or tilting the lens, or when an aperture other than the
maximum aperture is used.
6 Manual exposure mode only.
7 Can be used with AF-S and AF-I lenses only (0 404). For information on the
focus points available for autofocus and electronic rangefinding, see page 404.
8 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF
35–70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 , or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 lens at
maximum zoom, in-focus indicator may be displayed when image on matte
screen in viewfinder is not in focus. Adjust focus manually until image in
viewfinder is in focus.
9 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
10 Some lenses can not be used (see page 405).
11 Range of rotation for AI 80–200mm f/2.8 ED tripod mount is limited by camera body.
Filters can not be exchanged while AI 200–400mm f/4 ED is mounted on camera.
12 If maximum aperture is specified using Non-CPU lens data (0 235), aperture
value will be displayed in viewfinder and top control panel.
13 Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using
Non-CPU lens data (0 235). Use spot or center-weighted metering if desired
results are not achieved.
14 For improved precision, specify lens focal length and maximum aperture using
Non-CPU lens data (0 235).
15 Can be used in manual exposure modes at shutter speeds slower than flash
sync speed by one step or more.
16 Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture. In aperture-priority auto
exposure mode, preset aperture using lens aperture ring before performing AE
lock and shifting lens. In manual exposure mode, preset aperture using lens
aperture ring and determine exposure before shifting lens.
17 Exposure compensation required when used with AI 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5,
AI 35–105mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–135mm f/3.5–4.5, or AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D.
18 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
19 Requires PK-12 or PK-13 auto extension ring. PB-6D may be required
depending on camera orientation.
20 Use preset aperture. In aperture-priority auto exposure mode, set aperture
using focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking
photograph.
• PF-4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA-4 Camera Holder.
• Noise in the form of lines may appear during autofocus at high ISO sensitivities.
Use manual focus or focus lock. Lines may also appear at high ISO sensitivities
when aperture is adjusted during movie recording or live view photography.

n
402

Recognizing CPU and Type G, E, and D Lenses
CPU lenses (particularly types G, E, and D) are recommended, but note
that IX-NIKKOR lenses can not be used. CPU lenses can be identified by
the presence of CPU contacts, type G, E, and D lenses by a letter on the
lens barrel. Type G and E lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture
ring.
CPU contacts
Aperture ring

CPU lens

Type G/E lens

Type D lens

Lens f-number
The f-number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens.

n
403

The AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter
The table below shows the focus points available for autofocus and
electronic rangefinding when an AF-S/AF-I teleconverter is attached.
Note that the camera may be unable to focus on dark or low-contrast
subjects if the combined aperture is slower than f/5.6. Autofocus is not
available when teleconverters are used with the AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor
105mm f/2.8G IF-ED.
Accessory

Maximum
aperture of
lens

Focus points

f/4 or
TC-14E, faster
TC-14E II
f/5.6

f/2.8 or
faster
TC-17E II

Maximum
aperture of
lens
f/2.8 or
faster

TC-20E,
TC-20E II,
f/4
TC-20E III
f/5.6
TC-800f/5.6
1.25E ED

Focus points

—2
1

f/4
f/5.6

Accessory

—2

1 Single point AF is used when 3D-tracking or auto-area AF is selected for
AF-area mode (0 100).
2 Autofocus not available.
3 Focus data for focus points other than the center focus point are obtained
from line sensors.

n
404

Compatible Non-CPU Lenses
Non-CPU lens data (0 235) can be used to enable many of the features
available with CPU lenses, including color matrix metering; if no data are
provided, center-weighted metering will be used in place of color matrix
metering, while if the maximum aperture is not provided, the camera
aperture display will show the number of stops from maximum aperture
and the actual aperture value must be read off the lens aperture ring.

Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses
The following can NOT be used with the D4S:

• TC-16A AF teleconverter
• Non-AI lenses
• Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing
unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6,
800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11)
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6,
8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)
• 2.1cm f/4
• Extension Ring K2
• 180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers
174041–174180)
• 360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers
174031–174127)
• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers
280001–300490)

• AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm
f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED,
AF Teleconverter TC-16)
• PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900
or earlier)
• PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers
851001–906200)
• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers
142361–143000)
• Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers
200111–200310)

n
405

Calculating Angle of View
The D4S can be used with Nikon lenses for 35 mm (135) format cameras.
If Auto DX crop is on (0 86) and a 35 mm format lens is attached, the
angle of view will be the same as a frame of 35 mm film (36.0 × 23.9 mm);
if a DX lens is attached, the angle of view will automatically be adjusted
to 23.4 × 15.5 mm (DX format).
To choose an angle of view different from that of the current lens, turn
Auto DX crop off and select from FX (36×24), 1.2× (30×20),
DX (24×16), and 5 : 4 (30×24). If a 35 mm format lens is attached, the
angle of view could be reduced by 1.5 × by selecting DX (24×16) or by
1.2 × by selecting 1.2× (30×20), to expose a smaller area, or the aspect
ratio could be changed by selecting 5 : 4 (30×24).
FX (36×24) picture size (36.0 × 23.9 mm,
equivalent to 35 mm format camera)
1.2× (30×20) picture size
(29.9 × 19.9 mm)
DX (24×16) picture size
(23.4 × 15.5 mm, equivalent to DX
format camera)
Lens

5 : 4 (30×24) picture size
(29.9 × 23.9 mm)

Picture diagonal
Angle of view (FX (36×24);
35 mm format)
Angle of view (1.2× (30×20))
Angle of view (DX (24×16); DX format)
Angle of view (5 : 4 (30×24))

n
406

Calculating Angle of View (Continued)
The DX (24×16) angle of view is about 1.5 times smaller than the 35 mm
format angle of view, while the 1.2× (30×20) angle of view is about 1.2
times smaller and the 5 : 4 (30×24) angle of view is about 1.1 times
smaller. To calculate the focal length of lenses in 35 mm format when
DX (24×16) is selected, multiply the focal length of the lens by about
1.5, by about 1.2 when is 1.2× (30×20) selected, or by about 1.1 when
5 : 4 (30×24) is selected (for example, the effective focal length of a
50mm lens in 35 mm format would be 75 mm when DX (24×16) is
selected, 60 mm when 1.2× (30×20) is selected, or 55 mm when
5 : 4 (30×24) is selected).

n
407

Other Accessories
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for
the D4S.
• Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL18a (0 21, 24): EN-EL18
batteries can also be used. Additional EN-EL18a batteries
are available from local retailers and Nikon service
representatives.
• Battery Charger MH-26a (0 21, 459): The MH-26a can be used
Power sources to recharge and calibrate EN-EL18a and EN-EL18 batteries.
• Power Connector EP-6, AC Adapter EH-6b: These accessories can
be used to power the camera for extended periods (EH-6a
and EH-6 AC adapters can also be used). The EP-6 is
required to connect the EH-6b to the camera; see
page 414 for details.
• Filters intended for special-effects photography may
interfere with autofocus or the electronic rangefinder.
• The D4S can not be used with linear polarizing filters. Use
the C-PL or C-PLII circular polarizing filter instead.
• Use NC filters to protect the lens.
• To prevent ghosting, use of a filter is not recommended
Filters
when the subject is framed against a bright light, or when
a bright light source is in the frame.
• Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters
with exposure factors (filter factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48,
Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8, ND8S,
ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). See the filter manual for
details.

n
408

• Wireless Transmitter WT-4: Connects the camera to wireless
and Ethernet networks. The photographs on the camera
memory card can be copied to a computer for long-term
storage. The camera can also be controlled from any
computer on the network using Camera Control Pro 2
(available separately).
• Wireless Transmitter WT-5: Connect the WT-5 to the camera’s
peripheral connector to upload pictures over a wireless
network, to control the camera from a computer running
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately), or to take and
browse pictures remotely from a computer or iPhone.
LAN adapters
• Communication Unit UT-1: When connected to the camera
(0 276)
using the USB cable supplied with the unit, the UT-1 can
be used to connect to Ethernet networks (or, with a WT-5,
to wireless networks) and upload pictures to an ftp server
or control the camera remotely using optional
Camera Control Pro 2 software.
Note: An Ethernet or wireless network and some basic network
knowledge is required when using a communication unit or
wireless transmitter. Be sure to upgrade the software supplied
with the communication unit or wireless transmitter to the
latest version.

n
409

Viewfinder
eyepiece
accessories

HDMI cables
(0 285)
PC card
adapters

n
410

• Rubber Eyecup DK-19: The DK-19 makes the image in the
viewfinder easier to see, preventing eye fatigue.
• Diopter-Adjustment Viewfinder Lens DK-17C: To accommodate
individual differences in vision, viewfinder lenses are
available with diopters of –3, –2, 0, +1, and +2 m–1. Use
diopter adjustment lenses only if the desired focus can
not be achieved with the built-in diopter adjustment
control (–3 to +1 m–1). Test diopter adjustment lenses
before purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be
achieved.
• Magnifying Eyepiece DK-17M: The DK-17M magnifies the view
through the viewfinder by approximately 1.2 × for greater
precision when framing.
• Eyepiece Magnifier DG-2: The DG-2 magnifies the scene at the
center of the viewfinder for more accurate focus. DK-18
eyepiece adapter (available separately) required.
• Eyepiece Adapter DK-18: The DK-18 is used when attaching
the DG-2 magnifier or DR-3 right-angle viewing
attachment to the D4S.
• Antifog Finder Eyepiece DK-14/Antifog Finder Eyepiece DK-17A:
These viewfinder eyepieces prevent fogging in humid or
cold conditions.
• Right-Angle Viewing Attachment DR-5/Right-Angle Viewing
Attachment DR-4: The DR-5 and DR-4 attach to the
viewfinder eyepiece at a right angle, allowing the image in
the viewfinder to be viewed from above when the camera
is in the horizontal shooting position. The DR-5 supports
diopter adjustment and can also magnify the view
through the viewfinder by 2 × for greater precision when
framing (note that the edges of the frame will not be
visible when the view is magnified).
HDMI Cable HC-E1: An HDMI cable with a type C connector for
connection to the camera and a type A connector for
connection to HDMI devices.
PC Card Adapter EC-AD1: The EC-AD1 PC card adapter allows
Type I CompactFlash memory cards to be inserted in
PCMCIA card slots.

Software

• Capture NX 2: A complete photo editing package with such
advanced editing features as selection control points and
an auto retouch brush.
• Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a
computer and save photographs directly to the computer
hard disk. When Camera Control Pro 2 is used to capture
photographs directly to the computer, a PC connection
indicator (c) will appear in the top control panel.
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software; see the websites
listed on page xx for the latest information on supported
operating systems. At default settings, Nikon
Message Center 2 will periodically check for updates to Nikon
software and firmware while you are logged in to an account
on the computer and the computer is connected to the
Internet. A message is automatically displayed when an
update is found.

Body caps

Wireless
remote
controllers

Body Cap BF-1B/Body Cap BF-1A: The body cap keeps the mirror,
viewfinder screen, and low-pass filter free of dust when a
lens is not in place.
• Wireless Remote Controller WR-R10/WR-T10: When a WR-R10
wireless remote controller is attached to ten-pin remote
terminal using a WR-A10 adapter, the camera can be
controlled wirelessly using a WR-T10 wireless remote
controller.
• Wireless Remote Controller WR-1: WR-1 units are used with
WR-R10 or WR-T10 wireless remote controllers or with
other WR-1 remote controllers, with the WR-1 units
functioning as either transmitters or receivers. For
example, a WR-1 can be attached to the ten-pin remote
terminal and used as a receiver, allowing the shutter to be
released remotely by another WR-1 acting as a
transmitter.

n
411

Remote
terminal
accessories

n
412

The D4S is equipped with a ten-pin remote terminal (0 2)
for remote control and automatic photography. The
terminal is provided with a cap, which protects the contacts
when the terminal is not in use. The following accessories
can be used (all lengths are approximate):
• Remote Cord MC-22/MC-22A: Remote shutter release with blue,
yellow, and black terminals for connection to a remote
shutter-triggering device, allowing control via sound or
electronic signals (length 1 m/3 ft 3 in.).
• Remote Cord MC-30/MC-30A: Remote shutter release; can be
used to reduce camera shake (length 80 cm/2 ft 7 in.).
• Remote Cord MC-36/MC-36A: Remote shutter release; can be
used for interval timer photography or to reduce camera
shake or keep the shutter open during a time exposure
(length 85 cm/2 ft 9 in.).
• Extension Cord MC-21/MC-21A: Can be connected to ML-3 or
MC-series 20, 22, 22A, 23, 23A, 25, 25A, 30, 30A, 36, or 36A.
Only one MC-21 or MC-21A can be used at a time (length
3 m/9 ft 10 in.).
• Connecting Cord MC-23/MC-23A: Connects two cameras with
ten-pin remote terminals for simultaneous operation
(length 40 cm/1 ft 4 in.).
• Adapter Cord MC-25/MC-25A: Ten-pin to two-pin adapter cord
for connection to devices with two-pin terminals,
including the MW-2 radio control set, MT-2
intervalometer, and ML-2 modulite control set (length
20 cm/8 in.).
• WR Adapter WR-A10: An adapter used to connect WR-R10
wireless remote controllers to cameras with ten-pin
remote terminals.
• GPS Unit GP-1/GP-1A (0 238): Record latitude, longitude,
altitude, and UTC time with pictures.

Remote
terminal
accessories

Microphones

• GPS Adapter Cord MC-35 (0 238): This 35 cm (1 ft 2 in.) cable
connects the camera to older GARMIN eTrex- and gekoseries GPS units that conform to version 2.01 or 3.01 of the
National Marine Electronics Association NMEA0183 data
format. Only models that support PC interface cable
connections are supported; the MC-35 can not be used to
connect GPS units via USB. The units connect to the
MC-35 using a cable with a D-sub 9-pin connector
provided by the manufacturer of the GPS device; see the
MC-35 instruction manual for details. Before turning the
camera on, set the GPS device to NMEA mode
(4800 baud); for more information, see the
documentation provided with the GPS device.
• Modulite Remote Control Set ML-3: Allows infrared remote
control at ranges of up to 8 m (26 ft 3 in.).
Stereo Microphone ME-1: Connect the ME-1 to the camera
microphone jack to record stereo sound while reducing the
noise caused by lens vibration being recorded with movies
during autofocus (0 75).

Availability may vary with country or region. See our website or brochures for
the latest information.

The UF-2 Connector Cover for Stereo Mini-Plug Cables
The camera comes with a UF-2 connector cover for the stereo mini-plug
cable on the optional ME-1 stereo microphone (0 i) that prevents the
cable connecting the ME-1 to the camera being accidentally
disconnected. The cover attaches as shown.

n
413

Attaching a Power Connector and AC
Adapter
Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power connector
and AC adapter.

Remove the battery-chamber cover.
Lift the battery-chamber cover latch, turn
it to the open (A) position (q), and
remove the BL-6 battery-chamber cover
(w).

Connect the AC adapter.
Pass the DC cable over the power
connector cable guide (q) and slide it
down until it is at the bottom of the slot,
and then insert the DC plug into the DC IN
connector (w).

Insert the power connector.
Fully insert the power connector into the
battery chamber as shown.

n
414

Latch the power
connector.
Rotate the latch to the closed
position (q) and fold it down
as shown (w). To prevent the
power connector being
dislodged during operation, be sure that it is securely latched.
The battery level is not displayed in the top control panel while
the camera is powered by the AC adapter and power
connector.

n
415

Caring for the Camera
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove
the battery and store it in a cool, dry area with the terminal cover in
place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, wellventilated area. Do not store your camera with naphtha or
camphor moth balls or in locations that:
• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic
fields, such as televisions or radios
• are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below
–10 °C (14 °F)

Cleaning
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with
a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or
seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in
Camera body
distilled water and dry thoroughly. Important: Dust or other
foreign matter inside the camera may cause damage not
covered under warranty.
These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust and
Lens, mirror, lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can
and
vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To remove
viewfinder fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens
cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care.
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing
fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a
Monitor
soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure, as this
could result in damage or malfunction.

Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.

n
416

The Low-Pass Filter
The image sensor that acts as the camera’s picture element is fitted
with a low-pass filter to prevent moiré. If you suspect that dirt or
dust on the filter is appearing in photographs, you can clean the
filter using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu. The
filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option, or
cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is
turned on or off.

❚❚ “Clean Now”

Select Clean image
sensor in the setup
menu.

G button

Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Clean image
sensor in the setup menu
and press 2.

Place the Camera Base Down
Image sensor cleaning is most effective when the
camera is placed base down as shown at right.

n
417

Select Clean now.
Highlight Clean now and
press J.
The camera will check the
image sensor and then
begin cleaning. During
cleaning, 1 flashes in
the top control panel and
other operations can not
be performed. Do not
remove or disconnect the
power source until
cleaning is complete and
1 is no longer
displayed.

J button

❚❚ “Clean at Startup/Shutdown”
Choose from the following options:
Option

Description
The image sensor is automatically cleaned each time
5 Clean at startup
the camera is turned on.
Clean at
The image sensor is automatically cleaned during
6
shutdown
shutdown each time the camera is turned off.
Clean at startup The image sensor is cleaned automatically at startup
7
& shutdown
and at shutdown.
Cleaning off
Automatic image sensor cleaning off.

n
418

Select Clean at startup/
shutdown.
Display the Clean image
sensor menu as described in
Step 2 on the previous page.
Highlight Clean at startup/
shutdown and press 2.

Select an option.
Highlight an option and
press J.

J button

Image Sensor Cleaning
Using camera controls during startup interrupts image sensor cleaning.

Cleaning is performed by vibrating the low-pass filter. If dust can not be
fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu, clean
the image sensor manually or consult a Nikon-authorized service
representative.
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image
sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s
internal circuitry. Cleaning can be performed again after a short wait.

n
419

❚❚ Manual Cleaning
If foreign matter can not be removed from the low-pass filter using
the Clean image sensor (0 417) option in the setup menu, the
filter can be cleaned manually as described below. Note, however,
that the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged. Nikon
recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized
service personnel.

Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter.
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or
cleaning the low-pass filter. Turn the camera off and insert a
fully-charged battery or connect an optional AC adapter and
power connector. The Lock mirror up for cleaning option is
only available in the setup menu at battery levels over J.

Remove the lens.
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.

Select Lock mirror up
for cleaning.
Turn the camera on and
press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Lock mirror up
for cleaning in the setup
menu and press 2.

n
420

G button

Press J.
The message shown at right will be
displayed in the monitor and a row of
dashes will appear in the top control
panel and viewfinder. To restore normal
operation without inspecting the lowpass filter, turn the camera off.

Raise the mirror.
Press the shutter-release
button all the way down.
The mirror will be raised and
the shutter curtain will open,
revealing the low-pass filter. The display in the viewfinder and
rear control panel will turn off and the row of dashes in the top
control panel will flash.

Examine the low-pass filter.
Holding the camera so that light falls on
the low-pass filter, examine the filter for
dust or lint. If no foreign objects are
present, proceed to Step 8.

n
421

Clean the filter.
Remove any dust and lint from the filter
with a blower. Do not use a blower-brush,
as the bristles could damage the filter.
Dirt that can not be removed with a
blower can only be removed by Nikonauthorized service personnel. Under no circumstances should
you touch or wipe the filter.

Turn the camera off.
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter
curtain will close. Replace the lens or body cap.

n
422

Use a Reliable Power Source
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers
off while the mirror is raised, the curtain will close automatically. To
prevent damage to the curtain, observe the following precautions:
• Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source
while the mirror is raised.
• If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and
the self-timer lamp will flash to warn that the shutter curtain will close
and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes. End cleaning
or inspection immediately.

Foreign Matter on the Low-Pass Filter
Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from
coming into contact with the low-pass filter during production and
shipping. The D4S, however, is designed to be used with
interchangeable lenses, and foreign matter may enter the camera when
lenses are removed or exchanged. Once inside the camera, this foreign
matter may adhere to the low-pass filter, where it may appear in
photographs taken under certain conditions. To protect the camera
when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with
the camera, being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign
matter that may be adhering to the body cap. Avoid exchanging lenses
in dusty environments.
Should foreign matter find its way onto the low-pass filter, clean the filter
as described above, or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service
personnel. Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on
the filter can be retouched using Capture NX 2 (available separately;
0 411) or the clean image options available in some third-party imaging
applications.

Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or
Nikon service representative once every one to two years, and that it be
serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to these
services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly
recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories
regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional flash units,
should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced.

n
423

Replacing the Clock Battery
The camera clock is powered by a CR1616 lithium battery with a life
of about two years. If the B icon is displayed in the top control
panel while the standby timer is on, the battery is running low and
needs to be replaced. When the battery is exhausted, the B icon
will flash while the standby timer is on. Photographs can still be
taken but will not be stamped with the correct time and date.
Replace the battery as described below.

Remove the main battery.
The clock battery chamber is located on the roof of the main
battery chamber. Turn the camera off and remove the
EN-EL18a battery.

Open the clock battery chamber.
Slide the clock battery chamber cover
toward the front of the main battery
chamber.

3
4

Remove the clock battery.
Insert the replacement battery.
Insert a new CR1616 lithium battery so
that the positive side (the side marked
with “+” and the battery name) is visible.

n
424

Close the clock battery chamber.
Slide the clock battery chamber cover
towards the back of the main battery
chamber until it clicks into place.

Replace the main battery.
Reinsert the EN-EL18a.

Set the camera clock.
Set the camera to the current date and
time (0 30). Until the date and time have
been set, the B icon will flash in the top
control panel.

ACAUTION
Use only CR1616 lithium batteries. Using another type of battery could
cause an explosion. Dispose of used batteries as directed.

Inserting the Clock Battery
Insert the clock battery in the correct orientation. Inserting the battery
incorrectly could not only prevent the clock from functioning but could
damage the camera.

n
425

Caring for the Camera and
Battery: Cautions
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or
vibration.
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if immersed
in water or exposed to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the internal
mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such as
those that occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day,
can cause condensation inside the device. To prevent condensation, place
the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden
changes in temperature.
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the
vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or
magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by
equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor,
damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal
circuitry.
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun
or other strong light source for an extended period. Intense light may
cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in
photographs.

n
426

Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove
dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the
camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth
lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly. In
rare instances, static electricity may cause the LCD displays to light up or
go dark. This does not indicate a malfunction, and the display will soon
return to normal.
The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust and lint should be gently
removed with a blower. When using an aerosol blower, keep the can
vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove fingerprints and other
stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth
and wipe the lens carefully.
See “The Low-Pass Filter” (0 417) for information on cleaning the low-pass
filter.
Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts clean.
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily
damaged. Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the
curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air currents
from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear the curtain.
The shutter curtain may appear to be unevenly colored, but this has no
affect on pictures and does not indicate a malfunction.
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, wellventilated area. If you are using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to
prevent fire. If the product will not be used for an extended period,
remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic
bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a
plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate. Note that
desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be
replaced at regular intervals.
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a
month. Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before
putting it away.
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before
putting the battery away.

n
427

Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not
unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or while
images are being recorded or deleted. Forcibly cutting power in these
circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory
or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of power, avoid
carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is
connected.
Dry the accessory shoe cover: If the camera is used in the rain, water may
penetrate the supplied BS-2 accessory shoe cover. Remove and dry the
accessory shoe cover after using the camera in the rain.
Notes on the monitor: The monitor is constructed with extremely high
precision; at least 99.99% of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01%
being missing or defective. Hence while these displays may contain pixels
that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black), this is not
a malfunction and has no effect on images recorded with the device.
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or
malfunction. Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower.
Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois
leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury
from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching
the skin or entering the eyes and mouth.

n
428

Batteries: Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Observe the
following precautions when handling batteries:
• Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
• Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.
• Keep the battery terminals clean.
• Turn the product off before replacing the battery.
• Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and
replace the terminal cover. These devices draw minute amounts of
charge even when off and could draw the battery down to the point that
it will no longer function. If the battery will not be used for some time,
insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it from the camera
for storage. The battery should be stored in a cool location with an
ambient temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F; avoid hot or
extremely cold locations). Repeat this process at least once every six
months.

• Turning the camera on or off repeatedly when the battery is fully
discharged will shorten battery life. Batteries that have been fully
discharged must be charged before use.
• The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in
use. Attempting to charge the battery while the internal temperature is
elevated will impair battery performance, and the battery may not
charge or charge only partially. Wait for the battery to cool before
charging.
• Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair
battery performance.
• A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when
used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement.
Purchase a new EN-EL18a battery.
• Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on important
occasions, ready a spare battery and keep it fully charged. Depending on
your location, it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries on
short notice. Note that on cold days, the capacity of batteries tends to
decrease. Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking photographs
outside in cold weather. Keep a spare battery in a warm place and
exchange the two as necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may
recover some of its charge.
• Used batteries are a valuable resource; recycle in accord with local
regulations.

n
429

Defaults
The default settings for the options in the camera menus are listed
below. For information on two-button reset, see page 211.

❚❚ Playback Menu Defaults
Option
Playback folder (0 290)
Image review (0 295)
After delete (0 296)
Rotate tall (0 296)
Slide show (0 297)
Image type (0 297)
Frame interval (0 297)
Audio playback (0 298)

Default
NCD4S
Off
Show next
On
Still images and movies
2s
On

❚❚ Shooting Menu Defaults 1
Option
Extended menu banks (0 301)
File naming (0 304)
Primary slot selection (0 96)
Secondary slot function (0 96)
Image quality (0 90)
JPEG/TIFF recording (0 304)
Image size (0 94)
JPEG compression (0 92)
NEF (RAW) recording (0 304)
Image size (0 95)
NEF (RAW) compression (0 92)
NEF (RAW) bit depth (0 92)
Image area (0 85)
Choose image area (0 86)
Auto DX crop (0 86)

n
430

Default
Off
DSC
XQD card slot
Overflow
JPEG normal
Large
Size priority
Large
Lossless compressed
14-bit
FX (36×24)
On

Option
White balance (0 155)
Fine-tuning (0 158)
Choose color temp. (0 161)
Preset manual (0 164)
Set Picture Control (0 177)
Color space (0 305)
Active D-Lighting (0 188)
HDR (high dynamic range) (0 190)
HDR mode (0 191)
Exposure differential (0 192)
Smoothing (0 192)
Vignette control (0 306)
Auto distortion control (0 307)
Long exposure NR (0 308)
High ISO NR (0 308)
ISO sensitivity settings (0 117)
ISO sensitivity (0 117)
Auto ISO sensitivity control (0 119)
Multiple exposure (0 214) 2
Multiple exposure mode (0 215)
Number of shots (0 216)
Auto gain (0 217)
Interval timer shooting (0 221)
Start options (0 222)
Interval (0 222)
No. of intervals×shots/interval
(0 223)
Exposure smoothing (0 223)
Live view photography (0 60)
Time-lapse photography (0 229)
Interval (0 230)
Shooting time (0 230)
Exposure smoothing (0 230)

Default
Auto > Normal
A-B: 0, G-M: 0
5000 K
d-1
Standard
sRGB
Off
Off
Auto
Normal
Normal
Off
Off
Normal
100
Off
Off
2
On
Off
Now
0
0001×1
Off
Quiet
Off
5s
25 minutes
On

n
431

Option
Movie settings (0 74)
Frame size/frame rate (0 74)
Movie quality (0 74)
Microphone sensitivity (0 75)
Frequency response (0 75)
Wind noise reduction (0 75)
Destination (0 75)

Default

1920 × 1080; 60p
High quality
Auto sensitivity
Wide range
Off
XQD card slot
ISO sensitivity (mode M): 200
Movie ISO sensitivity settings
Auto ISO control (mode M): Off
(0 76)
Maximum sensitivity: 25600
1 Default settings can be restored using Shooting menu bank (0 301).
With the exceptions of Extended menu banks, Multiple exposure,
Interval timer shooting, and Time-lapse photography, only settings
in the current shooting menu bank will be reset.
2 Applies to all banks. Shooting menu reset is not available while
shooting is in progress.

n
432

❚❚ Custom Settings Menu Defaults *
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5

a6
a7
a8
a9
a10
a12
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7

c1
c2
c3

Option
AF-C priority selection (0 313)
AF-S priority selection (0 314)
Focus tracking with lock-on (0 314)
AF activation (0 315)
Focus point illumination (0 315)
Manual focus mode
Continuous mode
Focus point brightness
Dynamic-area AF display
Group-area AF illumination
Focus point wrap-around (0 316)
Number of focus points (0 316)
Assign AF-ON button (0 317)
Assign AF-ON button (vert.) (0 318)
Store by orientation (0 319)
Autofocus mode restrictions (0 320)
ISO sensitivity step value (0 321)
EV steps for exposure cntrl (0 321)
Exp./flash comp. step value (0 321)
Easy exposure compensation (0 322)
Matrix metering (0 323)
Center-weighted area (0 323)
Fine-tune optimal exposure (0 323)
Matrix metering
Center-weighted metering
Spot metering
Shutter-release button AE-L (0 324)
Standby timer (0 324)
Self-timer (0 325)
Self-timer delay
Number of shots
Interval between shots

Default
Release
Focus
3 (Normal)
Shutter/AF-ON
On
On
Normal
Off
g (Squares)
No wrap
51 points
AF-ON
AF-ON
Off
No restrictions
1/3 step
1/3 step
1/3 step
Off
Face detection on
ø 12 mm
0
0
0
Off
6s
10 s
1
0.5 s

n
433

Option
c4 Monitor off delay (0 325)
Playback
Menus
Information display
Image review
Live view
d1 Beep (0 326)
Volume
Pitch
d2 Continuous shooting speed (0 326)
Continuous high-speed
Continuous low-speed
d3 Max. continuous release (0 327)
d4 Exposure delay mode (0 327)
d5 File number sequence (0 328)
d6 Viewfinder grid display (0 329)
d7 Control panel/viewfinder (0 329)
Rear control panel
Viewfinder display
d8 Screen tips (0 329)
d9 Information display (0 330)
d10 LCD illumination (0 330)
e1 Flash sync speed (0 331)
e2 Flash shutter speed (0 332)
e3 Optional flash (0 332)
e4 Exposure comp. for flash (0 333)
e5 Modeling flash (0 333)
e6 Auto bracketing set (0 333)
e7 Auto bracketing (mode M) (0 334)
e8 Bracketing order (0 334)

n
434

Default
10 s
1 min
10 s
4s
10 min
Off
Low
11 fps
5 fps
200
Off
On
Off
ISO sensitivity
Frame count
On
Auto
Off
1/250 s
1/60 s
TTL
Entire frame
On
AE & flash
Flash/speed
MTR > under > over

Option
f1 Multi selector center button (0 335)
Shooting mode (0 335)
Playback mode (0 336)
Live view (0 336)
f2 Multi selector (0 336)
f3 Assign Fn button (0 337)
Press (0 337)
Press + command dials (0 341)
f4 Assign preview button (0 342)
Press
Press + command dials
f5 Assign sub-selector (0 342)
f6 Assign sub-selector center (0 342)
Press
Press + command dials
f7 Assign Fn button (vert.) (0 343)
Press
Press + command dials
f8 Shutter spd & aperture lock (0 343)
Shutter speed lock
Aperture lock
f9 Assign BKT button (0 344)
f10 Customize command dials
Reverse rotation (0 345)
Change main/sub (0 345)
Aperture setting (0 345)
Menus and playback (0 346)
Sub-dial frame advance (0 346)

Default
Select center focus point
Thumbnail on/off
Select center focus point
Do nothing
None
Choose image area
Preview
None
Focus point selection
AE/AF lock
None
AE/AF lock
None
Off
Off
Auto bracketing
Exposure compensation: U
Shutter speed/aperture: U
Exposure setting: Off
Autofocus setting: Off
Sub-command dial
Off
10 frames

n
435

Option
Default
Release button to use dial (0 347)
No
Slot empty release lock (0 347)
Enable release
Reverse indicators (0 347)
Assign multi selector (vert.) (0 348)
Same as multi selector
Playback zoom (0 348)
Use X and W
Assign movie record button (0 349)
Press + command dials
None
f17 Live view button options (0 349)
Enable
f18 Assign remote (WR) Fn button (0 350)
None
f19 Lens focus function buttons (0 351)
AF lock only
g1 Assign Fn button (0 353)
Press
None
Press + command dials
None
g2 Assign preview button (0 355)
Press
Index marking
Press + command dials
None
g3 Assign sub-selector center (0 356)
Press
AE/AF lock
Press + command dials
None
g4 Assign shutter button (0 357)
Take photos
* Defaults for the current Custom Settings bank can be restored using
Custom settings bank (0 311).
f11
f12
f13
f14
f15
f16

n
436

❚❚ Setup Menu Defaults
Option
Monitor brightness (0 359)
Manual
Monitor color balance (0 360)
Clean image sensor (0 417)
Clean at startup/shutdown (0 418)
Flicker reduction (0 363)
Time zone and date (0 363)
Daylight saving time
Auto image rotation (0 364)
Voice memo options
Voice memo (0 261)
Voice memo overwrite (0 262)
Voice memo button (0 262)
Audio output (0 267)
HDMI (0 286)
Output resolution
Advanced
Output range
Output display size
Live view on-screen display
Dual monitor
Location data (0 240)
Standby timer
Set clock from satellite

Default
Manual
0
A-B: 0, G-M: 0
Clean at startup & shutdown
Auto
Off
On
Off
Disable
Press and hold
Speaker/headphones
Auto
Auto
100%
On
On
Enable
Yes

n
437

Exposure Program
The exposure program for programmed auto (0 127) is shown in
the following graph:

f/1

16 15

f/1.4

17
18
19
20

f/5.6
f/8

f/1.4 − f/16

Aperture

f/2.8

16
1
/3

f/2

f/4

f/11

f/16

f/22
f/32

-1

-3

-2

]
V

-4

ISO 100; lens with maximum aperture of f/1.4 and minimum
aperture of f/16 (e.g., AF-S NIKKOR 50mm f/1.4G)

30" 15" 8" 4"

1/2

1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 1/8000

Shutter speed

The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity;
the above graph assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 100 equivalent.
When matrix metering is used, values over 16 1/3 EV are reduced to
16 1/3 EV.

n
438

Troubleshooting
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of
common problems below before consulting your retailer or Nikonauthorized service representative.

Battery/Display
The camera is on but does not respond: Wait for recording to end. If the problem
persists, turn the camera off. If the camera does not turn off, remove and
reinsert the battery or, if you are using an AC adapter, disconnect and
reconnect the AC adapter. Note that although any data currently being
recorded will be lost, data that have already been recorded will not be
affected by removing or disconnecting the power source.
Viewfinder is out of focus: Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional diopter
adjustment lenses (0 38, 410).
Viewfinder is dark: Insert a fully-charged battery (0 21, 40).
Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2
(Standby timer) or c4 (Monitor off delay) (0 324, 325).
Displays in control panels or viewfinder are unresponsive and dim: The response
times and brightness of these displays vary with temperature.

Shooting
Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.
Shutter-release disabled:
• Memory card is full (0 32, 41).
• Release locked is selected for Custom Setting f12 (Slot empty release
lock; 0 347) and no memory card is inserted (0 32).
• Aperture ring for CPU lens not locked at highest f-number (does not
apply to type G and E lenses). If B is displayed in the top control panel,
select Aperture ring for Custom Setting f10 (Customize command
dials) > Aperture setting to use lens aperture ring to adjust aperture
(0 345).
• Exposure mode f selected with A or % selected for shutter speed
(0 445).

n
439

Camera is slow to respond to shutter-release button: Select Off for Custom Setting
d4 (Exposure delay mode; 0 327).
Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous release
mode: Turn HDR off (0 190).
Photos are out of focus:
• Rotate focus-mode selector to AF (0 97).
• Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus lock
(0 105, 108).
Full range of shutter speeds not available: Flash in use. Flash sync speed can be
selected using Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed); when using
compatible flash units, choose 1/250 s (Auto FP) for full range of shutter
speeds (0 331).
Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Camera is in
focus mode AF-C: use the center of the sub-selector to lock focus (0 105).
Can not select focus point:
• Unlock focus selector lock (0 103).
• Auto-area or face-priority AF selected for AF-area mode; choose another
mode (0 53, 100).
• Camera is in playback mode (0 241).
• Menus are in use (0 289).
• Press shutter-release button halfway to start standby timer (0 44).
Can not select AF mode:
• Rotate focus-mode selector to AF (0 97).
• Select No restrictions for Custom Setting a12 (Autofocus mode
restrictions, 0 320).
Can not select AF-area mode: Rotate focus-mode selector to AF (0 97).
Image size can not be changed: Image quality set to NEF (RAW) (0 90).
Choose image size using NEF (RAW) recording > Image size option in
shooting menu.
Camera is slow to record photos: Turn long exposure noise reduction off
(0 308).
Flicker or banding appears during live view or movie recording: Choose an option for
Flicker reduction that matches the frequency of the local AC power
supply (0 363).

n
440

Bright bands appear during live view or movie recording: A flashing sign, flash, or
other light source with brief duration was used during live view or movie
recording.
Noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, lines, or reddish areas) appears in
photos:
• To reduce randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines, choose lower ISO
sensitivity or use high ISO noise reduction (0 117, 308).
• To reduce bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog at shutter
speeds slower than 1 s or to reduce reddish areas and other artifacts in
long time-exposures, enable long exposure noise reduction (0 308).
• Turn Active D-Lighting off to avoid heightening the effects of noise
(0 188).
Smudges appear in photographs: Clean front and rear lens elements. If problem
persists, perform image sensor cleaning (0 417).
Colors are unnatural:
• Adjust white balance to match light source (0 155).
• Adjust Set Picture Control settings (0 177).
Can not measure white balance: Subject is too dark or too bright (0 165).
Image can not be selected as source for preset white balance: Image was not created
with D4S (0 172).
White balance bracketing unavailable:
• NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option selected for image quality
(0 90).
• Multiple exposure mode is in effect (0 214).
Photographs and movies do not appear to have the same exposure as the preview shown
in the monitor during live view: Changes to monitor brightness during live view
photography and movie live view have no effect on images recorded with
the camera (0 57).
Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: A (auto) is selected for
sharpening, contrast, or saturation. For consistent results over a series of
photographs, choose another setting (0 181).
Metering can not be changed: Autoexposure lock is in effect (0 137).

n
441

Exposure compensation can not be used: Choose exposure mode e, f, or g
(0 125, 139).
Sound is not recorded with movies: Microphone off is selected for Movie
settings > Microphone sensitivity (0 75).

Playback
NEF (RAW) image is not played back: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF +
JPEG (0 91).
Can not view pictures recorded with other cameras: Pictures recorded with other
makes of camera may not be displayed correctly.
Some photos are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder
(0 290).
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:
• Select On for Rotate tall (0 296).
• Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0 364).
• Photo is displayed in image review (0 295).
• Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken (0 364).
Can not delete photo: Picture is protected. Remove protection (0 255).
Can not retouch picture: Photo can not be further edited with this camera
(0 376).
Message is displayed stating that no images are available for playback: Select All for
Playback folder (0 290).
Can not change print order: Memory card is full: delete photos (0 41, 257).
Can not print photos: NEF (RAW) and TIFF photos can not be printed by direct
USB connection. Transfer photos to computer and print using ViewNX 2
(supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 411). NEF (RAW)
photos can be saved in JPEG format using NEF (RAW) processing (0 387).
Photo is not displayed on high-definition video device: Confirm that HDMI cable
(available separately) is connected (0 285).
Photos are not displayed in Capture NX 2: Update to the latest version (0 411).

n
442

Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 does not have desired effect: Image sensor
cleaning changes the position of dust on the low-pass filter. Dust off
reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can
not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is
performed. Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning
is performed can not be used with photographs taken before image
sensor cleaning is performed (0 362).
Computer displays NEF (RAW) images differently from camera: Third-party software
does not display effects of Picture Controls, Active D-Lighting, or vignette
control. Use ViewNX 2 (supplied) or optional Nikon software such as
Capture NX 2 (available separately).
Can not transfer photos to computer: OS not compatible with camera or transfer
software. Use card reader to copy photos to computer (0 271).

Miscellaneous
Date of recording is not correct: Set camera clock (0 30).
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available at certain
combinations of settings or when no memory card is inserted. Note that
Battery info option is not available when camera is powered by an
optional power connector and AC adapter (0 365).

n
443

Error Messages
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in
the viewfinder, top control panel, and monitor.
Indicator
Control Viewpanel finder
B

(flashes)
H

Problem
Lens aperture ring is
not set to minimum
aperture.
Low battery.
• Battery exhausted.
• Battery can not be
used.

d
(flashes) (flashes)
H

(flashes)

n
444

—

• An extremely
exhausted
rechargeable Li-ion
battery or a thirdparty battery is
inserted in the
camera.
• High battery
temperature.

Solution
0
Set ring to minimum
aperture (highest
28
f-number).
Ready a fully-charged
40
spare battery.
• Recharge or replace
battery.
• Contact Nikonauthorized service
representative.
• Replace the battery, xix, 21,
or recharge the
24, 408
battery if the
rechargeable Li-ion
battery is exhausted.

• Remove battery and
wait for it to cool.

—

Camera clock is not set. Set camera clock.

No lens attached, or
non-CPU lens attached
without specifying
Aperture value will be
maximum aperture.
displayed if maximum
Aperture shown in
aperture is specified.
stops from maximum
aperture.

235

Indicator
Control ViewProblem
Solution
0
panel finder
2 4 Camera unable to focus Change composition or
—
43, 108
(flashes) using autofocus.
focus manually.
• Use a lower ISO
117
sensitivity.
• Use optional ND filter. 408
Subject too bright;
In exposure mode:
photo will be
f Increase shutter
128
overexposed.
speed
g Choose a smaller
129
(Exposure
aperture (higher
indicators and
f-number)
shutter speed
• Use a higher ISO
117
or aperture
sensitivity.
display flash)
• Use optional flash. In 195
exposure mode:
Subject too dark; photo
f Lower shutter
128
will be underexposed.
speed
g Choose a larger
129
aperture (lower
f-number)
Change shutter speed
A
A selected in
128,
or select manual
130
(flashes)
exposure mode f.
exposure mode.
Change shutter speed
%
% selected in
128,
or select manual
130
(flashes)
exposure mode f.
exposure mode.
1 k
Wait until processing is
Processing in progress.
—
(flashes) (flashes)
complete.
If indicator flashes for Check photo in
monitor; if
c
3s after flash fires,
199
—
(flashes) photo may be
underexposed, adjust
settings and try again.
underexposed.

n
445

Indicator
Control Viewpanel finder
Y
(flashes)

—

Problem
Flash unit that does not
support red-eye
reduction attached and
flash sync mode set to
red-eye reduction.

Solution

Change flash sync
mode or use flash unit
that supports red-eye
reduction.

197,
204

• Reduce quality or
90, 94
size.
257,
Memory insufficient to • Delete photographs
269
after copying
record further photos
n
j
important images to
i/j
at current settings, or
(flashes)
computer or other
(flashes)
camera has run out of
device.
file or folder numbers.
• Insert new memory
32
card.
Release shutter. If error
persists or appears
O
Camera malfunction. frequently, consult
—
(flashes)
Nikon-authorized
service representative.

n
446

The i and j Icons
These icons flash to show the card affected.

Indicator
Monitor

Control
panel

Solution
0
Turn camera off and
confirm that card is
32
correctly inserted.
• Use Nikon462
approved card.
• Check that contacts
—
are clean. If card is
damaged, contact
retailer or Nikonauthorized service
representative.
• Unable to create • Delete files or insert 32,
new folder.
new memory card
257,
after copying
269
important images
to computer or
other device.
Memory card has
Format memory card
not been
or insert new memory 32, 35
formatted for use
card.
in camera.

Problem
Camera cannot
No memory card. S detect memory
card.
• Error accessing
memory card.
This memory
card cannot be
used.
Card may be
damaged.
Insert
another card.

W,
R
i/j
(flashes)

This card is not
[C]
formatted.
(flashes)
Format the card.
Failed to update
flash unit
firmware.
Flash cannot be
used.
Contact a Nikonauthorized
service
representative.

—

Firmware for flash
Contact a Nikonunit mounted on
authorized service
camera was not
representative.
updated correctly.

—

n
447

Indicator
Monitor

n
448

Control
panel

Unable to start
live view. Please
wait.

—

Folder contains
no images.

—

All images are
hidden.

—

Cannot display
this file.

—

Cannot select
this file.

—

Check printer.

—

Solution
0
Wait for the internal
circuits to cool before
62, 73
resuming live view or
movie recording.
Select folder
No images on
containing images
memory card or in from Playback folder
32, 290
folder(s) selected menu or insert
for playback.
memory card
containing images.
No images can be
played back until
All photos in
another folder has
current folder are been selected or Hide 290
image used to allow
hidden.
at least one image to
be displayed.
File has been
created or
modified using a
File can not be played
—
computer or
back on camera.
different make of
camera, or file is
corrupt.
Selected image Images created with
can not be
other devices can not 376
retouched.
be retouched.
Check printer. To
resume, select
280 *
Printer error.
Continue (if
available).
Problem
The internal
temperature of
the camera is
high.

Indicator
Monitor

Control
panel

Problem
Paper in printer is
not of selected
size.
Paper is jammed
in printer.

Check paper.

—

Paper jam.

—

Out of paper.

—

Printer is out of
paper.

Check ink supply.

—

Ink error.

Out of ink.

—

Printer is out of
ink.

Solution
Insert paper of correct
size and select
Continue.
Clear jam and select
Continue.
Insert paper of
selected size and
select Continue.
Check ink. To resume,
select Continue.
Replace ink and select
Continue.

0
280 *
280 *
280 *
280 *
280 *

* See printer manual for more information.

n
449

Specifications
❚❚ Nikon D4S Digital Camera
Type
Type

Single-lens reflex digital camera

Lens mount

Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF contacts)

Effective angle of view

Nikon FX format

Effective pixels
Effective pixels

16.2 million

Image sensor
Image sensor

36.0 × 23.9 mm CMOS sensor

Total pixels

16.6 million

Dust-reduction System

Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data
(optional Capture NX 2 software required)

Storage
Image size (pixels)

n
450

• FX (36×24) image area
4928 × 3280 (#) 3696 × 2456 ($) 2464 × 1640 (%)
• 1.2× (30×20) image area
4096 × 2720 (#) 3072 × 2040 ($) 2048 × 1360 (%)
• DX (24×16) image area
3200 × 2128 (#) 2400 × 1592 ($) 1600 × 1064 (%)
• 5 : 4 (30×24) image area
4096 × 3280 (#) 3072 × 2456 ($) 2048 × 1640 (%)
• FX-format photographs taken in movie live view (16:9)
4928 × 2768 (#) 3696 × 2072 ($) 2464 × 1384 (%)
• DX-format photographs taken in movie live view (16:9)
3200 × 1792 (#) 2400 × 1344 ($) 1600 × 896 (%)
• FX-format photographs taken in movie live view (3:2)
4928 × 3280 (#) 3696 × 2456 ($) 2464 × 1640 (%)
• DX-format photographs taken in movie live view (3:2)
3200 × 2128 (#) 2400 × 1592 ($) 1600 × 1064 (%)
Note: A DX-based format is used for photographs taken
using the DX (24 × 16) 1.5× image area; an FX-based
format is used for all other photographs.

Storage
File format

• NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit, lossless compressed,
compressed, or uncompressed; small size available
(12-bit uncompressed only)
• TIFF (RGB)
• JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1 : 4),
normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic (approx. 1 : 16)
compression (Size priority); Optimal quality
compression available
• NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both
NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats

Picture Control System

Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait,
Landscape; selected Picture Control can be modified;
storage for custom Picture Controls

Media

XQD and Type I CompactFlash memory cards (UDMA
compliant)

Dual card slots

Either card can be used for primary or backup storage
or for separate storage of NEF (RAW) and JPEG images;
pictures can be copied between cards.

File system

DCF 2.0, DPOF, Exif 2.3, PictBridge

Viewfinder
Viewfinder

Eye-level pentaprism single-lens reflex viewfinder

Frame coverage

•
•
•
•

Magnification

Approx. 0.7 × (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, –1.0 m–1)

Eyepoint

18 mm (–1.0 m–1; from center surface of viewfinder
eyepiece lens)

Diopter adjustment

–3–+1 m–1

Focusing screen

Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VIII screen with AF
area brackets (framing grid can be displayed)

FX (36×24): Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical
1.2× (30×20): Approx. 97% horizontal and 97% vertical
DX (24×16): Approx. 97% horizontal and 97% vertical
5:4 (30×24): Approx. 97% horizontal and 100% vertical

n
451

Viewfinder
Reflex mirror

Quick return

Depth-of-field preview

Pressing Pv button stops lens aperture down to value
selected by user (g and h modes) or by camera (e and
f modes)

Lens aperture

Instant return, electronically controlled

Lens
Compatible lenses

Compatible with AF NIKKOR lenses, including type
G, E, and D lenses (some restrictions apply to PC
lenses) and DX lenses (using DX 24 × 16 1.5× image
area), AI-P NIKKOR lenses, and non-CPU AI lenses
(exposure modes g and h only). IX NIKKOR lenses,
lenses for the F3AF, and non-AI lenses can not be
used.
The electronic rangefinder can be used with lenses
that have a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster (the
electronic rangefinder supports the 11 focus points
with lenses that have a maximum aperture of f/8 or
faster).

Shutter
Type

Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane
shutter

Speed

1/8000

Flash sync speed

X= 1/250 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/250 s or slower

– 30 s in steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV, bulb, time, X250

Release
Release mode

Approximate frame
advance rate
Self-timer

n
452

S (single frame), CL (continuous low speed),
CH (continuous high speed), J (quiet shutter-release),
E (self-timer), MUP (mirror up)
Up to 10 fps (CL) or 10–11 fps (CH)
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures at intervals of 0.5, 1, 2,
or 3 s

Exposure
Metering

TTL exposure metering using RGB sensor with
approximately 91K (91,000) pixels
Metering method
• Matrix: 3D color matrix metering III (type G, E, and D
lenses); color matrix metering III (other CPU lenses);
color matrix metering available with non-CPU lenses
if user provides lens data
• Center-weighted: Weight of 75% given to 12 mm circle
in center of frame. Diameter of circle can be changed
to 8, 15, or 20 mm, or weighting can be based on
average of entire frame (non-CPU lenses use 12-mm
circle)
• Spot: Meters 4 mm circle (about 1.5% of frame)
centered on selected focus point (on center focus
point when non-CPU lens is used)
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4
• Matrix or center-weighted metering: –1–+20 EV
lens, 20 °C/68 °F)
• Spot metering: 2–20 EV
Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and AI
Exposure mode
Programmed auto with flexible program (e); shutterpriority auto (f ); aperture-priority auto (g); manual (h)
Exposure compensation –5 – +5 EV in increments of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV
Exposure bracketing
2–9 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, or 1 EV; 2–5 frames in
steps of 2 or 3 EV
Flash bracketing
2–9 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, or 1 EV; 2–5 frames in
steps of 2 or 3 EV
White balance
2–9 frames in steps of 1, 2, or 3
bracketing
ADL bracketing
2 frames using selected value for one frame or 3–5
frames using preset values for all frames
Exposure lock
Luminosity locked at detected value with the center of
the sub-selector
ISO sensitivity
ISO 100 – 25600 in steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV. Can also be
(Recommended
set to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO 50 equivalent)
Exposure Index)
below ISO 100 or to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, 1, 2, 3, or 4 EV
(ISO 409600 equivalent) above ISO 25600; auto ISO
sensitivity control available
Active D-Lighting
Can be selected from Auto, Extra high +2/+1, High,
Normal, Low, or Off

n
453

Focus
Autofocus

Nikon Advanced Multi-CAM 3500FX autofocus sensor
module with TTL phase detection, fine-tuning, and 51
focus points (including 15 cross-type sensors; f/8
supported by 11 sensors)

Detection range

–2 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)

Lens servo

• Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); continuous-servo
AF (AF-C); predictive focus tracking automatically
activated according to subject status
• Manual focus (M): Electronic rangefinder can be used

Focus point

Can be selected from 51 or 11 focus points

AF-area mode

Single-point AF, 9-, 21-, or 51- point dynamic-area AF,
3D-tracking, group-area AF, auto-area AF

Focus lock

Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button
halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing the center of
the sub-selector

Flash

n
454

Flash control

TTL: i-TTL flash control using RGB sensor with
approximately 91K (91,000) pixels is available with
SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-400, or
SB-300; i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used
with matrix and center-weighting metering, standard
i-TTL flash for digital SLR with spot metering

Flash mode

Front curtain sync, slow sync, rear-curtain sync, red-eye
reduction, red-eye reduction with slow sync, slow rearcurtain sync, off, Auto FP High-Speed Sync supported

Flash compensation

–3 – +1 EV in increments of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV

Flash-ready indicator

Lights when optional flash unit is fully charged; flashes
after flash is fired at full output

Accessory shoe

ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and
safety lock

Flash
Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with SB-910,
System (CLS)
SB-900, SB-800, or SB-700 as a master flash, and SB-600
or SB-R200 as remotes, or SU-800 as commander; Auto
FP High-Speed Sync and modeling illumination
supported with all CLS-compatible flash units except
SB-400 and SB-300; Flash Color Information
Communication and FV lock supported with all CLScompatible flash units
Sync terminal

ISO 519 sync terminal with locking thread

White balance
White balance

Auto (2 types), incandescent, fluorescent (7 types),
direct sunlight, flash, cloudy, shade, preset manual (up
to 6 values can be stored, spot white balance
measurement available during live view), choose color
temperature (2500 K–10000 K), all with fine-tuning.

Live view
Modes

Live view photography (quiet or silent), movie live view

Lens servo

• Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); full-time servo AF
(AF-F)
• Manual focus (M)

AF-area mode

Face-priority AF, wide-area AF, normal-area AF, subjecttracking AF

Autofocus

Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera selects
focus point automatically when face-priority AF or
subject-tracking AF is selected)

Movie
Metering

TTL exposure metering using main image sensor

Frame size (pixels) and
frame rate

• 1920 × 1080; 60 p (progressive), 50 p, 30 p, 25 p, 24 p
• 1920 × 1080 crop; 30 p, 25 p, 24 p
• 1280 × 720; 60 p, 50 p
• 640 × 424; 30 p, 25 p
Actual frame rates for 60 p, 50 p, 30 p, 25 p, and 24 p are
59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and 23.976 fps respectively; all
options support both ★ high and normal image
quality

n
455

Movie
File format

MOV

Video compression

H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding

Audio recording format Linear PCM
Audio recording device

Built-in monaural or external stereo microphone;
sensitivity adjustable

ISO sensitivity

• Exposure modes e, f, and g: Auto ISO sensitivity control
(ISO 200 to Hi 4) with selectable upper limit
• Exposure mode h: Auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 200
to Hi 4) available with selectable upper limit; manual
selection (ISO 200 to 25600 in steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV)
with additional options available equivalent to
approximately 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, 1, 2, 3, or 4 EV (ISO 409600
equivalent) above ISO 25600

Other options

Index marking, time-lapse photography

Monitor
Monitor

8-cm/3.2-in., approx. 921k-dot (VGA) TFT LCD with
170 ° viewing angle, approximately 100% frame
coverage, manual monitor brightness control, and
automatic monitor brightness control using ambient
brightness sensor

Playback
Playback

Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images) playback
with playback zoom, movie playback, photo and/or
movie slide shows, histogram display, highlights,
photo information, location data display, auto image
rotation, voice memo input and playback, and IPTC
information embedding and display

Interface

n
456

USB

Hi-Speed USB

HDMI output

Type C HDMI connector

Audio input

Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter; plug-in power
supported)

Audio output

Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter)

Interface
Ten-pin remote terminal Can be used to connect optional remote control,
optional WR-R10 (requires WR-A10 adapter) or WR-1
wireless remote controller, GP-1/GP-1A GPS unit, or
GPS device compliant with NMEA0183 version 2.01 or
3.01 (requires optional MC-35 GPS adapter cord and
cable with D-sub 9-pin connector)
Ethernet

RJ-45 connector
• Standards: IEEE 802.3ab (1000BASE-T)/IEEE 802.3u
(100BASE-TX)/IEEE 802.3 (10BASE-T)
• Data rates: 10/100/1000 Mbps with auto detect
(maximum logical data rates according to IEEE
standard; actual rates may differ)
• Port: 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T (AUTOMDIX)

Peripheral connector

For WT-5

Supported languages
Supported languages

Arabic, Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Czech,
Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German,
Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian,
Polish, Portuguese (Portugal and Brazil), Romanian,
Russian, Spanish, Swedish, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian

Power source
Battery

One rechargeable Li-ion EN-EL18a battery

AC adapter

EH-6b AC adapter; requires EP-6 power connector
(available separately)

Tripod socket
Tripod socket

1/4

in. (ISO 1222)

Dimensions/weight
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 160 × 156.5 × 90.5 mm (6.3 × 6.2 × 3.6 in.)
Weight

Approx. 1350 g (2 lb. 15.6 oz.) with battery and XQD
memory card but without body cap and accessory
shoe cover; approx. 1180 g/2 lb. 9.6 oz. (camera body
only)

n
457

Operating environment
Temperature

0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)

Humidity

85% or less (no condensation)

• Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged
battery operating at the temperature specified by the Camera and Imaging
Products Association (CIPA): 23 ±3 °C (73.4 ±5.4 °F).
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and
software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice.
Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes
that this manual may contain.
MH-26a battery charger
Rated input

AC 100 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

Charging output

DC 12.6 V/1.2 A

Applicable batteries

Nikon EN-EL18a rechargeable Li-ion batteries

Charging time per
battery

Approx. 2 hours and 35 minutes at ambient
temperature of 25 °C (77 °F) when no charge remains

Operating temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 160 × 85 × 50.5 mm (6.3 × 3.3 × 2 in.)
Length of power cable

Approx. 1.8 m/6 ft (U.S.A. and Canada) or 1.5 m/4.9 ft
(other countries)

Weight

• Approx. 285 g (10.1 oz), including two contact
protectors but excluding power cable
• Approx. 265 g (9.3 oz), excluding contact protectors
and power cable

EN-EL18a rechargeable Li-ion battery
Type

Rechargeable lithium-ion battery

Rated capacity

10.8 V/2500 mAh

Operating temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 56.5 × 27 × 82.5 mm (2.2 × 1.1 × 3.2 in.)
Weight

n
458

Approx. 160 g (5.6 oz), excluding terminal cover

Calibrating Batteries
The MH-26a battery charger is equipped with a battery calibration
feature. Calibrate the battery as required to ensure the accuracy of
the camera and charger battery level displays.
If the calibration lamp for the current
battery chamber flashes when a
battery is inserted, the battery needs
to be calibrated. To begin
calibration, press the calibration
button for the current chamber for
about a second. The time needed to
calibrate the battery is shown by the
charge and calibration lamps:

Approximate time needed
to recalibrate battery
Over 6 hours
4 – 6 hours
2 – 4 hours
Under 2 hours

Calibration
lamp
K (glows)
K (glows)
K (glows)
K (glows)

Chamber
lamps (green)

Charge lamps
(green)
Calibration
lamps (yellow)
Calibration
buttons

2h
K (glows)
K (glows)
K (glows)
JK (off )

Charge lamps
4h
K (glows)
K (glows)
JK (off)
JK (off)

6h
K (glows)
JK (off )
JK (off )
JK (off )

When calibration is complete, the calibration and charge lamps will
turn off and charging will begin immediately.
Although calibration is recommended for accurate measurement
of battery charge state, calibration need not be performed when
the calibration lamp flashes. Once begun, calibration can be
interrupted as desired.
• If the calibration button is not pressed while the calibration lamp
is flashing, normal charging will begin after about ten seconds.
• To interrupt calibration, press the calibration button again.
Calibration will end and charging will begin.

n
459

Battery Warning
If the chamber and calibration lamps flash on and off in sequence when
no battery is inserted, there is a problem with the charger. If the
chamber and calibration lamps flash on and off in sequence when a
battery is inserted, a problem has occurred with the battery or charger
during charging. Remove the battery, unplug the charger, and take the
battery and charger to a Nikon-authorized service representative for
inspection.

Charging and Calibrating Two Batteries
The MH-26a charges only one battery at a time. If batteries are inserted
in both chambers, they will be charged in the order inserted. If the
calibration button for the first battery is pressed, the second battery can
not be calibrated or charged until calibration and charging of the first
battery are complete.

n
460

Trademark Information
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc., in the
United States and/or other countries and is used under license. Mac
and OS X are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United States
and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are
either registered trademarks, or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States and/or other countries. PictBridge is a trademark.
XQD is a trademark of Sony Corporation. CompactFlash is a trademark
of SanDisk Corporation. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.

All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other
documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.

Supported Standards
• DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) is a
standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure
compatibility among different makes of camera.
• DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard
that allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the
memory card.
• Exif version 2.3: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File
Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.3, a standard in which
information stored with photographs is used for optimal color
reproduction when the images are output on Exif-compliant printers.
• PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital
camera and printer industries, allowing photographs to be output
directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer.
• HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for
multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices
capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMIcompliant devices via a single cable connection.

n
461

Approved Memory Cards
The camera accepts the XQD and CompactFlash memory cards
listed in the following sections. Other cards have not been tested.
For more details on the cards listed below, please contact the
manufacturer.

❚❚ XQD Memory Cards
The following XQD memory cards have been tested and approved
for use in the camera.
S series
Sony

H series
N series

Lexar
Media

n
462

Professional

QD-S32/QD-S32E
QD-S64/QD-S64E
QD-H16
QD-H32
QD-N32
QD-N64

32 GB
64 GB
16 GB
32 GB
32 GB
64 GB

1100 ×

32 GB, 64 GB

❚❚ CompactFlash Memory Cards
The following Type I CompactFlash memory cards have been
tested and approved for use in the camera. Type II cards and
microdrives can not be used.
Extreme Pro
Extreme
SanDisk

Extreme IV
Extreme III
Ultra II
Ultra
Standard

Professional UDMA
Lexar
Media

Professional

Platinum II

SDCFXPS
SDCFXP
SDCFXS
SDCFX
SDCFX4
SDCFX3
SDCFH
SDCFHS
SDCFHG
SDCFB
1000 ×
800 ×
600 ×
400 ×
300 ×
233 ×
133 ×
80 ×
200 ×
80 ×
60 ×

16 GB, 32 GB, 64 GB, 128 GB, 256 GB
16 GB, 32 GB, 64 GB, 128 GB
8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB, 64 GB, 128 GB
8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
2 GB, 4 GB
16 GB, 32 GB, 64 GB, 128 GB, 256 GB
8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB, 64 GB, 128 GB
8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB
8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB, 64 GB, 128 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB
2 GB, 4 GB
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
4 GB

Cards with write speeds of 30 MB/s (200×) or better are
recommended for movie recording. Slower speeds may interrupt
recording or cause jerky, uneven playback.

n
463

Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures
that can be stored on a 32 GB Sony S-series QD-S32E XQD card at
different image quality, image size, and image area settings.

❚❚ FX (36×24) Image Area *
Image quality
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
14-bit
TIFF (RGB)

JPEG fine 3

JPEG normal 3

JPEG basic 3

Image size

File size 1

No. of images 1 Buffer capacity 2

Large

15.4 MB

1100

133

Large

19.3 MB

859

Large

14.1 MB

1400

176

Large

17.3 MB

1200

104

Large

25.9 MB

1100

Small

13.1 MB

2100

Large

33.6 MB

859

Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small

48.9 MB
28.1 MB
13.1 MB
9.1 MB
5.6 MB
3.0 MB
4.6 MB
2.8 MB
1.6 MB
2.1 MB
1.5 MB
0.9 MB

599
1000
2100
2600
4300
7800
5100
8200
14,400
9800
15,300
25,400

55
81
157
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200

* Includes images taken with non-DX lenses when On is selected for Auto DX
crop.

n
464

❚❚ DX (24×16) Image Area *
Image quality
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
14-bit
TIFF (RGB)

JPEG fine 3

JPEG normal 3

JPEG basic 3

Image size

File size 1

No. of images 1 Buffer capacity 2

Large

7.4 MB

1600

200

Large

9.1 MB

1300

200

Large

6.7 MB

2200

200

Large

8.1 MB

1800

200

Large

11.7 MB

1600

200

Small

6.3 MB

4400

Large

15.0 MB

1300

144

Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small

21.2 MB
12.4 MB
6.3 MB
4.4 MB
2.9 MB
2.1 MB
2.2 MB
1.5 MB
1.1 MB
1.2 MB
0.9 MB
0.7 MB

1300
2200
4400
5300
8000
12,400
10,200
14,800
22,300
18,600
26,100
37,200

96
155
163
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200

* Includes images taken with DX lenses when On is selected for Auto DX crop.
1 All figures are approximate. File size varies with scene recorded.
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100.
Drops if Optimal quality is selected for JPEG/TIFF recording > JPEG
compression or auto distortion control is on.
3 Figures assume JPEG/TIFF recording > JPEG compression is set to Size
priority. Selecting Optimal quality increases the file size of JPEG images;
number of images and buffer capacity drop accordingly.

n
465

d3—Max. Continuous Release (0 327)
The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single
burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 200.

n
466

Battery Life
The movie footage or number of shots that can be recorded with
fully-charged batteries varies with the condition of the battery,
temperature, the interval between shots, and the length of time
menus are displayed. Sample figures for EN-EL18a (2500 mAh)
batteries are given below.
• Photographs, single-frame release mode (CIPA standard 1): Approximately
3020 shots
• Photographs, continuous release mode (Nikon standard 2): Approximately
5960 shots
• Movies: Approximately 55 minutes at 1080/60p 3
1 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±3 °C/5.4 °F) with an AF-S NIKKOR 24–
70mm f/2.8G ED lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled
from infinity to minimum range and one photograph taken at default
settings once every 30 s. Live view not used.
2 Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S VR ED 70–200mm f/2.8G lens
under the following test conditions: vibration reduction off, image
quality set to JPEG normal, image size set to L (large), shutter speed
1/250 s, focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times after
shutter-release button has been pressed halfway for 3 s; six shots are
then taken in succession and monitor turned on for 5 s and then
turned off; cycle repeated once standby timer has expired.
3 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±3 °C/5.4 °F) with the camera at default
settings and an AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED lens under
conditions specified by the Camera and Imaging Products Association
(CIPA). Individual movies can be up to 10 minutes in length or 4 GB in
size; recording may end before these limits are reached if the camera
temperature rises.

n
467

The following can reduce battery life:
• Using the monitor
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
• Repeated autofocus operations
• Taking NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB) photographs
• Slow shutter speeds
• Connecting to Ethernet or wireless networks
• Using a GP-1 or GP-1A GPS unit
• Using a WR-R10/WR-1 wireless remote controller or ML-3
modulite remote control set
• Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL18a
batteries:
• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce
battery performance.
• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their
charge if left unused.
• Check the condition of the battery regularly using the Battery
info option in the setup menu (0 365). If j is displayed for
Calibration, calibrate the battery using the MH-26a battery
charger (if the battery has not been used for more than six
months, recharge the battery when calibration is complete).

n
468

Index
Symbols
e (Programmed auto) ................. 125, 127
f (Shutter-priority auto) ............ 125, 128
g (Aperture-priority auto) ......... 125, 129
h (Manual)....................................... 125, 130
S ................................................................... 111
CL ............................................... 111, 112, 326
CH .............................................. 111, 112, 326
J ................................................................. 111
E (Self-timer)................................. 111, 114
MUP ..................................................... 111, 116
K (Single-point AF) ............................. 100
I (Dynamic-area AF) ................. 100, 315
N (Group-area AF) ...................... 101, 315
H (Auto-area AF) .................................. 101
! (Face-priority AF) ................................ 53
5 (Wide-area AF) ..................................... 53
6 (Normal-area AF) ................................. 53
& (Subject-tracking AF) ...................... 53
L (Matrix) ....................................... 123, 323
M (Center-weighted) .................. 123, 323
N (Spot).................................................... 123
R (Info) button.................... 12, 15, 58, 69
a (Live view) button ........................... 349
a (Live view)............................ 49, 63, 169
Q (Help) ................................................. 17, 20
t (Memory buffer) ................ 43, 327, 464
D switch............................................... 9, 330
I (Focus indicator)............... 43, 105, 109
L (Preset manual) .................... 156, 164
Numerics
1.2× (30 × 20)............................................. 86
12-bit ............................................................ 92
14-bit ............................................................ 92
3D color matrix metering III .............. 123
3D-tracking .................................... 100, 101
5 : 4 (30 × 24).............................................. 86
A
AC adapter...................................... 408, 414

Accessories.............................................. 408
Accessory shoe ............................... 16, 195
Active D-Lighting................ 150, 188, 341
Add items (My Menu).......................... 397
ADL bracketing............................. 150, 333
Adobe RGB .............................................. 305
AE & flash (Auto bracketing set) ..... 140,
333
AE only (Auto bracketing set).. 140, 333
AF....................... 52–54, 97–107, 313–320
AF activation........................................... 315
AF area brackets................................ 10, 38
AF fine-tune............................................ 373
AF-area mode......................... 53, 100, 320
AF-C .................................................... 97, 313
AF-F............................................................... 52
B button ............................ 99, 315, 317
B button for vertical shooting..... 99,
318
AF-S.............................................. 52, 97, 314
After delete ............................................. 296
Ambient brightness sensor.... 5, 57, 359
Angle of view ......................... 85, 406–407
Aperture................................ 129–130, 134
Aperture Lock................................ 134, 343
Aperture-priority auto ........................ 129
Aspect ratio............................... 70, 86, 381
Attaching the lens ................................... 27
Audio................................ 65, 267, 297, 298
Audio output................................. 267, 456
Auto (White balance) .......................... 155
Auto bracketing .................. 140, 333, 334
Auto bracketing (mode M)................ 334
Auto distortion control....................... 307
Auto DX crop ............................................. 86
Auto FP high-speed sync .......... 197, 331
Auto image rotation ............................ 364
Auto ISO sensitivity control............... 119
Auto-area AF.................................. 101, 102
Autofocus ....... 52–54, 97–107, 313–320
Autofocus mode...................... 52, 97, 320

n
469

Autofocus mode restrictions............. 320
B
Backlight.............................................. 9, 330
Battery............... 21–26, 40, 365, 458, 459
Battery info .............................................. 365
Beep ........................................................... 326
D button........ 142, 143, 146, 147, 150,
151, 194, 216, 344
Black-and-white (Monochrome)...... 382
Body cap............................................ 27, 411
Border........................................................ 281
Bracketing............................. 140, 333, 334
Bracketing order .................................... 334
Bulb ............................................................ 132
Burst ........................................ 112, 327, 338
Button backlights............................. 9, 330
C
Calibration ............................................... 459
Camera Control Pro 2........................... 411
Capture NX 2................. 91, 186, 361, 411
Center-weighted metering...... 123, 323
CF card ........................................ 32, 96, 463
CF card slot ................................................ 96
Charging the battery ...................... 21–23
Choose color temp. (White balance)......
156, 161
Choose image area .......... 70, 86, 88, 341
Choose start/end point......................... 79
Clean image sensor .............................. 417
Clock ................................................... 30, 363
Clock battery.................................... 31, 424
Cloudy (White balance) ...................... 156
CLS.............................................................. 196
Color balance.......................................... 383
Color space .............................................. 305
Color temperature .... 155, 156, 157, 161
Communication unit.................. 277, 409
CompactFlash........................... 32, 96, 463
Compatible lenses ................................ 401
Compressed (NEF (RAW) compression)
92

n
470

Connector for external microphone .. 2,
413
Continuous high speed ... 111, 112, 326
Continuous low speed ..... 111, 112, 326
Continuous release mode.................. 111
Continuous-servo AF.................... 97, 313
Control panel.......................................... 6–8
Copy image(s) ........................................ 292
Copyright information ........................ 367
CPU contacts .......................................... 403
CPU lens ................................... 28, 401, 403
Creative Lighting System .......... 195, 196
Crop ...................................... 70, 72, 74, 354
Cropping (PictBridge [Setup] menu) ......
281
Custom Settings .................................... 309
Custom settings bank ......................... 311
Customize command dials ................ 345
Cyanotype (Monochrome) ................ 382
D
Date and time.................................. 30, 363
Date format...................................... 31, 363
Daylight saving time..................... 30, 363
DCF............................................................. 461
Default settings ............................ 211, 430
Delete................................................. 47, 257
Delete all images.......................... 257, 259
Delete current image.................... 47, 257
Depth of field ................................ 126, 337
Destination (Movie settings)................ 75
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) . 282,
283, 461
Diopter............................................... 38, 410
Direct sunlight (White balance)....... 155
Distortion control ................................. 392
D-Lighting ............................................... 379
DPOF....................................... 282, 283, 461
DPOF print order................................... 283
Dual monitor .......................................... 286
DX (24 × 16) 1.5 ×....................... 86, 88, 89
DX format...................................... 85, 86, 87
DX-based movie format......................... 70
Dynamic-area AF.......................... 100, 102

E
Easy exposure compensation........... 322
Edit movie............................................ 79, 82
Electronic rangefinder......................... 109
Ethernet........................................... 276, 409
EV steps for exposure cntrl ................ 321
Exif .............................................................. 461
Exp./flash comp. step value............... 321
Exposure....................... 123, 125, 136, 138
Exposure bracketing ......... 140, 333, 334
Exposure comp. for flash .................... 333
Exposure compensation............ 138, 322
Exposure delay mode.......................... 327
Exposure differential............................ 192
Exposure indicator................................ 131
Exposure lock ......................................... 136
Exposure meters.................... 44, 240, 324
Exposure mode...................................... 125
Exposure program ................................ 438
Exposure smoothing................... 223, 230
Extended menu banks ........................ 301
External microphone ........... 75, 261, 413
F
Face detection........................................ 323
Face-priority AF ........................................ 53
File information ..................................... 245
File naming.............................................. 304
File number sequence......................... 328
Filter effects.......................... 180, 181, 382
Fine-tune optimal exposure.............. 323
Firmware version................................... 374
Flash..................... 195, 196, 203, 206, 208
Flash (White balance) .......................... 155
Flash bracketing ................. 140, 333, 334
Flash compensation............................. 206
Flash control............................................ 202
Flash mode ..................................... 203, 204
Flash only (Auto bracketing set) ..... 141,
333, 334
Flash range .............................................. 196
Flash shutter speed .............................. 332
Flash sync speed.................................... 331
Flash sync terminal............................... 195

Flash-ready indicator.. 11, 199, 209, 454
Flexible program................................... 127
Flicker reduction ................................... 363
Fluorescent (White balance)............. 155
Fn button.................................. 89, 337, 353
Fn button (vertical) ............................... 343
f-number......................................... 129, 403
Focal length ......................... 237, 406–407
Focal plane mark................................... 109
Focus ......... 52–54, 59, 97–109, 313–320
Focus indicator ...................... 43, 105, 109
Focus lock ................................................ 105
Focus mode .............................. 52, 97, 108
Focus mode switch ....................... 28, 108
Focus point .......... 53, 100, 103, 315, 316
Focus point illumination .................... 315
Focus point wrap-around .................. 316
Focus tracking................................. 99, 314
Focus tracking with lock-on.............. 314
Focusing screen..................................... 451
Focus-mode selector ............. 52, 97, 108
Format ............................................... 35, 359
Format memory card........................... 359
Frame interval (Slide show)............... 297
Frame rate .................................................. 74
Frame size/frame rate............................. 74
Frequency response (Movie settings) ....
75
Front-curtain sync ................................ 203
Full-frame playback.............................. 241
Full-time servo AF.................................... 52
FV lock..................................... 208, 337, 350
FX (36 × 24) 1.0 × ..................................... 86
FX format ............................................. 85, 86
FX-based movie format ......................... 70
G
GPS........................................... 238, 240, 251
GPS unit........................................... 238, 412
Group-area AF............................... 101, 102
H
H.264 ......................................................... 456
HDMI ....................................... 267, 285, 461

n
471

HDMI connector .................................... 285
HDR (high dynamic range) ................ 190
Headphones..................................... 68, 267
Help....................................................... 17, 20
Hi ................................................................. 118
Hide image .............................................. 290
High definition ............................. 285, 461
High Dynamic Range (HDR) .............. 190
High ISO NR............................................. 308
Highlights................................................. 246
Histogram ............................. 247, 248, 336
I
Image area ...................... 28, 70, 85, 88, 94
Image comment .................................... 366
Image Dust Off ref photo ................... 361
Image overlay ......................................... 384
Image quality............................................ 90
Image review ................................ 243, 295
Image size .................................................. 94
Incandescent (White balance).......... 155
Index marking .............. 66, 353, 355, 356
Index print ............................................... 282
In-focus indicator .................. 43, 105, 109
Information ................................... 244, 291
Information display .............. 12, 329, 330
Interval timer shooting ....................... 221
IPTC................................................... 251, 368
ISO sensitivity ......................... 76, 117, 119
ISO sensitivity step value.................... 321
i-TTL.................................................. 197, 202
J
JPEG..................................... 90, 92, 304, 387
JPEG basic .................................................. 90
JPEG fine..................................................... 90
JPEG normal .............................................. 90
JPEG/TIFF recording ...................... 92, 304
L

n
472

L (large).......................................... 72, 94, 95
LAN............................................................. 409
Landscape (Set Picture Control) ...... 177
Language .......................................... 29, 364
LCD ........................................................ 9, 330

LCD illumination.................................... 330
Lens........................... 27–28, 235, 373, 401
Lens cap....................................................... 27
Lens focus function buttons ............. 351
Lens focus ring......................... 27, 59, 108
Lens mount .................................. 3, 28, 109
Lens mounting mark .................. 3, 27, 28
Limit AF-area mode selection .......... 320
Live view .............................................. 49, 63
Live view button options ................... 349
Live view photography.................. 49–62
Live view selector.............................. 49, 63
Lo ................................................................ 118
Location data................................. 238, 251
Lock mirror up for cleaning............... 420
Long exposure NR ................................ 308
Lossless compressed (NEF (RAW)
compression) ........................................... 92
M
M (Manual focus) ............................ 59, 108
M (medium) ......................................... 72, 94
Manage Picture Control...................... 183
Manual (Exposure mode)................... 130
Manual focus ................................... 59, 108
Matrix metering............................ 123, 323
Max. continuous release..................... 327
Maximum aperture .... 54, 200, 235, 403
Maximum sensitivity............................ 120
Memory buffer....................... 43, 113, 327
Memory card ............ 32, 35, 96, 359, 462
Memory card capacity ........................ 464
Metering................................................... 123
Microphone ................... 2, 5, 75, 261, 413
Microphone sensitivity (Movie settings)
75
Minimum aperture ........................ 28, 126
Minimum shutter speed..................... 120
Mired ......................................................... 160
Mirror................................................ 116, 420
Mirror up mode ............................ 111, 116
Modeling flash .............................. 126, 333
Monitor.................... 49, 57, 241, 325, 359
Monitor brightness ....................... 57, 359

Monitor color balance ......................... 360
Monitor hue ............................................... 56
Monitor off delay................................... 325
Monochrome................................. 177, 382
Movie ISO sensitivity settings (Movie
settings) ..................................................... 76
Movie live view ............................... 63, 353
Movie quality (Movie settings)............ 74
Movie settings........................................... 74
Movie-record button .................... 65, 349
Multi selector................................... 18, 336
Multi selector (vertical) ....................... 348
Multiple exposure................................. 214
Multi-selector center button............. 335
My Menu ......................................... 339, 396
N
NEF (RAW)........... 90, 91, 92, 95, 304, 387
NEF (RAW) bit depth ............................... 92
NEF (RAW) processing ......................... 387
NEF (RAW) recording ............. 92, 95, 304
Neutral (Set Picture Control) ............. 177
No. of copies (PictBridge [Setup] menu)
281
Non-CPU lens ...................... 235, 401, 405
Non-CPU lens data....................... 235, 236
Normal-area AF......................................... 53
Number of focus points ...................... 316
O
Optimal quality (JPEG compression) 92
Overview data ........................................ 252
P
Page size................................................... 281
Peripheral connector ....................... 2, 409
Perspective control............................... 393
Photo information ....................... 244, 291
PictBridge........................................ 279, 461
Picture Controls ..................................... 177
Pitching............................................ 340, 372
Playback ............................ 46, 77, 241, 285
Playback display options.................... 291
Playback folder....................................... 290
Playback information.................. 244, 291

Playback menu ...................................... 289
Playback zoom.............................. 253, 348
Portrait (Set Picture Control)............. 177
Power aperture............................. 353, 355
Power connector.......................... 408, 414
Predictive focus tracking....................... 99
Preset focus point........................ 335, 351
Preset manual (White balance)....... 156,
164
Press the shutter-release button
halfway....................................................... 44
Primary slot selection...................... 41, 96
Print (DPOF) ............................................ 282
Print options (PictBridge [Setup] menu)
281
Print select............................................... 282
Printing..................................................... 279
Programmed auto ................................ 127
Protecting photographs..................... 255
Pv button........ 54, 66, 126, 333, 342, 355
Q
Quiet (Live view photography)........... 60
R
Rank items (My Menu) ........................ 399
Rear control panel ..................................... 8
Rear-curtain sync .................................. 203
Recent settings ...................................... 396
Rechargeable Li-ion battery .. i, 21, 458,
459
Red-eye correction............................... 380
Red-eye reduction................................ 203
Release button to use dial ................. 347
Release mode......................................... 111
Remote cord ........................... 71, 132, 412
Remove items (My Menu).................. 398
Removing the lens from the camera 28
Reset........................................ 211, 301, 311
Resize ........................................................ 389
Restoring default settings ....... 211, 301,
311, 430
Retouch menu ....................................... 375
Reverse indicators ................................ 347

n
473

RGB ............................................. 90, 247, 305
RGB Histogram....................................... 247
Rolling ............................................. 340, 372
Rotate tall................................................. 296
S

n
474

S (small) ......................................... 72, 94, 95
Save selected frame ............................... 79
Save/load settings................................. 370
Screen tips ............................................... 329
Secondary slot function........................ 96
Self-timer............................... 111, 114, 325
Sensitivity....................................... 117, 119
Set clock from satellite ........................ 240
Set Picture Control................................ 177
Setup menu............................................. 358
Shade (White balance) ........................ 156
Shooting data......................................... 249
Shooting menu ...................................... 299
Shooting menu bank ........................... 300
Shutter speed ...................... 128, 130, 134
Shutter speed lock ...................... 134, 343
Shutter-priority auto ............................ 128
Shutter-release button 43, 44, 105, 136,
357
Shutter-release button AE-L.............. 324
Side-by-side comparison.................... 394
Silent (Live view photography) .......... 60
Single frame ............................................ 111
Single-point AF ............................ 100, 102
Single-servo AF........................ 52, 97, 314
Size ...................................... 72, 94, 381, 389
Size priority (JPEG compression) ....... 92
Skylight ..................................................... 382
Slide show................................................ 297
Slot.................................. 32, 41, 75, 96, 242
Slot empty release lock ....................... 347
Slot selection ............................ 41, 96, 242
Slow sync.................................................. 203
Smoothing............................................... 192
Speaker ........................................... 266, 267
Speedlights.................................... 195, 196
Spot ............................................................ 123
Spot white balance............................... 169

sRGB........................................................... 305
Standard (Set Picture Control) ......... 177
Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR 197,
202
Standby timer......................... 44, 240, 324
Start printing ................................. 281, 282
Storage folder......................................... 302
Store by orientation ............................. 319
Straighten ................................................ 391
Sub-dial frame advance...................... 346
Sub-selector...... 104, 105, 136, 342, 356
Synchronized release.................. 339, 352
T
Television ................................................. 285
Ten-pin remote terminal ..... 2, 238, 412,
413
Thumbnail ...................................... 241, 336
TIFF (RGB)................................... 90, 92, 304
Time .................................................... 30, 363
Time stamp ............................................. 281
Time zone ......................................... 30, 363
Time zone and date ...................... 30, 363
Time-lapse photography ................... 229
Timer................................................. 114, 221
Toning (Set Picture Control)..... 180, 182
Top control panel.................................. 6–7
Trim ............................................................ 381
Two-button reset .................................. 211
Type D lens .............................................. 403
Type E lens............................................... 403
Type G lens .............................................. 403
U
Uncompressed (NEF (RAW)
compression) ........................................... 92
USB............................................................. 280
USB cable .............................................. i, 280
UT-1................................................... 277, 409
UTC............................................. 30, 239, 251
V
Viewfinder ................................. 10, 38, 451
Viewfinder eyepiece ..................... 39, 114
Viewfinder focus...................... 38, 39, 410

Viewfinder grid display ....................... 329
ViewNX 2 ............... 91, 269, 272, 364, 366
Vignette control..................................... 306
Virtual horizon................. 58, 69, 340, 372
Vivid (Set Picture Control) .................. 177
Voice memo .................................. 261–267
Voice memo button ............................. 262
Voice memo overwrite........................ 262
W
Warm filter ............................................... 382
WB...................................................... 146, 155
WB bracketing (Auto bracketing set)......
146, 333
White balance................................ 146, 155
White balance bracketing......... 146, 333
Wide-area AF ............................................. 53
Wind noise reduction (Movie settings) ..
75
Wireless network.......................... 276, 409
Wireless remote controller. 71, 350, 411
Wireless transmitter .................... 276, 409
WT-4.................................................. 276, 409
WT-5.................................................. 276, 409
X
XQD card .................................... 32, 96, 462
XQD card slot............................................. 96

n
a

475

476

No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part
(except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be
made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.

DIGITAL CAMERA

User's Manual

Printed in Singapore

SB4E02(11)

6MB20811-02

Nikon Manual Viewer 2
Use the Nikon Manual Viewer 2 app to view
manuals anytime, anywhere on your smartphone or
tablet.

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-702
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2013:12:26 19:01:40Z
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 7.2
Modify Date                     : 2014:05:09 21:37:09+09:00
Metadata Date                   : 2014:05:09 21:37:09+09:00
Document ID                     : uuid:2c137b0d-2873-417d-9816-a9246ba28ba5
Instance ID                     : uuid:417f3705-25f8-4279-8084-14364d9a4474
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 
Creator                         : Nikon Corporation
Page Count                      : 500
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Author                          : Nikon Corporation

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Nikon D4S

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation